bg

Easy Recipes

  • Recipe Index
  • About
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Recipe Index
  • About
search icon
Homepage link
  • Recipe Index
  • About
×
Home

Seven Layer Taco Dip Recipe

July 13, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you walk into a party and there's that one dip everyone's crowding around? That's exactly what happened to me last month at my neighbor's game day party. I walked in and saw this gorgeous Seven Layer Taco Dip sitting on the counter, and honestly, it was like a magnet!

I couldn't stop thinking about how pretty and delicious it looked, so of course I had to recreate it at home. Emily rolled her eyes when I told her we were making "yet another dip recipe" (she's thirteen, everything gets an eye roll), but guess what? She was the first one asking for seconds when we tested it!

This seven layer taco dip has become my go-to party appetizer because it's ridiculously easy to make, looks absolutely stunning, and feeds a crowd without breaking the bank. Plus, you can make it ahead of time, which is basically a lifesaver when you're hosting.

Speaking of easy party appetizers, if you're looking for another crowd-pleaser that pairs perfectly with this dip, you've got to try my slow-cooker buffalo chicken dip - it's another one of those recipes that disappears within minutes!

Why You Will Like This Seven Layer Taco Dip

Taco dip in white dish topped with olives

  • Ready in just 20 minutes - No cooking required, just assembly and you're done
  • Feeds 12 people easily - Perfect for parties, potlucks, or game day gatherings
  • Make-ahead friendly - Actually tastes better after chilling for a few hours
  • Completely customizable - Switch up the layers based on what you have or what your crowd likes
  • Gluten-free naturally - Great for guests with dietary restrictions
  • Budget-friendly - Uses simple, affordable ingredients you probably already have

Seven Layer Taco Dip Ingredients

For the Bean Layer:

  • 32 oz refried beans (canned)
  • 1 oz taco seasoning packet (about 2.5 tablespoons)

For the Creamy Layer:

  • 8 oz cream cheese (room temperature - this is important!)
  • 1 lb sour cream
  • 1 oz taco seasoning packet (about 2.5 tablespoons)

For the Remaining Layers:

  • 2 cups pico de gallo or your favorite salsa
  • 12-16 oz guacamole (store-bought or homemade)
  • 1-2 cups shredded mild cheddar cheese
  • 2 oz sliced black olives (canned and drained)
  • Green onions or fresh cilantro for garnish (optional but pretty!)

Let me tell you something about the cream cheese - make sure it's actually at room temperature! I learned this the hard way when I tried to rush it once and ended up with lumpy cream cheese bits throughout my dip. Not cute!

How To Make Seven Layer Taco Dip Instructions

Preparing the Bean Base

  1. Mix the seasoned beans: In a medium bowl, combine the refried beans with one packet of taco seasoning using an electric hand mixer.
  2. Blend until smooth: Mix for about 30 seconds until the seasoning is evenly distributed and the beans are smooth.
  3. Set aside: Transfer to a separate container and set aside while you prepare the cream mixture.

Creating the Creamy Middle Layer

  • Combine cream ingredients: In a large bowl, add the room temperature cream cheese, sour cream, and the second packet of taco seasoning.
  • Mix thoroughly: Using your electric hand mixer, blend everything together for 1-2 minutes until completely smooth and creamy.
  • Check for lumps: Make sure there are no cream cheese lumps remaining - this step makes all the difference!
Refried beans layer in white dish
Creamy sour cream layer over guacamole

Assembling Your Seven Layer Dip

  • Choose your dish: Use either a deep 9x13 inch dish for thinner layers or a glass trifle bowl for more dramatic layers.
  • Start with beans: Spread the seasoned refried bean mixture evenly as your bottom layer.
  • Add the creamy layer: Carefully spread the sour cream mixture over the beans, trying not to mix the layers.
  • Layer the guacamole: Gently spread the guacamole as your third layer.
  • Add the pico de gallo: Spread your salsa or pico de gallo evenly over the guacamole.
  • Sprinkle the cheese: Add an even layer of shredded cheddar cheese.
Guacamole layer in white dish
Cheese and cherry tomato layer

  • Top with olives: Distribute the sliced olives across the top.
  • Garnish beautifully: Finish with chopped green onions or fresh cilantro if using.
  • Chill before serving: Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes before serving.

The key to gorgeous layers is being gentle when spreading each one. I use the back of a large spoon and work from the outside edges toward the center.

Storage & Reheating For Your Layered Taco Dip

This 7 layer taco dip is actually better the next day! Store it covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

The flavors meld together beautifully overnight, and honestly, I sometimes make it the day before parties just for that reason.

Don't freeze this dip - the sour cream and guacamole don't handle freezing well and you'll end up with a watery mess when it thaws.

If you have leftovers (which is rare in my house!), they make an amazing lunch the next day with some tortilla chips or even as a topping for baked potatoes.

Tips and Variations For Seven Layer Taco Dip

Here are some tricks I've learned from making this seven layer dip recipe probably fifty times:

  • Use a clear glass dish - Half the appeal is seeing all those beautiful layers!
  • Don't skip the room temperature cream cheese - Trust me on this one. Cold cream cheese will give you lumps no matter how long you mix it.
  • Make your own guacamole - Store-bought is fine, but homemade takes this dip to the next level.
  • Add jalapeños - Emily's friends love when I add diced jalapeños to the cream cheese layer for extra heat.
  • Try different beans - Black beans work great instead of refried beans for a different texture.
  • Make it lighter - Swap Greek yogurt for half the sour cream to cut calories without losing flavor.
  • Go vegetarian - This recipe is already vegetarian, but make sure your refried beans don't contain lard if that matters to you.

Have you ever tried making individual cups? I did this for Emily's birthday party last year using clear plastic cups, and the kids went crazy for their own personal 7 layer dip!

Seven Layer Taco Dip FAQ

How long does 7 layer taco dip last in the refrigerator?

This dip will stay fresh in the refrigerator for 3-4 days when covered tightly.

Can you make 7 layer taco dip ahead of time?

Yes! You can assemble this dip up to 24 hours in advance. Cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

What can I serve with 7 layer taco dip?

Serve with tortilla chips, crackers, fresh vegetables like bell peppers and celery, or baked tortilla chips for a healthier option.

What are the 7 layers in this taco dip?

The layers are: refried beans, sour cream mixture, guacamole, pico de gallo/salsa, shredded cheddar cheese, sliced olives, and green onions/cilantro garnish.

Recipes You May Like

  • 3-Ingredient Cheese Ball Recipe - Another easy party appetizer that pairs perfectly with this dip
  • Spinach Artichoke Dip In Bread Bowl - When you want something warm and cheesy to go with your cold dip
  • Mexican Meal Prep Bowls - Use similar flavors in a healthy meal format

Conclusion

Layered dip in glass bowl

This Seven Layer Taco Dip has honestly become one of my most requested recipes. Every time I bring it somewhere, people ask for the recipe, and I love that it's so simple to share.

The best part? You probably have most of these ingredients in your kitchen right now. It's one of those recipes that saves the day when you need to bring something to a last-minute gathering.

Trust me, make this once and it'll become your go-to party appetizer too. Your guests will think you spent hours on it, but we'll know it only took 20 minutes!

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out. I'd love to hear about any variations you make - Emily and I are always looking for new ways to jazz up our 7 layer dip recipe!

Don't forget to save this to your Pinterest boards for your next party - you'll thank me later!

Pinterest CTA
Seven Layer Taco Dip
Seven Layer Taco Dip recipe

Taco dip with scoop removed side view

Seven Layer Taco Dip Recipe - Perfect Party Appetizer

This Seven Layer Taco Dip has become my go-to party appetizer because it's ridiculously easy to make, looks absolutely stunning, and feeds a crowd without breaking the bank. Plus, you can make it ahead of time, which is basically a lifesaver when you're hosting. Ready in just 20 minutes with beautiful layers that everyone will love!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes mins
Chilling Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 20 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Servings 12 people
Calories 293 kcal

Equipment

  • Electric hand mixer
  • 9x13 inch dish or glass trifle bowl
  • Medium mixing bowls

Ingredients
  

Bean Layer

  • 32 oz refried beans canned
  • 1 oz taco seasoning packet about 2.5 tablespoons

Creamy Layer

  • 8 oz cream cheese room temperature
  • 1 lb sour cream
  • 1 oz taco seasoning packet about 2.5 tablespoons

Remaining Layers

  • 2 cups pico de gallo or salsa
  • 12-16 oz guacamole store-bought or homemade
  • 1-2 cups shredded mild cheddar cheese
  • 2 oz sliced black olives canned and drained
  • green onions or fresh cilantro for garnish, optional

Instructions
 

  • In a medium bowl, combine the refried beans with one packet of taco seasoning using an electric hand mixer. Mix for about 30 seconds until the seasoning is evenly distributed and the beans are smooth. Set aside.
  • In a large bowl, add the room temperature cream cheese, sour cream, and the second packet of taco seasoning. Using your electric hand mixer, blend everything together for 1-2 minutes until completely smooth and creamy with no lumps remaining.
  • Choose either a deep 9x13 inch dish for thinner layers or a glass trifle bowl for more dramatic layers. Start by spreading the seasoned refried bean mixture evenly as your bottom layer.
  • Carefully spread the sour cream mixture over the beans as the second layer, trying not to mix the layers together.
  • Gently spread the guacamole as your third layer, followed by the pico de gallo or salsa as the fourth layer.
  • Add an even layer of shredded cheddar cheese, then distribute the sliced olives across the top. Finish with chopped green onions or fresh cilantro if using.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled with tortilla chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables for dipping.

Notes

This dip is actually better the next day as the flavors meld together beautifully! You can make it up to 24 hours ahead of time. Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. For best results, make sure your cream cheese is truly at room temperature to avoid lumps. Feel free to customize the layers based on your preferences - try adding jalapeños for heat, black beans instead of refried beans, or Greek yogurt instead of some of the sour cream for a lighter version.

Nutrition

Calories: 293kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 8gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 51mgSodium: 849mgPotassium: 217mgFiber: 5gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 881IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 151mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Gluten-Free, Make Ahead, Party Dip, Seven Layer Taco Dip Recipe - Perfect Party Appetizer, Vegetarian
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Easy Ham And Cheese Pinwheels Recipe

July 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you need something that looks fancy but takes almost no effort? These ham cheese pinwheels are exactly what happened last month when Emily announced she was bringing friends over after school (with about 30 minutes notice, naturally!).

I practically ran to the fridge, grabbed some deli ham and swiss cheese, and threw together these incredible roll ups that saved the day completely.

These hot ham and cheese roll ups are basically magic in appetizer form. Picture buttery, flaky pizza dough wrapped around savory ham and melted swiss cheese, then topped with the most incredible poppy seed sauce that makes everything taste gourmet.

The best part? They take just 35 minutes from start to finish, and trust me, there won't be any leftovers.

If you're looking for another crowd-pleasing appetizer that's just as easy, you'll want to try my buffalo chicken quesadillas - they're always a huge hit at parties too!

Why You Will Love These Ham Cheese Pinwheels

single baked pinwheel on plate

Let me tell you why these ham and cheese pinwheels are about to become your go-to party appetizer:

  • Ready in just 35 minutes - Perfect for those last-minute gathering announcements
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have in your fridge
  • Golden brown and bubbly with that irresistible poppy seed butter sauce
  • Make-ahead friendly - assemble them the night before and bake when needed
  • Feeds a crowd - one batch makes 12 generous servings
  • Kid-approved - Emily's friends devoured them and asked for the recipe
  • Looks impressive but requires zero fancy cooking skills

Ham Cheese Pinwheels Ingredients

Here's what you'll need to make these hot ham and cheese rolls:

  • 1 tube refrigerated pizza dough (the kind from the dairy section)
  • ¾ lb ham, very thinly sliced (I get mine from the deli counter)
  • 8 ounces swiss cheese, very thinly sliced (again, deli counter is your friend)
  • 8 tablespoons butter, melted (that's half a stick)
  • 2 tablespoons brown sugar (adds the perfect touch of sweetness)
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard (don't skip this - it makes the sauce!)
  • 2 tablespoons poppy seeds (the secret ingredient that makes these special)
  • Cooking spray (for the pan)
  • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley, optional (for a pop of color)

How To Make Ham Cheese Pinwheels Instructions

Making these baked ham rolls is honestly so straightforward. Here's exactly how I do it:

Prep Your Pan And Oven

  1. Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F. This gives you time to assemble everything while it heats up.
  2. Coat a 9×13 inch pan with cooking spray. Don't skip this step - nobody wants stuck pinwheels!

Roll Out The Dough

  1. Unroll the pizza dough onto a clean, non-stick surface. I usually use my kitchen counter or a large cutting board.
  2. Roll the dough into a large rectangle, roughly 13×8 inches. If it springs back (and it probably will), just let it rest for a minute and try again.
pizza dough with ham slices
raw ham cheese pinwheels

Add The Filling

  1. Layer the ham evenly over the entire surface of the dough. Make sure you cover it completely - every bite should have ham!
  2. Layer the swiss cheese over the ham in the same way. This is where that thin slicing really matters for easy rolling.

Roll And Slice

  1. Starting at one of the long ends, tightly roll up the dough jelly-roll style. Take your time here - a tight roll means better-looking pinwheels.
  2. Pinch the seam to seal. This prevents everything from unraveling during baking.
  3. Cut the roll crosswise into 12 equal pieces. I use a sharp knife and make gentle sawing motions to avoid squishing.
  4. Arrange the pinwheels cut-side up in your prepared pan. They should fit nicely with a little space between each one.

Make The Magic Sauce

unbaked pinwheels with glaze
baked ham cheese rolls

  1. Whisk together the melted butter, brown sugar, Dijon mustard, and poppy seeds. This sauce is what takes these from good to absolutely incredible.
  2. Pour the sauce evenly over all the pinwheels. Don't worry if it pools a bit - that's exactly what you want.

Bake To Golden Perfection

  1. Bake for 25-30 minutes or until golden brown on top. They're done when they look gorgeous and bubbly.
  2. Sprinkle with chopped parsley if you want that fresh pop of color, then serve immediately while they're hot.

Storage And Reheating Ham Cheese Pinwheels

The thing about these ham and swiss pinwheels is that they rarely last long enough to worry about storage (seriously, Emily's friends cleared the whole pan last time). But just in case you have leftovers:

Refrigerator storage: Keep them covered in the fridge for up to 3 days. They taste great cold too, honestly.

Reheating: Pop them in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes to get that fresh-baked warmth back. Don't use the microwave - it makes them soggy.

Freezing: You can freeze the baked pinwheels for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and reheat before serving.

Make-ahead tip: This is my favorite part - you can assemble the whole pan, cover with foil, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours before baking. Just add 5 extra minutes to the baking time if they're cold from the fridge.

Tips For Perfect Ham Cheese Pinwheels

After making these party appetizer pinwheels more times than I can count, here are my best tips:

  • Get your deli meat sliced thin - thick slices make rolling difficult and can cause tears in the dough.
  • Don't overfill - I learned this the hard way when my first batch exploded during baking (Emily still brings this up!).
  • Use a sharp knife for cutting - A dull knife will squish your beautiful roll and make messy pinwheels.
  • Try different cheese combinations - Cheddar works great, and so does provolone. Emily's current obsession is with sharp cheddar instead of swiss.
  • Make the sauce ahead - You can whisk it together in the morning and just pour it over when you're ready to bake.

Can you swap the pizza dough? Absolutely! You can use two 8-ounce cans of crescent roll sheets instead. The texture is slightly different but just as delicious.

What about making them smaller? Cut the roll into 16 pieces for bite-sized appetizers - perfect for cocktail parties where people are standing around with drinks.

Ham Cheese Pinwheels Faq

Can I make ham and cheese pinwheels ahead of time?

Yes! Assemble the pinwheels, cover with foil, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours before baking.

Can I substitute swiss cheese in pinwheels?

Absolutely! Cheddar, provolone, or mozzarella work great as swiss cheese alternatives.

How long do leftover ham and cheese pinwheels last?

Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes.

Can you freeze ham and cheese pinwheels?

Yes! Freeze baked pinwheels for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight and reheat before serving.

Recipes You May Like

If these ham cheese roll ups are hitting the spot, you'll definitely want to try these other crowd-pleasers:

  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - Another hot, melty appetizer that's perfect for parties
  • Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs - These baked bites are just as addictive
  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - When you want something with a little kick

Conclusion

golden stuffed mushrooms with parsley

These ham and cheese pinwheels have honestly saved me so many times when I needed something quick but impressive. The combination of buttery, flaky dough with savory ham and melted cheese, all topped with that amazing poppy seed sauce, just works perfectly every single time.

What I love most is how simple they are to make, yet they always get rave reviews. Emily's friends still ask when I'm making "those roll things" again, and honestly, that's the best compliment a recipe can get.

So next time you need an appetizer that looks fancy but won't stress you out, give these a try. Make sure to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it again when party season hits!

Pinterest CTA
Ham Cheese Pinwheels
Ham Cheese Pinwheels recipe
baked ham cheese rolls

Ham and Cheese Pinwheels

These hot ham and cheese pinwheels are rolls loaded with plenty of meat and swiss, then topped with a butter poppy seed sauce and baked to golden brown perfection. Perfect party appetizer ready in just 35 minutes!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 25 minutes mins
Total Time 35 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 12 pinwheels
Calories 304 kcal

Equipment

  • 9x13 inch baking pan
  • Rolling Pin
  • Sharp Knife

Ingredients
  

  • 1 tube refrigerated pizza dough
  • ¾ lb ham very thinly sliced
  • 8 ounces swiss cheese very thinly sliced
  • 8 tablespoons butter melted
  • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoons poppy seeds
  • cooking spray
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat a 9×13 inch pan with cooking spray.
  • Unroll the pizza dough onto a clean, non-stick surface and roll into a large rectangle, roughly 13×8 inches.
  • Layer the ham evenly over the entire surface of the dough, then layer the swiss cheese over the ham in the same way.
  • Starting at one of the long ends, tightly roll up the dough jelly-roll style. Pinch the seam to seal.
  • Cut the roll crosswise into 12 equal pieces and arrange cut-side up in the prepared pan.
  • Whisk together the melted butter, brown sugar, Dijon mustard, and poppy seeds. Pour evenly over the pinwheels.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes or until golden brown. Sprinkle with chopped parsley if desired, then serve immediately.

Notes

You can substitute crescent roll sheets for pizza dough - use 2 of the 8-ounce cans. The rolls can be assembled and stored unbaked in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours - just cover with foil and bake when ready. Try different cheese combinations like cheddar or provolone for variety.

Nutrition

Calories: 304kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 14gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 55mgSodium: 690mgPotassium: 106mgSugar: 4gVitamin A: 390IUCalcium: 177mgIron: 1.3mg
Keyword Easy, Ham and Cheese Pinwheels, Make Ahead, Party Food
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!


Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese Recipe

July 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you need an appetizer that looks fancy but won't stress you out? That's exactly how I felt last month when Emily's teacher asked parents to bring something "special" for the school fundraiser, and these stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese saved the day!

I was panicking until I remembered this recipe sitting in my recipe box. They're seriously the perfect party trick - they look like you spent hours in the kitchen, but honestly take about 35 minutes from start to finish.

The best part? Everyone always asks for the recipe afterward. Last week, my neighbor Sarah (yes, another Sarah!) practically begged me to write it down after trying them at our block party. When I told her how simple they were, she didn't believe me until I walked her through it right there in my kitchen.

Speaking of easy appetizers, if you're planning a party spread, these garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs are another crowd-pleaser that pairs perfectly with stuffed mushrooms. Trust me on this one - I learned this combination works magic at parties!

Why You Will Like This Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms Recipe

golden stuffed mushrooms with parsley

Let me tell you why these little beauties will become your go-to party appetizer:

  • Super quick prep time - Only 15 minutes of actual work, then the oven does the rest
  • Vegetarian-friendly - Finally, an appetizer that satisfies everyone at the party
  • Make-ahead friendly - Assemble them the night before and just pop in the oven
  • Rich, creamy texture - The cream cheese filling is absolutely divine
  • Perfect finger food - No utensils needed, which makes mingling so much easier
  • Budget-friendly - Uses simple ingredients you probably already have

Ingredients For Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese

Here's everything you need to make these amazing cream cheese stuffed mushrooms:

  • 16 oz fresh white button mushrooms (about 24 medium-sized caps)
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 5 cloves garlic, minced or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 8 oz cream cheese, softened to room temperature
  • ⅔ cup shredded Parmesan cheese, divided
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper (optional - skip if you don't like heat)
  • 1 ½ tablespoons minced fresh parsley

Quick tip: Make sure that cream cheese is actually room temperature! I learned this the hard way when I tried to rush it. Cold cream cheese creates lumpy filling, and nobody wants that.

How To Make Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese

Preparing Your Mushrooms

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F and line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Clean the mushrooms gently with a damp paper towel, then remove the stems by giving them a gentle twist. They should pop right off!
  3. Set the mushroom caps aside on your prepared baking sheet, gill-side up.
  4. Finely chop the removed stems and set aside. Don't throw these away - they're going into your filling!
chopped mushrooms on wooden board
chopped mushrooms cooking in butter

Cooking The Mushroom Stems

  1. Heat a skillet over medium heat and add the butter.
  2. Once melted, add the chopped mushroom stems and black pepper.
  3. Cook, stirring occasionally, until most of the moisture evaporates from the mushrooms (about 3 minutes).
  4. Add the minced garlic and salt, cooking for another 30 seconds while stirring constantly.
  5. Remove from heat and let this mixture cool completely.

Making The Cream Cheese Filling

  1. In a mixing bowl, combine the softened cream cheese, most of the Parmesan (save a few tablespoons for topping), onion powder, thyme, cayenne, and fresh parsley.
  2. Add the cooled mushroom stem mixture and stir everything together until well combined.
cream cheese and spices in glass bowl
mixed mushroom cheese filling in bowl

The filling should be creamy and well-mixed. If it looks a bit chunky, that's totally normal - the mushroom pieces add great texture!

Assembling Your Stuffed Mushroom Caps

  1. Using a tablespoon or small cookie scoop, fill each mushroom cap generously with the cream cheese mixture.
  2. Sprinkle the tops with the reserved Parmesan cheese.

Don't be shy with the filling! These baked stuffed mushrooms should look plump and generous.

Baking The Mushrooms

raw stuffed mushrooms on baking tray
baked stuffed mushrooms on tray

  1. Bake in the preheated oven for 20 minutes, until the tops are golden brown and the mushrooms are tender.
  2. Serve immediately while hot, garnished with extra fresh parsley if desired.

Storage And Reheating Your Cream Cheese Mushroom Appetizer

Store any leftover stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

For reheating, I recommend using a 350°F oven for 8-10 minutes rather than the microwave. The oven keeps them from getting soggy, which nobody wants!

You can also freeze these after baking. Just thaw completely and reheat in the oven. They won't be quite as crispy as fresh, but they're still delicious.

Creative Variations For Your Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese

Want to switch things up? Here are some variations I've tried over the years:

  • Add cooked bacon bits for a non-vegetarian version (Emily's personal favorite)
  • Swap thyme for fresh rosemary for a more earthy flavor
  • Use different mushroom varieties - baby bellas work beautifully
  • Add chopped sun-dried tomatoes for a Mediterranean twist
  • Mix in some chopped spinach for extra nutrition and color

Have you ever tried stuffing larger portobello caps? They make an amazing dinner when you scale up the filling recipe!

The key is keeping that creamy cream cheese base - it's what makes these stuffed mushroom caps so irresistible.

Frequently Asked Questions About Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms

Can I make cream cheese stuffed mushrooms ahead of time?

Yes! You can assemble them up to 24 hours in advance, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate. Add 2-3 extra minutes to baking time if cooking from cold.

Can I use different types of mushrooms instead of button mushrooms?

Absolutely! Baby bella, cremini, or large shiitake mushroom caps work great. Just ensure they're large enough to hold the filling and adjust cooking time if needed.

How do I store leftover stuffed mushrooms?

Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a 350°F oven for 8-10 minutes or microwave for 30-45 seconds until heated through.

What should I serve with cream cheese stuffed mushrooms?

These pair perfectly with wine, crackers, and a charcuterie board. They also complement grilled meats, roasted vegetables, or can be served as part of a holiday appetizer spread.

Recipes You May Like

If you're planning a party and need more appetizer ideas, these recipes pair perfectly with stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese:

  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - Another finger food that's always a hit at parties
  • Air Fryer Tuna Melts - Quick and satisfying for a casual gathering
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - Perfect alongside these mushrooms for game day

Final Thoughts On These Amazing Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese

crispy stuffed mushrooms on marble plate

There's something magical about watching a plate of these cream cheese stuffed mushrooms disappear at a party. They're fancy enough for special occasions but simple enough for a Tuesday night dinner.

The combination of that creamy, garlicky filling with the tender mushroom caps is just perfect. Plus, they're one of those recipes that makes you look like a total cooking genius without actually being complicated!

Next time you need an appetizer that will impress without the stress, give these a try. I promise they'll become your new go-to party trick.

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for your next gathering - you'll definitely want to make these again!

Pinterest CTA
stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese
stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese recipe
close up stuffed mushroom with herbs

Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese

These cream cheese stuffed mushrooms are the ultimate party appetizer! Stuffed with a creamy, garlicky filling and baked until golden brown. Perfect finger food that looks fancy but takes just 35 minutes to make.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 35 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 8 people
Calories 219 kcal

Equipment

  • Rimmed Baking Sheet
  • Large Skillet
  • Mixing Bowl

Ingredients
  

  • 16 oz fresh white button mushrooms about 24 medium-sized caps
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 5 cloves garlic minced or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 8 oz cream cheese softened to room temperature
  • ⅔ cup shredded Parmesan cheese divided
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional - omit if you don't like heat
  • 1 ½ tablespoons minced fresh parsley

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F and line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Clean the mushrooms gently with a damp paper towel, then remove the stems by giving them a gentle twist. They should pop right off!
  • Set the mushroom caps aside on your prepared baking sheet, gill-side up.
  • Finely chop the removed stems and set aside. Don't throw these away - they're going into your filling!
  • Heat a skillet over medium heat and add the butter.
  • Once melted, add the chopped mushroom stems and black pepper.
  • Cook, stirring occasionally, until most of the moisture evaporates from the mushrooms (about 3 minutes).
  • Add the minced garlic and salt, cooking for another 30 seconds while stirring constantly.
  • Remove from heat and let this mixture cool completely.
  • In a mixing bowl, combine the softened cream cheese, most of the Parmesan (save a few tablespoons for topping), onion powder, thyme, cayenne, and fresh parsley.
  • Add the cooled mushroom stem mixture and stir everything together until well combined.
  • Using a tablespoon or small cookie scoop, fill each mushroom cap generously with the cream cheese mixture.
  • Sprinkle the tops with the reserved Parmesan cheese.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 20 minutes, until the tops are golden brown and the mushrooms are tender.
  • Serve immediately while hot, garnished with extra fresh parsley if desired.

Notes

Make sure your cream cheese is completely softened to room temperature for the smoothest filling. You can assemble these up to 24 hours in advance - just cover and refrigerate, then add 2-3 extra minutes to baking time. Feel free to substitute baby bella or cremini mushrooms for different flavors!

Nutrition

Calories: 219kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 8gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 11gCholesterol: 56mgSodium: 420mgPotassium: 320mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 680IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 158mgIron: 0.8mg
Keyword Make Ahead, Party Food, Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese, Vegetarian
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Bacon Wrapped Air Fryer Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

July 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Looking for the perfect party appetizer that'll have everyone coming back for more? These bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers air fryer style are exactly what you need! I discovered this recipe when Emily brought home friends after school one day, and I needed something quick that would actually impress teenage taste buds.

The combination of creamy cheese filling, crispy bacon, and just the right amount of heat makes these poppers absolutely irresistible. Plus, the air fryer does all the work – no messy oil or constant flipping required!

Speaking of crowd-pleasing appetizers, you might also want to try my Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas – they're another hit at parties and just as easy to make.

Why You Will Like This Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

bacon jalapeno poppers close up on plate

  • Super quick to make – Ready in just 40 minutes from start to finish
  • Air fryer magic – Gets the bacon perfectly crispy without any oil mess
  • Crowd pleaser – I've never seen these last more than 10 minutes at a party
  • Customizable heat level – Remove more or less seeds depending on your spice tolerance
  • Make-ahead friendly – Assemble them hours before your guests arrive
  • Perfect party size – Each pepper makes 2 poppers, so it's easy to scale up

Ingredients For Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

  • 8 ounces cream cheese, room temperature
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese
  • ¼ cup green onions, sliced (green parts only)
  • 8 large jalapenos, halved and de-seeded
  • 8 pieces bacon, cut in half
  • Toothpicks for securing
  • Non-stick cooking spray

The key to amazing jalapeno poppers with bacon is using room temperature cream cheese – it mixes so much better and gives you that smooth, creamy filling everyone loves.

How To Make Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers In Air Fryer

Prep The Jalapenos

  1. Clean the jalapenos thoroughly and cut off the top stem portion.
  2. Cut each jalapeno in half lengthwise using a sharp knife.
  3. Remove all seeds using a regular metal teaspoon – this works better than any fancy tool, trust me!
  4. Scrape out the white pith if you want them milder (I learned this after making them way too spicy the first time).
halved raw jalapenos on green board
cheese filling in glass bowl

Make The Cheese Filling

  1. Mix the cream cheese, cheddar cheese, and green onions in a medium bowl until well combined.
  2. Stuff each jalapeno half with about 1 tablespoon of the cheese mixture.
  3. Pack it in there – don't be shy! The more filling, the better.

Wrap With Bacon

  1. Take a half-piece of bacon and wrap it around each stuffed jalapeno.
  2. Secure with 1-2 toothpicks – this step is crucial! The bacon shrinks as it cooks, so without toothpicks, you'll end up with bacon sliding off everywhere.
raw stuffed jalapenos with bacon on blue board
cooked jalapeno poppers in air fryer basket

Air Fry The Poppers

  1. Preheat your air fryer to 350°F for about 3 minutes.
  2. Spray the basket with non-stick cooking spray to prevent sticking.
  3. Place poppers in the basket with space between each one for proper air circulation.
  4. Air fry for 10-13 minutes until the bacon is crispy and cheese is melted and bubbly.
  5. Remove with tongs and let them cool for 2-3 minutes before serving (the cheese will be molten hot!).

The timing on these air fryer jalapeno poppers is pretty forgiving. I usually check them at 10 minutes and add more time if needed.

Storage And Reheating Your Bacon Jalapeno Poppers

Store any leftover bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers (if there are any!) covered in the refrigerator for 1-2 days.

For reheating, the air fryer works best – just 2-3 minutes at 350°F brings them back to life. You can also use the microwave for 30-45 seconds, but they won't be as crispy.

I've tried freezing these before cooking, and honestly? They just don't turn out the same. The jalapenos get mushy. Better to make them fresh when you need them.

Tips And Variations For Perfect Air Fryer Bacon Jalapeno Poppers

Want them less spicy? Remove every single seed and all the white pith. Emily can't handle much heat, so I always make a few extra-mild ones for her.

Make them vegetarian by skipping the bacon entirely. Cook for 8-10 minutes at 350°F until the cheese is golden and bubbly.

Try different cheeses – I've used pepper jack for extra kick, or cream cheese mixed with ranch dressing for a tangy twist.

Bacon tips: I use regular-cut bacon, not thick-cut. It cooks more evenly and wraps better around the peppers.

Can't find large jalapenos? Use smaller ones but stuff them really full – you'll just get more poppers per batch!

Always wash your hands really well after handling jalapenos. I learned this the hard way when I rubbed my eye afterward (ouch!). Consider wearing gloves if you're sensitive.

Frequently Asked Questions About Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

How spicy are bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers?

They're mildly spicy since the seeds and white pith are removed. The cream cheese filling also helps cool the heat.

Can I make jalapeno poppers ahead of time?

Yes, you can assemble them up to 24 hours in advance and store covered in the refrigerator before air frying.

Can I make these without an air fryer?

Yes, bake them in a preheated 400°F oven for 15-20 minutes until bacon is crispy and cheese is melted.

Can I make vegetarian jalapeno poppers?

Absolutely! Skip the bacon and air fry for 8-10 minutes at 350°F until the cheese is golden and bubbly.

Recipes You May Like

  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas – Another spicy crowd-pleaser that's perfect for game day
  • Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges – A healthier air fryer appetizer option
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders – Easy party appetizers that disappear fast

Conclusion

stacked bacon jalapeno poppers on white plate

These bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers air fryer style are honestly one of my go-to appetizers now. They're quick, impressive, and I always get asked for the recipe. The air fryer makes them so much easier than traditional methods – no oil, no mess, just crispy bacon and melted cheese every single time.

Whether you're hosting game day, having friends over, or just want a fun snack, these poppers deliver. Emily's friends always ask when I'm making them again, which I think says everything you need to know!

Give them a try and don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for later. You'll definitely want to make these again!

Pinterest CTA
bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers air fryer
bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers air fryer recipe
bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers in white bowl

Bacon Wrapped Air Fryer Jalapeno Poppers

These bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers are stuffed with a creamy cheese mix and wrapped in bacon. It's never been easier to make this classic appetizer in the air fryer!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 25 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 16 poppers
Calories 108 kcal

Equipment

  • Air Fryer
  • tongs
  • Toothpicks
  • Medium Mixing Bowl
  • Metal Spoon

Ingredients
  

  • 8 ounces cream cheese room temperature
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese
  • ¼ cup green onions sliced (green parts only)
  • 8 large jalapenos halved and de-seeded
  • 8 pieces bacon cut in half
  • toothpicks for securing
  • non-stick cooking spray

Instructions
 

  • Clean the jalapenos and cut off the top stem. Cut each jalapeno in half lengthwise and use a spoon to remove the seeds (a regular metal teaspoon works perfectly). If you want the jalapenos to be less spicy, also use the spoon to remove the white pith from the inside of the jalapeno, this is where the rest of the heat is.
  • Place the cream cheese, shredded cheddar cheese, and sliced green onion into a medium mixing bowl. Mix to combine with a spoon or spatula. Place the cheese mixture into each jalapeno middle with a spoon.
  • Take a half piece of bacon and wrap it around each jalapeno. Use 1-2 toothpicks to secure the bacon in place. As the bacon cooks it will shrink up so if you do not use a toothpick, the bacon will fall off the jalapeno and be much harder to eat.
  • Preheat the air fryer at 350°F then spray the basket with non-stick spray. Place the jalapeno poppers into the basket, leaving room around each one for airflow.
  • Air fry for 10-13 minutes until the cheese is melty and the bacon is crisp. Remove from the air fryer with tongs and allow the jalapeno poppers to cool before serving.

Notes

If you have any jalapeno poppers left over, you can store them covered in the fridge for 1-2 days. Reheat them in the air fryer or the microwave.
You can make these Air Fryer Jalapeno Poppers vegetarian without bacon. Check the cooking time earlier at 8 minutes as the jalapenos will cook faster without the bacon.
Make sure you clean and rinse your hands very well after handling the jalapenos. You may want to use rubber gloves if you are sensitive or worried about residual heat.
Remember to always read the instruction manual and follow what your manufacturer recommends.

Nutrition

Calories: 108kcalCarbohydrates: 1.2gProtein: 4.9gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 4.7gCholesterol: 36mgSodium: 144mgPotassium: 36mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 0.3gCalcium: 63mg
Keyword Air Fryer, Bacon Wrapped Air Fryer Jalapeno Poppers, Game Day, Party Food, Spicy
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Spinach Artichoke Dip In A Bread Bowl

July 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

There's something magical about watching people's faces light up when you set a gorgeous spinach artichoke dip in bread bowl on the table. I still remember the first time I made this at Emily's birthday party three years ago - the kids went absolutely crazy for it, and honestly, so did all the adults!

The best part? No need for crackers or chips that always seem to break right when you're trying to get that perfect scoop. This bread bowl does all the work, and it tastes amazing too.

Speaking of crowd-pleasing appetizers, if you're looking for another party hit, you've got to try these garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs - they disappear just as fast!

I've been perfecting this recipe for years now, and let me tell you, it's become my go-to whenever I need something that looks fancy but takes almost no effort. Plus, Emily loves helping me hollow out the bread bowl - it's become our little tradition.

Why You Will Love This Spinach Artichoke Dip Recipe

creamy dip stretch from bread bowl

  • Ready in just 25 minutes - Perfect when you're running late for that party (we've all been there!)
  • No crackers needed - The bread bowl serves as both serving dish and dipping vessel
  • Feeds a crowd - One bread bowl easily serves 8-10 people as an appetizer
  • Rich and creamy texture - Three different cheeses make this incredibly satisfying
  • Make-ahead friendly - Mix the dip earlier in the day and just bake when guests arrive
  • Customizable - Skip the artichokes if you're not a fan, or add extra spinach for more greens

Easy Spinach Artichoke Dip In Bread Bowl Ingredients

You probably have most of these ingredients hanging around your kitchen already. That's what I love about this spinach artichoke dip recipe - it's so accessible!

  • 8 ounces frozen spinach (thawed, drained, and chopped - about 1¼ cups)
  • 14 ounces canned artichoke hearts (drained and chopped)
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 2 cloves garlic (minced)
  • 4 ounces cream cheese (room temperature - that's half a package)
  • 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • 1 round bread loaf (sourdough works best, but any sturdy round bread will do)

Pro tip: I learned the hard way to really squeeze out that spinach water. The first time I made this, I didn't drain it well enough and ended up with a watery mess. Emily still brings it up sometimes!

How To Make Spinach Artichoke Dip In A Bread Bowl

Prep The Oven And Mix The Dip

  1. Preheat your oven to 400°F - This temperature gives you that perfect golden top without drying out the dip.
  2. Mix all dip ingredients together in a large bowl until well combined. I like to use a wooden spoon for this - it mixes everything without being too aggressive.
  3. Let the mixture sit for about 5 minutes while you prep the bread. This gives the flavors time to meld together.
spinach dip ingredients in glass bowl
mixed spinach artichoke dip in glass bowl

Prepare Your Bread Bowl

  1. Slice off the top of your bread loaf using a sharp bread knife. Save this piece - you'll need it later!
  2. Hollow out the inside carefully, leaving about ¾ inch of bread around the edges and bottom. Don't go too thin or you'll have a leak situation (trust me on this one).
  3. Tear the removed bread into bite-sized pieces for dipping. I usually arrange these on a separate plate.

Bake Your Spinach Artichoke Bread Bowl Dip

hollowed round bread loaf
baked spinach dip with bread pieces

  1. Fill the bread bowl with your dip mixture, smoothing the top with a spoon.
  2. Bake for 15 minutes or until the cheese is bubbly and the top turns golden brown. You'll know it's ready when it's bubbling around the edges.
  3. Remove and let cool for about 2-3 minutes before serving - this stuff is HOT and will burn your tongue if you dive in too quickly!

The whole house smells incredible while this bakes. Emily always knows when I'm making it because she comes running to the kitchen asking if it's ready yet.

Storage And Reheating Your Bread Bowl Dip

Here's the thing about leftovers - if there are any! Usually this gets completely demolished at parties.

Storing leftovers: Remove any leftover dip from the bread bowl and transfer to an airtight container. It'll keep in the fridge for 4-5 days.

Reheating: I prefer using the oven at 350°F for about 10 minutes, stirring halfway through. You can use the microwave in 30-second intervals, but the oven gives you better texture.

The bread bowl: Once it's been used, the bread gets pretty soggy from the dip. I usually just toss it and use fresh bread pieces for any leftover dip.

Tips And Variations For The Best Spinach Artichoke Dip

Not an artichoke fan? Skip them completely and add an extra ½ cup of spinach instead. My husband actually prefers it this way (he's weird about artichokes), and it's still absolutely delicious.

Want it spicier? Add a pinch of red pepper flakes or a diced jalapeño to the mix. Emily can't handle spice yet, but when it's just adults, I love a little kick.

Different cheese combinations? Try substituting some of the mozzarella with sharp cheddar or adding a bit of cream cheese for extra richness.

Make it healthier? You can swap Greek yogurt for half the sour cream and mayonnaise. It changes the texture slightly but still tastes great.

Bread alternatives? While sourdough is my favorite, I've used whole wheat rounds, pumpernickel, and even large Hawaiian rolls for individual servings.

What's your favorite way to serve hot dips at parties? I'm always looking for new ideas to mix things up!

Frequently Asked Questions About Spinach Artichoke Dip In Bread Bowl

Can I make spinach artichoke dip in a bread bowl ahead of time?

Yes! Mix the dip ingredients up to 24 hours in advance and store in the fridge. Fill the bread bowl and bake just before serving for best results.

What's the best bread for spinach artichoke dip bread bowl?

Sourdough works best due to its sturdy crust and tangy flavor, but any round bread like white, whole wheat, or pumpernickel will work perfectly.

Can I make spinach artichoke dip without artichokes?

Absolutely! Simply omit the artichokes and add an extra ½ cup of spinach for a delicious spinach dip variation.

How long do spinach artichoke dip leftovers last?

Remove leftover dip from the bread bowl and store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. Reheat in microwave or oven before serving.

Recipes You May Like

  • Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs - Another crowd-pleasing appetizer that's perfect for parties and game day gatherings
  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - These cheesy, spicy quesadillas are always a hit when you need something quick and satisfying
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - Perfect party food that's easy to make and even easier to eat

Final Thoughts On This Bread Bowl Recipe

cheese pull from baked spinach dip

This spinach artichoke dip in bread bowl has honestly saved me so many times when I needed a last-minute appetizer that looked like I put way more effort into it than I actually did. The combination of creamy, cheesy dip with the convenience of edible serving bowl is just brilliant.

Plus, there's something so satisfying about watching people tear off pieces of bread and scoop up that hot, bubbly dip. It brings everyone together around the table, which is exactly what good food should do.

Try this recipe at your next gathering and watch it disappear! Don't forget to save this to Pinterest so you can find it again when you need that perfect party appetizer.

Pinterest CTA
spinach artichoke dip in bread bowl
spinach artichoke dip in bread bowl recipe
hand lifting spinach dip from bread bowl

Spinach Artichoke Dip In A Bread Bowl

Classic spinach artichoke dip in a bread bowl! An easy, cheesy, crowd pleasing appetizer, made in under 30 minutes! No crackers necessary!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 25 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 8 servings
Calories 296 kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Bread Knife
  • Baking Sheet

Ingredients
  

Dip Ingredients

  • 8 ounce frozen spinach thawed, drained and chopped (about 1¼ cups)
  • 14 ounce artichoke hearts 1 can, drained and chopped
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 4 ounce cream cheese at room temperature (half a package)
  • 1 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
  • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated

Bread Bowl

  • 1 whole round bread such as sourdough, white, or dark bread

Instructions
 

  • Preheat Oven: Preheat oven to 400°F (200°C).
  • Mix Ingredients: Mix all the dip ingredients together in a large bowl and set aside.
  • Prep Bread Bowl: Using a bread knife, slice the top of the bread off. Scoop out the inside of the bread, but do not throw this bread out.
  • Assemble & Bake: Pour the dip inside the bread bowl and bake for about 15 minutes or until the cheese has melted and the top is golden brown.
  • Finish & Serve: Cut the leftover bread into smaller pieces and place them around the bread bowl. Use these to dip in the spinach and artichoke dip.

Notes

Notes:
1. If you do not like artichokes, just skip them and add a bit more spinach! Even if you're not a fan of the choke, this recipe makes for a fantastic "Spinach Dip". I found out too late that my husband is not a fan of artichokes. Personally, I think the artichokes give this dip a nice sour flavor!
2. Frozen spinach can be used for this, just make sure to thaw and drain really well!
3. Leftovers: Remove the leftover dip from the bread bowl and store in an airtight container for 4-5 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 296kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 10gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 42mgSodium: 628mgPotassium: 219mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 5476IUVitamin C: 16mgCalcium: 256mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Dip, Game Day, Party Food, Spinach Artichoke Dip In A Bread Bowl
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe

July 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Picture this: it's game day, and everyone's coming over to watch the big match. You need something that'll wow the crowd but won't keep you stuck in the kitchen all day. That's exactly when I discovered this slow cooker buffalo chicken dip – and honestly, it changed my whole party game!

I'll never forget the first time I made this dip. Emily had about eight friends coming over for a sleepover (yes, I'm that mom who says yes to chaos), and I needed something that would feed a small army without breaking the bank. This recipe was a total lifesaver, and now it's my go-to whenever we're hosting.

If you're looking for more crowd-pleasing appetizers, you'll love my healthy buffalo chicken wraps – they're perfect for when you want that same buffalo flavor in a lighter format.

Why You Will Like This Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

Baked buffalo chicken dip with tortilla chip and veggie sticks

  • Takes just 10 minutes to prep – seriously, that's less time than it takes me to find the TV remote most days
  • Real chicken breast instead of canned – the texture difference is amazing and it tastes so much fresher
  • Perfect for feeding crowds – this recipe serves about 10 people, so it's great for parties or potlucks
  • Stays warm in the crockpot – no rushing to serve before it gets cold
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have – I bet you've got most of these in your kitchen right now
  • Creamy and cheesy texture that makes everyone ask for the recipe (trust me on this one!)

Ingredients For The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

For the Base:

  • 1 to 1½ pounds chicken breast
  • 8 oz cream cheese, cubed
  • 1 cup blue cheese crumbles
  • 2 cups shredded sharp cheddar cheese (about 6 oz), plus extra for topping
  • ½ cup buttermilk ranch dressing

For the Buffalo Sauce:

  • 1¼ cups Frank's Red Hot sauce
  • 4 tablespoons butter, melted
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

For Serving:

  • Tortilla chips
  • Celery sticks
  • Baby carrots

The key here is using real chicken breast instead of rotisserie or canned chicken. I learned this the hard way when I tried to take shortcuts once – the texture just wasn't the same.

How To Make Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

Prep The Chicken And Base Ingredients

  1. Pat the chicken breast completely dry with paper towels and trim any tough bits or extra fat you can see.
  2. Place chicken in your slow cooker and season lightly with salt and pepper.
  3. Add the cubed cream cheese, 2 cups of cheddar cheese, blue cheese crumbles, and ranch dressing right on top of the chicken.
Raw ingredients in slow cooker with cheese and cream cheese
Ranch and cheese over raw chicken in slow cooker

Make The Buffalo Wing Sauce

  1. In a large microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter for about 30 seconds.
  2. Stir in Frank's Red Hot, Worcestershire sauce, and garlic powder until everything's well combined.
  3. Pour this buffalo sauce mixture over all the ingredients in your slow cooker.

Cook Your Buffalo Chicken Dip

  1. Set your slow cooker to low for 3-4 hours or until the chicken is completely cooked through and easily shreds.

Don't worry if it looks a bit separated or saucy at this point – that's totally normal!

Cooked buffalo chicken mix with blue cheese in slow cooker
Mixed buffalo chicken dip cooked in slow cooker

Shred And Mix Everything Together

  1. Using a hand mixer right in the crockpot, shred the chicken on medium speed and mix everything together.

This is my secret trick that makes this recipe so much easier than others. You can control how chunky or smooth you want it.

  1. The sauce will thicken as you mix, and the chicken gets distributed perfectly throughout.

Final Touches (Optional But Worth It)

  1. If you want that gorgeous melted cheese top, transfer the dip to a large oven-safe dish and sprinkle with the remaining cheddar cheese.
  2. Broil on low until the cheese is bubbly and golden – usually about 2-3 minutes.
  3. Serve immediately with your chips and veggies while it's hot and easy to scoop.

Storage And Reheating Your Buffalo Chicken Dip

This slow cooker buffalo chicken dip keeps really well, which makes it perfect for meal prep or making ahead for parties.

In the refrigerator: Store covered for up to 4 days. The flavors actually get better after sitting overnight!

Reheating: Warm it back up in the oven at 350°F for about 15-20 minutes, stirring halfway through. You can also reheat it right in the slow cooker on low.

Make-ahead tip: You can prep this entire recipe up to 2 days before your event. Just cover and refrigerate, then reheat when you're ready to serve.

I always make extra because Emily loves taking the leftovers in her lunch the next day (she eats it with crackers – weird but it works for her!).

Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Variations

Less Spicy Version: Cut the Frank's Red Hot down to ¾ cup and add an extra ¼ cup of ranch. This makes it kid-friendly while keeping that buffalo taste.

Extra Protein: Add a can of drained white beans during the last hour of cooking for more substance.

Bacon Lovers: Stir in ½ cup of cooked, crumbled bacon when you're shredding the chicken.

Dairy-Free Option: Use dairy-free cream cheese and skip the regular cheese – it won't be quite the same, but it's still tasty.

Rotisserie Shortcut: Use 3 cups of shredded rotisserie chicken instead. Add it during the last 30 minutes to prevent it from getting tough.

The beauty of this slow cooker buffalo chicken dip is how easy it is to customize based on what you have or what your crowd likes.

Buffalo Chicken Dip Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this buffalo chicken dip ahead of time?

Yes! You can make this dip up to 2 days ahead. Store covered in the refrigerator and reheat in the oven at 350°F for 15-20 minutes, stirring halfway through.

Can I use rotisserie chicken instead of raw chicken breast?

Absolutely! Use about 3 cups of shredded rotisserie chicken. Add it during the last 30 minutes of cooking time to prevent overcooking.

How long does leftover buffalo chicken dip last in the fridge?

Properly stored buffalo chicken dip will keep in the refrigerator for up to 4 days in an airtight container.

How can I make this buffalo chicken dip less spicy?

Reduce the Frank's Red Hot to ¾ cup and add an extra ¼ cup of ranch dressing to tone down the heat while maintaining great flavor.

Recipes You May Like

  • Healthy Buffalo Chicken Wraps – Perfect when you want that buffalo flavor in a lighter, handheld option
  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas – Another creative way to use buffalo chicken that's great for lunch or dinner
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders – Another crowd-pleasing appetizer that's perfect for game day

Conclusion

Cheesy buffalo dip in white baking dish with tortilla chip

This slow cooker buffalo chicken dip has honestly become one of my most requested recipes. It's that perfect combination of being super easy to make but tasting like you spent hours in the kitchen.

The best part? You can set it and forget it while you get ready for your party or handle other prep work. Plus, keeping it warm in the slow cooker means your dip stays perfect throughout the entire event.

Whether you're hosting a big game day party or just want something delicious for a casual family night, this recipe delivers every single time. The creamy, cheesy texture with just the right amount of buffalo heat makes it absolutely irresistible.

Give this recipe a try and don't forget to save it to Pinterest for later! I promise it'll become your new go-to party appetizer.

Pinterest CTA
slow cooker buffalo chicken dip
slow cooker buffalo chicken dip recipe
Hot buffalo chicken dip with melted cheese and tortilla chip

The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

Easy, simple buffalo chicken dip made in the crockpot with real chicken breast. Perfect for game day, parties, or any time you need a crowd-pleasing appetizer that stays warm and creamy for hours!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 4 hours hrs
Total Time 4 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 10 people
Calories 258 kcal

Equipment

  • Slow Cooker
  • Hand mixer
  • Microwave-Safe Bowl

Ingredients
  

Main Ingredients

  • 1-1.5 lb chicken breast
  • 8 oz cream cheese cubed
  • 1 cup blue cheese crumbles
  • 2 cups shredded sharp cheddar cheese about 6 oz, plus extra for topping
  • ½ cup buttermilk ranch dressing

Buffalo Sauce

  • 1 ¼ cups Frank's Red Hot sauce
  • 4 tablespoon butter melted
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

For Serving

  • tortilla chips
  • celery sticks
  • baby carrots

Instructions
 

  • Pat the chicken breast completely dry with paper towels and trim any tough bits or extra fat. Place chicken in your slow cooker and season lightly with salt and pepper.
  • Add the cubed cream cheese, 2 cups of cheddar cheese, blue cheese crumbles, and ranch dressing right on top of the chicken.
  • In a large microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter for about 30 seconds. Stir in Frank's Red Hot, Worcestershire sauce, and garlic powder until everything's well combined.
  • Pour the buffalo sauce mixture over all the ingredients in your slow cooker.
  • Set your slow cooker to low for 3-4 hours or until the chicken is completely cooked through and easily shreds. Don't worry if it looks separated or saucy - this is normal!
  • Using a hand mixer right in the crockpot, shred the chicken on medium speed and mix everything together. The sauce will thicken as you mix, and the chicken gets distributed perfectly throughout.
  • Optional: For a gorgeous melted cheese top, transfer the dip to a large oven-safe dish and sprinkle with remaining cheddar cheese. Broil on low until the cheese is bubbly and golden, about 2-3 minutes.
  • Serve immediately with tortilla chips, celery sticks, and baby carrots while hot and easy to scoop. Keep warm in slow cooker on warm setting.

Notes

Shredding chicken: If you don't have a hand mixer, remove chicken breasts and shred with two forks, then return to crockpot.
Make-ahead tip: You can prep this entire recipe up to 2 days before your event. Just cover and refrigerate, then reheat when ready to serve.
Rotisserie shortcut: Use 3 cups of shredded rotisserie chicken instead. Add during the last 30 minutes to prevent overcooking.
Storage: Keeps in refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in oven at 350°F for 15-20 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 258kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 23gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 88mgSodium: 1342mgPotassium: 309mgVitamin A: 490IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 236mgIron: 0.4mg
Keyword Buffalo Chicken, Crockpot, Party Food, Slow Cooker, The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

3 Ingredient Cheese Ball Recipe

July 11, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Sometimes the best recipes are the ones that don't try to be fancy. Like when you're scrolling through Pinterest at 10 PM the night before a party, looking for something that won't require a grocery store run or three hours in the kitchen. That's exactly how I discovered this 3 ingredient cheese ball recipe that's become my absolute lifesaver.

Emily had invited friends over for a movie night (she was 14 and thought she was basically an adult), and I wanted something easy but impressive. Three ingredients later, I had a crowd-pleaser that's become my go-to appetizer for literally everything.

The magic happens with just cream cheese, ranch seasoning, and your choice of nuts or crackers for coating. No complicated steps, no weird ingredients you'll use once and forget about. Just simple, reliable deliciousness that works every single time.

Speaking of simple appetizers that never disappoint, you might also love these garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs - they're another crowd favorite that takes minimal effort but delivers maximum flavor.

Why You Will Like This 3 Ingredient Cheese Ball

boule fromage servie avec crackers

  • Takes 5 minutes to make - Seriously, you'll spend more time deciding what crackers to serve it with
  • Perfect for any occasion - Game day, holiday parties, or random Tuesday nights when you want something special
  • Make-ahead friendly - Actually tastes better after chilling overnight, so you can prep it the day before
  • Budget-friendly ingredients - No fancy cheese or exotic spices required
  • Impossible to mess up - If you can mix three things together, you've got this
  • Crowd-pleasing flavor - That ranch seasoning hits differently when it's mixed into cream cheese

Ingredients For Your Easy Cheese Ball Recipe

  • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened (don't skip the softening part!)
  • 1 ounce ranch dressing seasoning mix (that's one packet - stick with the good stuff)
  • 1 cup walnuts or pecans, chopped (or crushed crackers if nuts aren't your thing)

Here's the thing about these ingredients: quality matters even in simple recipes. I learned this the hard way when I tried to save 50 cents on off-brand ranch seasoning. The cheese ball was... fine? But not the "Oh my gosh, what's in this?" reaction I was going for.

How To Make A Simple 3 Ingredient Cheese Ball

  • Mix the cream cheese and ranch seasoning in a bowl until completely blended. I mean really go for it here - scrape down the sides and bottom to make sure there aren't any sneaky dry spots hiding. Nothing ruins the party mood like a surprise mouthful of ranch powder.
fromage mélangé dans bol en verre
boule fromage enrobée de noix

  • Prepare your coating station by laying plastic wrap on your counter and spreading the chopped nuts in an even layer in the center. This is going to be your best friend for the next step.
  • Scoop the cheese mixture into a mound right in the middle of those nuts. Don't worry about making it perfect - we're going to fix that in a second.
  • Use the plastic wrap edges to gently press the nuts onto the cheese ball while shaping it into a smooth round. This is actually kind of therapeutic! Emily always wants to help with this part.
boule fromage noix emballée
boule fromage noix sur plastique

Wrap the coated cheese ball tightly in the plastic wrap, pressing those nuts firmly into place. You want them to really stick.

Refrigerate for at least 1 hour before serving. I know waiting is hard when it smells this good, but trust me on this one.

Serve with crackers, veggie sticks, or whatever makes your heart happy. There are no rules here!

Storage And Reheating For Your Homemade Cheese Ball

This cheese ball recipe is actually one of those magical make-ahead appetizers that gets better with time. Store it wrapped tightly in plastic wrap in the fridge for up to 5 days.

The flavors really meld together after the first day, so if you're planning for a party, make it the night before. You'll thank me later when you're not stressed about last-minute prep.

Since this is a cold appetizer, there's no reheating involved. Just pull it out of the fridge about 15 minutes before serving to let it come to the perfect spreading consistency.

If you've got leftovers (which honestly rarely happens), you can reshape it into a new ball or just serve it as a spread. No judgment here!

Tips And Variations For The Best Cheese Ball With Ranch

Let that cream cheese get properly soft. I can't stress this enough! Cold cream cheese is like trying to mix concrete. Leave it out for about 30 minutes, or if you're in a hurry, microwave it for 10-15 seconds.

Don't be afraid to mix thoroughly. That ranch seasoning needs to be evenly distributed throughout. I usually mix for a good minute or two to make sure everything's incorporated.

Get creative with coatings. Sure, nuts are classic, but I've tried crushed pretzels, everything bagel seasoning, and even crushed bacon. Emily's personal favorite? Crushed Cheez-Its. Don't knock it till you try it!

Make it your own with different seasonings. Once you master the basic technique, try onion soup mix, Italian seasoning, or even taco seasoning for a Mexican twist.

Toast your nuts for extra flavor. If you've got an extra few minutes, lightly toast those walnuts or pecans in a dry skillet. The smell alone will have people asking what smells so good.

Consider the texture. Some people like chunky nuts, others prefer them finely chopped. I usually go somewhere in the middle - chopped but not powdered.

Frequently Asked Questions About This 3 Ingredient Cheese Ball

How long does the cheese ball last in the refrigerator?

The cheese ball will stay fresh in the fridge for up to 5 days when wrapped tightly in plastic wrap.

Can I substitute the ranch seasoning packet with something else?

Yes! Try onion soup mix, Italian seasoning, garlic powder with herbs, or even taco seasoning for different flavor profiles.

What can I use instead of nuts if I have allergies or don't like them?

Crushed crackers, pretzel pieces, shredded cheese, chopped herbs, or even everything bagel seasoning make great nut-free coatings.

How long does the cheese ball need to chill before it's ready to serve?

At least 1 hour for the flavors to meld and the ball to firm up, but overnight chilling gives the best texture and flavor.

Recipes You May Like

  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - Another crowd-pleasing appetizer that's perfect for game day
  • Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs - These bite-sized beauties disappear as fast as this cheese ball
  • Air Fryer Tuna Melts - When you want something warm and melty to go with your cold appetizers

The Bottom Line On This Easy Cheese Ball Recipe

boule fromage plateau apéritif

Look, I've tried fancy appetizers with 15 ingredients and complicated techniques. They're fine, but when you want something that's guaranteed to work and people actually get excited about? This 3 ingredient cheese ball is it.

The combination of creamy cheese, zesty ranch, and crunchy coating hits all the right notes. Plus, there's something satisfying about making something this good with so little effort.

Next time you need an appetizer that looks like you put in way more work than you actually did, give this one a try. Your guests will be impressed, you'll stay sane, and everyone wins.

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for your next party - trust me, you'll want to make this again!

Pinterest CTA
3 ingredient cheese ball
3 ingredient cheese ball recipe
boule fromage avec crackers

3 Ingredient Cheese Ball

This easy 3 ingredient cheese ball uses just cream cheese, ranch seasoning, and nuts to create the perfect party appetizer. Ready in 5 minutes plus chilling time!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Chill Time 1 hour hr
Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Servings 8 servings
Calories 205 kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing Bowl
  • Plastic Wrap

Ingredients
  

  • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
  • 1 ounce ranch dressing seasoning mix 1 packet
  • 1 cup walnuts or pecans chopped

Instructions
 

  • Mix the cream cheese and ranch seasoning in a bowl until completely blended. Scrape down the sides and bottom to make sure there aren't any sneaky dry spots hiding.
  • Prepare your coating station by laying plastic wrap on your counter and spreading the chopped nuts in an even layer in the center.
  • Scoop the cheese mixture into a mound right in the middle of those nuts.
  • Use the plastic wrap edges to gently press the nuts onto the cheese ball while shaping it into a smooth round.
  • Wrap the coated cheese ball tightly in the plastic wrap, pressing those nuts firmly into place.
  • Refrigerate for at least 1 hour before serving.
  • Serve with crackers, veggie sticks, or whatever makes your heart happy.

Notes

Soften the Cream Cheese: Let it sit out for about 30 minutes before you start, or microwave for 10-15 seconds if you're in a hurry.
Mix Like You Mean It: Make sure that ranch seasoning is evenly distributed throughout.
Use Fresh Nuts: If your nuts have been hanging out in the pantry since last Thanksgiving, give them a sniff. Toast them lightly for even more flavor.
Don't Skip the Chill Time: Letting the cheese ball chill for at least an hour helps it firm up and makes it easier to serve. Overnight is even better.
Get Creative with the Coating: Try crushed crackers, pretzels, or even shredded cheese if nuts aren't your thing.

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 4gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 29mgSodium: 355mgPotassium: 102mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 384IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 42mgIron: 0.5mg
Keyword 3 Ingredient Cheese Ball, Cheese Ball, Easy, Make Ahead, Party Food
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust Recipe

July 7, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Pizza night just got a healthy makeover! I still remember the first time Emily wrinkled her nose when I mentioned making pizza crust out of cauliflower. "Mom, that sounds weird," she said, crossing her arms. But you know what? After one bite of this Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust, she was asking for seconds.

This recipe happened by accident, honestly. I was trying to cut carbs but still wanted my Friday night pizza tradition with Emily. After three failed attempts (let's not talk about the soggy disaster of attempt number two), I finally cracked the code. The secret? Getting every last drop of moisture out of that cauliflower.

Now this cauliflower pizza crust has become our go-to when we want pizza without the guilt. It's crispy, holds up to toppings, and tastes way better than you'd expect from a vegetable masquerading as bread.

Speaking of pizza favorites, you might also love my supreme pizza recipe for when you want to go all out with toppings, or try my breakfast pizza with eggs and cheese for a fun morning twist.

Why You Will Like This Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust

Hand holding cauliflower pizza slice

This keto pizza crust checks every box you didn't even know you had:

  • Ready in just 45 minutes - Way faster than ordering delivery and definitely more satisfying
  • Only 6 grams of carbs per slice - Compare that to regular pizza crust's 20-30 grams (I did the math because I'm that person)
  • Crispy texture that actually holds toppings - No more pizza falling apart in your hands
  • Uses simple pantry ingredients - Nothing fancy or hard to find
  • Kid-approved taste - Emily's friends don't even know it's made with cauliflower
  • Perfect for meal prep - Make the crust ahead and store it for busy weeknights

Ingredients For The Best Cauliflower Pizza Crust

For the Crust:

  • 1½ pounds (675 g) cauliflower florets, washed and dried
  • 2 large eggs
  • ½ cup (56 g) shredded mozzarella cheese
  • ¼ cup (21 g) grated parmesan cheese
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Toppings:

  • ½ cup (112 g) pizza sauce
  • ¾ cup (110 g) shredded mozzarella cheese
  • Fresh basil leaves (optional)

The key ingredient here is patience. Trust me on this one - rushing the moisture removal step will give you a soggy mess instead of crispy perfection.

How To Make Crispy Cauliflower Pizza Crust From Scratch

Prep The Cauliflower

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (180°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Add cauliflower florets to a food processor and pulse 15-20 times until it looks like rice. Don't over-process or you'll end up with cauliflower paste (learned this the hard way).
  • Heat a skillet over medium heat and add the cauliflower rice. Cook for 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally, until slightly wilted and the moisture has evaporated.
Cauliflower florets in food processor
Riced cauliflower in metal pan

The smell during this step always reminds me of roasted vegetables - Emily usually comes running to the kitchen asking what smells so good.

Create The Crust Mixture

  • Transfer the cooked cauliflower to a mixing bowl and let it cool for a few minutes. If there's still moisture, squeeze it out using cheesecloth or a clean tea towel.
  • Add eggs, mozzarella, parmesan, salt, smoked paprika, oregano, garlic powder, onion powder, and black pepper to the bowl. Stir until everything's combined and looks like thick dough.
Bowl with cauliflower cheese eggs spices
Baked cauliflower pizza crust on tray

Shape And Bake

  • Dump the mixture onto your prepared baking sheet and shape it into a circle about 10 inches in diameter. I use my hands for this - it's messy but fun.
  • Bake for 20-25 minutes until the crust is firm, cooked through, and the top looks dry. This is when your kitchen starts smelling amazing.
Hand spreading sauce on cauliflower crust
Cauliflower crust pizza with melted cheese

  • Remove from oven and add your toppings - spread pizza sauce, sprinkle cheese, and return to oven for 5 more minutes until cheese melts.
  • Let cool for 5 minutes before slicing. I know it's tempting to dive right in, but this cooling time helps the crust firm up.

Storage And Reheating Your Cauliflower Crust

Store leftover pizza in the refrigerator for up to 3 days in an airtight container. The crust actually holds up really well - better than regular pizza sometimes.

For reheating, pop slices in the oven at 350°F for 5-7 minutes. The toaster oven works great too. Skip the microwave unless you want soggy crust (not that I've ever done that... okay, maybe once).

You can also freeze the pre-baked crust (before adding toppings) for up to 3 months. Wrap it well in plastic wrap and aluminum foil. When ready to use, thaw completely and add toppings.

Tips And Variations For Perfect Cauliflower Pizza

Here's what I've learned after making this homemade cauliflower pizza crust dozens of times:

  • Use freshly grated cheese - Pre-shredded cheese has anti-caking agents that prevent proper melting
  • Squeeze out ALL the moisture - This is the difference between crispy and soggy crust
  • Keep toppings light - Too many heavy toppings will make your crust collapse
  • Try mini pizzas - Divide the dough into smaller portions for crispier individual pizzas
  • Season generously - Cauliflower needs flavor help, so don't skimp on the spices

Want to switch things up? Try adding Italian seasoning instead of oregano, or throw in some red pepper flakes for heat. Emily likes when I add extra garlic powder because she's obsessed with garlic bread.

Frequently Asked Questions About Cauliflower Pizza Crust

How do you make cauliflower pizza crust crispy and not soggy?

Remove all moisture by cooking the cauliflower rice for 10-12 minutes and squeezing out any remaining liquid with cheesecloth before mixing.

How many carbs are in cauliflower pizza crust compared to regular pizza?

This cauliflower crust has only 6g carbs per slice versus 20-30g in regular pizza crust, making it perfect for low-carb and keto diets.

Can you make cauliflower pizza crust ahead of time?

Yes! Pre-bake the crust and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days, then add toppings and bake when ready to serve.

Can I substitute the mozzarella and parmesan cheese in this recipe?

Use freshly grated cheese for best results. You can substitute with other hard cheeses like cheddar or gouda, but avoid pre-shredded varieties.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this cauliflower crust recipe, you'll definitely want to try these other pizza favorites:

  • No Knead Pizza Dough Recipe - For when you want traditional crust without the work
  • Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza - Perfect for feeding a crowd
  • English Muffin Pizzas - Quick personal pizzas that kids love making

Final Thoughts On This Healthy Pizza Crust

Whole cauliflower pizza with basil leaves

This Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust has honestly changed our pizza nights for the better. Emily's friends request it when they come over, and I love knowing we're getting vegetables into our dinner.

The best part? It doesn't taste like you're eating healthy food. It just tastes like really good pizza. And isn't that what we all want?

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out. I bet you'll be as surprised as Emily was that vegetables can taste this good!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for your next pizza craving!

Pinterest CTA
Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust
Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust recipe

Sliced cauliflower pizza with basil

Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust

This easy Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust Recipe is the perfect lighter pizza crust option, made with simple ingredients! Crispy, delicious, and only 6g carbs per slice.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 35 minutes mins
Total Time 45 minutes mins
Course Pizza
Cuisine American
Servings 8 slices
Calories 111 kcal

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Baking Sheet
  • Mixing Bowl

Ingredients
  

For the Crust

  • 1.5 pounds cauliflower florets washed and dried (675g)
  • 2 large eggs
  • 0.5 cup shredded mozzarella cheese 56g
  • 0.25 cup grated parmesan cheese 21g
  • 0.75 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 0.5 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 0.5 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 0.5 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 0.5 teaspoon onion powder
  • 0.5 teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Toppings

  • 0.5 cup pizza sauce 112g
  • 0.75 cup shredded mozzarella cheese 110g
  • fresh basil leaves optional

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F (180°C), or 160°C for a fan oven. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Add cauliflower florets to the jug of a food processor and pulse 15-20 times until it resembles cauliflower rice.
  • Heat a skillet over medium heat, add the cauliflower rice, and cook for 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally, until slightly wilted and the moisture has evaporated. Avoid browning the cauliflower. If any moisture remains, squeeze it out using cheesecloth.
  • Transfer the cauliflower rice to a mixing bowl. Add eggs, mozzarella, parmesan, salt, smoked paprika, oregano, garlic powder, onion powder, and black pepper. Stir until fully combined.
  • Dump the mixture on the baking pan and shape it into a circle around 10 inches in diameter.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes, or until the crust is firm, cooked through, and the top looks dry.
  • Remove the crust from the oven, spread pizza sauce on top, sprinkle with cheese, and return it to the oven for an additional 5 minutes or until the cheese has melted.
  • Let the pizza cool for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

Notes

Use freshly grated cheese for this recipe. Pre-shredded parmesan and mozzarella have starchy ingredients added to them that can keep them from melting properly.
Remove moisture from the cauliflower. Sautéing should handle most of this, but if there is still moisture after cooking, squeeze it out using a cheesecloth or a thin tea towel. The dryer the cauliflower, the crisper your crust will be.
Keep the toppings light. Too many heavy items on top of the pizza will make it difficult to pick up and eat.
Cool before eating. Give the pizza about 5 minutes to cool down before slicing it. This will give the crust time to firm up and make it easier to eat.
To brown the cheese, place the pizza under the broiler for a couple of minutes.
Try Mini Pizzas! The crust will crisp up more if you create smaller circles with the mixture. Divide the dough into two or four portions to make smaller pies.

Nutrition

Calories: 111kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 8gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 63mgSodium: 499mgPotassium: 346mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 344IUVitamin C: 42mgCalcium: 147mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Gluten-Free, Healthy, Keto, Low Carb, Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust, Pizza Crust
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Breakfast Pizza With Eggs And Cheese

July 6, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

There's something magical about combining two of life's greatest pleasures - pizza and breakfast! This breakfast pizza with eggs and cheese turned my sleepy Saturday mornings into something I actually look forward to.

I'll never forget the first time Emily saw me putting eggs on pizza dough. She gave me that look (you know the one) like I'd completely lost my mind. But after one bite of this crispy, cheesy, bacon-loaded goodness, she was asking when we could make it again!

What makes this recipe so special? It's basically everything you love about a hearty breakfast, but on a pizza crust that gets golden and crispy in the oven. The runny egg yolks create this amazing sauce that mixes with the cheese and bacon - it's like having breakfast and dinner rolled into one delicious meal.

If you're looking for more pizza inspiration, check out my supreme pizza recipe for another family favorite that never disappoints.

Why You Will Like This Breakfast Pizza Recipe

Slice of breakfast pizza on white paper plate

Let me tell you why this breakfast pizza has become our weekend tradition:

  • Ready in just 40 minutes - Perfect for those Saturday mornings when you want something special but don't want to spend hours in the kitchen
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have - pizza dough, eggs, bacon, and cheese
  • Customizable for everyone - Emily likes her eggs well-done while I prefer runny yolks, and this recipe works for both preferences
  • Great for feeding a crowd - One pizza easily serves 4 people, making it perfect for brunch gatherings
  • Combines all breakfast favorites in one dish - Who doesn't love bacon, eggs, and cheese together?
  • Kid-friendly and fun - Even picky eaters get excited about "pizza for breakfast"

Ingredients For The Best Breakfast Pizza

Here's everything you'll need to make this easy breakfast pizza:

  • 8 oz. bacon - I prefer thick-cut for extra flavor and texture
  • 1 large prepared pizza dough - Store-bought works perfectly, or use my homemade dough if you're feeling ambitious
  • ½ cup pizza sauce - Regular marinara sauce works great
  • 2 cups shredded cheese - I use a mix of mozzarella and cheddar for the best melt
  • 4 large eggs - Fresh eggs give the best results
  • 2 green onions, sliced - Adds a nice fresh pop of color and mild onion flavor

The beauty of this recipe is how flexible it is with ingredients. Can't find pizza sauce? Regular marinara works just fine. Want to switch up the cheese? Go for it!

How To Make Homemade Breakfast Pizza

Making this breakfast pizza recipe is easier than you might think. Here's how I do it:

Preparing The Bacon

  • Cook the bacon in a large skillet over medium heat until brown and crispy, about 6-8 minutes.
  • Transfer the cooked bacon to a paper towel-lined plate to drain excess grease.
  • Crumble the bacon into bite-sized pieces once it's cool enough to handle.

Assembling The Pizza

  • Preheat your oven to 450°F while you prepare the pizza.
  • Stretch the pizza dough out over a pizza pan or large baking sheet - I like to let it come to room temperature first for easier stretching.
  • Spread the pizza sauce evenly over the surface, leaving about ½ inch of bare crust around the edges for that perfect crust.
Crispy cooked bacon in skillet
Pizza dough with sauce spread by spoon

Adding The Toppings

  • Sprinkle the shredded cheese evenly over the sauce - don't be shy with the cheese!
  • Crack the four eggs directly onto the pizza, spacing them out evenly so everyone gets egg in their slice.
  • Crumble the bacon on top of everything - this prevents it from burning while the eggs cook.

Baking To Perfection

  • Bake the pizza for 12-15 minutes in the preheated oven until the crust is golden brown and the cheese is bubbly.
Unbaked pizza with eggs bacon cheese
Baked breakfast pizza with melted cheese

  • Check the eggs - the whites should be completely set, and the yolks can be firm or runny depending on your preference.
  • Top with sliced green onions immediately after removing from the oven.
  • Slice into 8 pieces and serve hot!

Storage And Reheating Your Breakfast Pizza

Let's be honest - this bacon and egg breakfast pizza is best enjoyed fresh from the oven. But life happens, and sometimes you have leftovers!

Storing leftovers: Place cooled pizza slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. The eggs will firm up completely when cold, which actually makes it easier to reheat.

Reheating instructions: I've found the best way to reheat is in a 350°F oven for about 8-10 minutes. This keeps the crust crispy instead of soggy. Avoid the microwave if possible - it makes everything rubbery.

Make-ahead tips: You can prep all your toppings the night before. Cook and crumble the bacon, slice your green onions, and have your cheese ready to go. Then assembly takes just minutes in the morning!

Creative Breakfast Pizza Variations

Whole breakfast pizza with eggs and bacon

This weekend breakfast pizza recipe is like a blank canvas - you can make it your own in so many ways!

  • Veggie version - Skip the bacon and add sautéed mushrooms, bell peppers, and spinach
  • Meat lovers style - Add breakfast sausage along with the bacon for extra protein
  • Mexican twist - Use salsa instead of pizza sauce and add jalapeños and cilantro
  • Healthy option - Try turkey bacon and add sliced tomatoes and fresh herbs
  • Cheese variations - Experiment with different cheeses like goat cheese, feta, or swiss

I learned the hard way that timing is everything with the eggs. If you crack them on too early, they'll overcook and get rubbery. Wait until the last 12-15 minutes of baking for perfectly cooked eggs every time.

Breakfast Pizza Recipe Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use store-bought pizza dough for breakfast pizza?

Yes! Any prepared pizza dough works perfectly - store-bought, refrigerated, or homemade all give great results.

How do I prevent the eggs from overcooking on breakfast pizza?

Crack eggs onto the pizza during the last 12-15 minutes of baking and watch closely - whites should be set but yolks can be firm or runny based on preference.

Can I make breakfast pizza ahead of time?

It's best served fresh, but you can prep toppings in advance. Assemble and bake just before serving for optimal egg texture.

What can I substitute for bacon on breakfast pizza?

Try breakfast sausage, ham, turkey bacon, or vegetarian options like mushrooms and bell peppers for variety.

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoyed this breakfast pizza with eggs and bacon, you'll definitely want to try these other breakfast favorites:

  • English Muffin Pizzas - Perfect for when you want individual-sized breakfast pizzas
  • Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza - Another easy pizza recipe that feeds a crowd
  • Bacon Breakfast Burrito - All the same great breakfast flavors in a portable wrap

Make This Amazing Breakfast Pizza Today

Close up breakfast pizza with eggs and bacon

This breakfast pizza recipe has completely changed our weekend morning routine. What used to be scrambled eggs and toast has turned into something we actually get excited about making together.

The combination of crispy bacon, perfectly cooked eggs, and melted cheese on a golden pizza crust hits all the right notes. Plus, it's one of those recipes that looks way more complicated than it actually is - your family will think you're some kind of breakfast genius!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for your next weekend brunch, and let me know in the comments how yours turned out!

Pinterest CTA
Breakfast Pizza with Eggs and Cheese
Breakfast Pizza with Eggs and Cheese recipe

Hand holding slice of breakfast pizza with eggs

Breakfast Pizza With Eggs And Cheese

This amazing breakfast pizza combines crispy bacon, perfectly cooked eggs, and melted cheese on golden pizza crust. Perfect for weekend brunch or breakfast for dinner!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Servings 4 servings
Calories 726 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Skillet
  • Pizza Pan
  • Paper Towels

Ingredients
  

  • 8 oz bacon thick-cut preferred
  • 1 large prepared pizza dough store-bought or homemade
  • ½ cup pizza sauce or marinara sauce
  • 2 cups shredded cheese mozzarella and cheddar mix
  • 4 large eggs fresh
  • 2 green onions sliced

Instructions
 

  • Cook the bacon in a large skillet over medium heat until brown and crispy, about 6-8 minutes.
  • Transfer the cooked bacon to a paper towel-lined plate to drain excess grease.
  • Crumble the bacon into bite-sized pieces once it's cool enough to handle.
  • Preheat your oven to 450°F while you prepare the pizza.
  • Stretch the pizza dough out over a pizza pan or large baking sheet - let it come to room temperature first for easier stretching.
  • Spread the pizza sauce evenly over the surface, leaving about ½ inch of bare crust around the edges.
  • Sprinkle the shredded cheese evenly over the sauce.
  • Crack the four eggs directly onto the pizza, spacing them out evenly so everyone gets egg in their slice.
  • Crumble the bacon on top of everything - this prevents it from burning while the eggs cook.
  • Bake the pizza for 12-15 minutes in the preheated oven until the crust is golden brown and the cheese is bubbly.
  • Check the eggs - the whites should be completely set, and the yolks can be firm or runny depending on your preference.
  • Top with sliced green onions immediately after removing from the oven.
  • Slice into 8 pieces and serve hot!

Notes

Use any type of prepared pizza dough you prefer - homemade or store-bought both work great. For best results, let the dough come to room temperature before stretching. You can customize toppings by adding vegetables like mushrooms or bell peppers, or trying different cheeses!

Nutrition

Calories: 726kcalCarbohydrates: 51gProtein: 34gFat: 43gSaturated Fat: 15gCholesterol: 220mgSodium: 1650mgPotassium: 280mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 850IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 380mgIron: 3.2mg
Keyword Breakfast Pizza, Breakfast Pizza With Eggs And Cheese, Easy Breakfast
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Supreme Pizza Recipe With All The Toppings

July 6, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Looking for the ultimate pizza night recipe that'll have everyone fighting over the last slice? This Supreme Pizza Recipe is exactly what you need!

I'll never forget the first time I made this at home. Emily was having friends over for a sleepover, and I wanted to do something special. Store-bought pizza felt boring, but I was nervous about making my own.

When I pulled this beauty out of the oven - golden crust, melted cheese bubbling, and all those gorgeous toppings - the girls went absolutely silent. Then they started cheering! Emily looked at me like I'd just performed magic.

This recipe combines everything you love about pizza: crispy pepperoni, savory Italian sausage, tender ham, fresh bell peppers, sweet onions, and briny black olives. It's loaded with flavor and surprisingly easy to make at home.

Speaking of easy pizza recipes, you've got to try my BBQ Chicken Pizza too - it's another family favorite that never disappoints!

Why You Will Like This Supreme Pizza Recipe

cheesy supreme pizza slices with mushrooms

  • Takes just 35 minutes total (including prep time) - perfect for busy weeknights
  • Uses simple ingredients you can find at any grocery store
  • Feeds the whole family with 6 generous slices
  • Customizable toppings - add or remove whatever you like
  • Restaurant-quality results at home for a fraction of the price
  • Makes amazing leftovers that actually taste good reheated

Ingredients For The Best Supreme Pizza Recipe

  • 1 round homemade pizza dough (or store-bought)
  • ½ cup pizza sauce
  • 1 oz. pepperoni slices
  • 2 oz. Italian sausage - cooked and crumbled
  • 2 oz. ham - chopped into bite-sized pieces
  • ½ cup mushrooms - sautéed until golden
  • ¼ cup red onion - sliced thin
  • ¼ cup bell pepper or jalapeño - sliced thin
  • ¼ cup sliced black olives
  • ½ cup mozzarella cheese - freshly shredded
  • Parmesan cheese - for topping

How To Make Supreme Pizza Recipe Step By Step

Preparing The Dough And Toppings

  1. Make your pizza dough using your favorite recipe or grab some from the store. If using homemade, let it come to room temperature for easier rolling.
  2. Brown the Italian sausage in a skillet over medium heat until cooked through and crumbly. Drain any excess grease and set aside.
  3. Slice all your vegetables - peppers, mushrooms, and onions. Keep them relatively thin so they cook evenly.
  4. Shred your cheeses using a box grater. Fresh cheese melts so much better than pre-shredded (trust me on this one!).

Rolling And Assembling Your Supreme Pizza

ball of pizza dough in glass bowl
pizza dough with sauce in cast iron pan

  1. Prep your work surface with a little olive oil and sprinkle some flour on top. This prevents sticking.
  2. Roll out the dough into your desired shape using a rolling pin. I like mine pretty thin - about ¼ inch thick.
  3. Transfer to your baking vessel - whether that's a greased cast iron skillet, pizza stone, or regular baking sheet.
  4. Spread the pizza sauce evenly over the dough, leaving about an inch border for the crust. Use the back of a spoon for even coverage.
uncooked pizza with toppings in skillet
baked pizza in cast iron skillet overhead

Adding Toppings And Baking

  1. Add half the mozzarella and parmesan directly over the sauce. This creates a good cheese base.
  2. Layer your meats - pepperoni, cooked sausage, and ham pieces. Distribute them evenly so every bite has some of each.
  3. Add the vegetables - mushrooms, onions, bell peppers, and black olives. Spread them out nicely.
  4. Top with remaining cheese - this helps keep everything in place while baking.
  5. Bake in a preheated 500°F oven for 15-18 minutes until the crust is golden brown and cheese is bubbly.
  6. Let it cool for 2-3 minutes before slicing and serving.

Storage And Reheating Your Supreme Pizza

Store leftover supreme pizza in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container or wrapped in plastic wrap.

For the best reheating results, pop slices in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes. This brings back that crispy crust texture way better than the microwave (which makes it soggy - yuck!).

You can also reheat in a skillet over medium heat for 2-3 minutes. Cover with a lid to help the cheese melt again.

Pro tip: I sometimes brush the crust with a tiny bit of olive oil before reheating for extra crispiness.

Supreme Pizza Recipe Variations To Try

Want to mix things up? Here are some tweaks I've tried over the years:

  • Go spicy - Add jalapeños, spicy Italian sausage, or red pepper flakes
  • Make it meaty - Double up on the pepperoni and sausage for serious meat lovers
  • Add more veggies - Try mushrooms, green peppers, or even spinach
  • Switch the cheese - Use a blend of mozzarella, cheddar, and provolone
  • Try different meats - Swap ham for Canadian bacon or add some crispy bacon bits

The beauty of this homemade supreme pizza is that you can make it exactly how your family likes it. Emily always asks me to go light on the onions but heavy on the pepperoni!

Frequently Asked Questions About Supreme Pizza Recipe

Can I use store-bought pizza dough instead of making homemade dough?

Yes! Store-bought pizza dough works perfectly for this recipe. Just let it come to room temperature for about 30 minutes before rolling out for easier handling.

How do I know when my supreme pizza is fully cooked?

Your pizza is done when the crust is golden brown, the cheese is melted and bubbly, and the edges are crispy. This typically takes 15-18 minutes at 500°F.

Can I make this supreme pizza gluten-free?

Absolutely! Simply substitute the regular pizza dough with a gluten-free pizza dough or use a cauliflower pizza crust for a low-carb, gluten-free option.

How should I store leftover supreme pizza?

Store leftover pizza in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days in an airtight container. Reheat in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes to restore crispiness.

Recipes You May Like

  • No Knead Pizza Dough Recipe - Perfect for when you want homemade dough without the hassle
  • Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza - Great for feeding a crowd with minimal effort
  • BBQ Chicken Pizza - Another family favorite with a sweet and tangy twist

Final Thoughts On This Supreme Pizza Recipe

supreme pizza on board with grated cheese

This supreme pizza recipe has become our go-to for family pizza nights, birthday parties, and those times when I just don't feel like cooking something complicated.

The combination of meats, vegetables, and melted cheese creates the perfect bite every single time. Plus, there's something so satisfying about making pizza from scratch at home.

Give this recipe a try next weekend - I promise it'll become a regular in your dinner rotation too! Don't forget to save it to Pinterest so you can find it again when you're planning your next pizza night.

Pinterest CTA
Veggie Supreme Pizza Recipe
Veggie Supreme Pizza

fresh baked veggie pizza sliced on wooden board

Supreme Pizza Recipe

This Supreme Pizza Recipe combines pepperoni, Italian sausage, ham, fresh vegetables, and melted cheese on a crispy homemade crust. Ready in just 35 minutes, it's the perfect family dinner that beats any delivery pizza!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 25 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Dough Rising Time 1 hour hr
Total Time 1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
Course Main Dish, Pizza
Cuisine Italian
Servings 6 slices
Calories 416 kcal

Equipment

  • Cast Iron Skillet or Pizza Stone
  • Rolling Pin
  • Box Grater

Ingredients
  

Pizza Base

  • 1 round homemade pizza dough or store-bought
  • ½ cup pizza sauce

Meat Toppings

  • 1 oz pepperoni slices
  • 2 oz Italian sausage cooked and crumbled
  • 2 oz ham chopped into bite-sized pieces

Vegetable Toppings

  • ½ cup mushrooms sautéed until golden
  • ¼ cup red onion sliced thin
  • ¼ cup bell pepper or jalapeño, sliced thin
  • ¼ cup sliced black olives

Cheese

  • ½ cup mozzarella cheese freshly shredded
  • parmesan cheese for topping

Instructions
 

  • Make your pizza dough using your favorite recipe or grab some from the store. If using homemade, let it come to room temperature for easier rolling.
  • Brown the Italian sausage in a skillet over medium heat until cooked through and crumbly. Drain any excess grease and set aside.
  • Slice all your vegetables - peppers, mushrooms, and onions. Keep them relatively thin so they cook evenly.
  • Shred your cheeses using a box grater. Fresh cheese melts so much better than pre-shredded.
  • Prep your work surface with a little olive oil and sprinkle some flour on top. This prevents sticking.
  • Roll out the dough into your desired shape using a rolling pin. Aim for about ¼ inch thick.
  • Transfer to your baking vessel - whether that's a greased cast iron skillet, pizza stone, or regular baking sheet.
  • Spread the pizza sauce evenly over the dough, leaving about an inch border for the crust. Use the back of a spoon for even coverage.
  • Add half the mozzarella and parmesan directly over the sauce. This creates a good cheese base.
  • Layer your meats - pepperoni, cooked sausage, and ham pieces. Distribute them evenly so every bite has some of each.
  • Add the vegetables - mushrooms, onions, bell peppers, and black olives. Spread them out nicely.
  • Top with remaining cheese - this helps keep everything in place while baking.
  • Bake in a preheated 500°F oven for 15-18 minutes until the crust is golden brown and cheese is bubbly.
  • Let it cool for 2-3 minutes before slicing and serving.

Notes

Store-bought pizza dough works perfectly for this recipe - just let it come to room temperature for about 30 minutes before rolling out for easier handling. You can make the dough several hours in advance and store it in the refrigerator. If you roll out the dough pretty thin, you won't need to par-bake the crust. For a gluten-free option, use cauliflower pizza crust instead of regular dough.

Nutrition

Calories: 416kcalCarbohydrates: 57gProtein: 14gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 19mgSodium: 777mgPotassium: 238mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 382IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 69mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Family Dinner, Homemade Pizza, Supreme Pizza Recipe
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Homemade BBQ Chicken Pizza Recipe

July 5, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

There's something magical about making pizza from scratch on a Friday night. Last month, Emily asked if we could skip ordering takeout and make something "actually good" instead (thanks for the vote of confidence, kiddo!). That's when I decided to try my hand at homemade BBQ chicken pizza, and honestly? It turned out better than any restaurant version I've ever had.

The combination of tangy barbecue sauce, tender chicken, and melted mozzarella on a crispy homemade crust is absolutely perfect. Plus, making it yourself means you control every ingredient – no weird preservatives or mystery toppings here!

If you're looking for more pizza inspiration, you might want to check out my English muffin pizzas for a quick weeknight option, or try my no-knead pizza dough recipe if you want to prep ahead. And don't miss my sheet pan pepperoni pizza – it's perfect for feeding a crowd!

Why You Will Like This BBQ Chicken Pizza

Hand lifting cheesy barbecue chicken pizza slice

This recipe hits all the right notes, and I'm not just saying that because I'm proud of how it turned out! Here's what makes this BBQ chicken pizza special:

  • Quick and easy – The whole process takes about 1 hour and 45 minutes, but most of that is hands-off time
  • Budget-friendly – Making pizza at home costs way less than delivery, and you get more food
  • Customizable – Don't like onions? Skip them! Want extra cheese? Go for it!
  • Perfect texture – The crust gets crispy on the bottom while staying tender inside
  • Crowd-pleaser – I've never met anyone who doesn't love this combination of flavors
  • Great for leftovers – It tastes amazing reheated the next day (if there's any left!)

Ingredients for the Perfect BBQ Chicken Pizza

Here's what you'll need to make this delicious homemade BBQ chicken pizza:

For the Pizza:

  • 1 homemade pizza dough (or store-bought crust if you're short on time)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ cup (148 g) BBQ sauce, divided
  • 1 ½ cups (130 g) cooked shredded chicken
  • ¼ cup (24 g) onion, thinly sliced
  • 1 ½ cups (148 g) mozzarella cheese, shredded
  • Fresh cilantro for topping (optional, but I love the pop of color!)

The key to great BBQ chicken pizza is using quality ingredients. I always use rotisserie chicken because it's already perfectly seasoned and saves time. For the BBQ sauce, I prefer something with a good balance of sweet and tangy – not too smoky or it overwhelms the other flavors.

Instructions for Making BBQ Chicken Pizza

Making this BBQ chicken pizza is easier than you might think. Here's how I do it:

Preparing the Dough and Oven

  1. Prepare your pizza dough according to the recipe instructions (or let store-bought dough come to room temperature if using that instead).
  2. Adjust your oven rack to the lower-third position and preheat to 475°F. This high heat is crucial for getting that crispy crust!
  3. Roll out the dough into a 12-inch circle. I like to do this directly on my pizza pan to avoid any transfer mishaps. If you're using a pizza stone, work directly on your pizza peel.

Assembling Your BBQ Chicken Pizza

Pizza dough in a metal bowl
Raw pizza dough in a pan

  1. Prep your pan by spraying it with non-stick spray and dusting lightly with flour or cornmeal. This prevents sticking and adds a nice texture to the bottom.
  2. Brush the dough with olive oil all over the surface. This creates a barrier that keeps the crust from getting soggy.
  3. Spread half the BBQ sauce evenly over the crust, leaving about a 1-inch border around the edges. Don't go crazy with the sauce – too much makes the pizza soggy.

Adding the Toppings

  1. Sprinkle the chicken and onion over the sauce. Make sure to distribute them evenly so every bite has some of everything.
  2. Add the remaining BBQ sauce by dotting it around the pizza. This gives you those perfect little pockets of extra flavor.
  3. Top with mozzarella cheese, spreading it evenly over the entire pizza. Don't be shy with the cheese – it's what holds everything together!
Spreading barbecue sauce on raw dough
Unbaked pizza topped with shredded cheese

Baking to Perfection

  1. Bake for 15-17 minutes until the crust is golden brown and the cheese is melted and bubbly. I always rotate the pizza halfway through to ensure even browning.
  2. Let it cool on a wire rack for 10 minutes before slicing. I know it's tempting to dive right in, but this resting time helps the cheese set up so it doesn't all slide off when you cut it.
  3. Garnish with fresh cilantro if desired, then slice and serve immediately.

Storage and Reheating Your BBQ Chicken Pizza

Leftover BBQ chicken pizza is like finding treasure in your fridge! Here's how to store it properly:

Refrigerator storage: Wrap individual slices or the whole pizza tightly in plastic wrap and store for up to 3 days. The flavors actually develop even more overnight.

Freezer storage: Wrap cooled slices individually in plastic wrap, then place in a freezer bag. They'll keep for up to 3 months.

Reheating tips: I've tried every method, and here's what works best. For refrigerated pizza, use a skillet over medium heat for 3-4 minutes to crisp the bottom, then cover for 1-2 minutes to warm through. For frozen slices, thaw first, then reheat the same way.

Never use the microwave if you can avoid it – it makes the crust chewy and gross!

Variations for Your BBQ Chicken Pizza

One of the best things about making homemade BBQ chicken pizza is how easy it is to customize. Here are some variations I've tried:

  • Spicy version – Add sliced jalapeños or use spicy BBQ sauce
  • Hawaiian twist – Add pineapple chunks along with the chicken
  • Veggie-loaded – Include bell peppers, mushrooms, or corn
  • Cheese upgrade – Mix in some sharp cheddar or smoked gouda with the mozzarella
  • Herb garden – Add fresh basil or oregano before baking

Emily's personal preference? She loves when I add extra cheese and skip the onions (typical teenager). I've also made this with leftover grilled chicken, which adds a nice smoky flavor that pairs perfectly with the BBQ sauce.

What toppings would you add to make this BBQ chicken pizza your own?

BBQ Chicken Pizza FAQ

Can I use store-bought pizza dough instead of homemade?

Yes! You can use store-bought pizza dough or even a pre-made crust to save time.

Do I need to cook the chicken before putting it on the pizza?

Yes, always use cooked chicken. Raw chicken won't cook through properly in the short baking time. Rotisserie chicken works great!

How long does leftover BBQ chicken pizza keep?

Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days, or freeze individual slices for up to 3 months.

How do I know when my BBQ chicken pizza is done?

The pizza is ready when the crust is golden brown and the cheese is melted and bubbly, typically 15-17 minutes at 475°F.

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoyed this BBQ chicken pizza recipe, here are some other crowd-pleasers from my kitchen:

  • Old-Fashioned Baked Macaroni and Cheese – Another comfort food classic that's perfect for family dinners
  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken – If you love the chicken on this pizza, you'll go crazy for this skillet recipe
  • Southern Fried Chicken Recipe – Perfect for when you want to use up that leftover chicken in a completely different way

Conclusion

Sliced barbecue chicken pizza on parchment

Making BBQ chicken pizza at home is one of those cooking wins that makes you feel like a kitchen superhero. The combination of crispy crust, tangy barbecue sauce, tender chicken, and melted cheese is absolutely perfect. Plus, it's so much more affordable than ordering delivery!

This recipe has become our go-to for weekend dinners and movie nights. Emily always asks for extra cheese (obviously), and I love how the house smells while it's baking. The best part? Leftovers taste amazing the next day, so you get to enjoy this delicious BBQ chicken pizza twice.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out! Don't forget to save this to Pinterest for your next pizza night.

Pinterest CTA
BBQ Chicken Pizza with Homemade Sauce
BBQ Chicken Pizza with Homemade Sauce recipe

Whole barbecue chicken pizza with onion and herbs

The Best Homemade BBQ Chicken Pizza

Homemade BBQ chicken pizza made from scratch with tangy barbecue sauce, tender chicken, onions, and tons of mozzarella cheese on a crispy homemade crust. It's cheap, easy, and fun to make!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 1 hour hr 25 minutes mins
Cook Time 17 minutes mins
Total Time 1 hour hr 42 minutes mins
Course Main Dish, Pizza
Cuisine American
Servings 8 slices
Calories 275 kcal

Equipment

  • Pizza Pan or Pizza Stone
  • Rolling Pin
  • Wire Rack

Ingredients
  

Pizza Base

  • 1 homemade pizza dough or store-bought crust
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil

Toppings

  • ½ cup BBQ sauce 148g, divided
  • 1 ½ cups cooked shredded chicken 130g
  • ¼ cup onion 24g, thinly sliced
  • 1 ½ cups mozzarella cheese 148g, shredded
  • fresh cilantro for topping, optional

Instructions
 

  • Prepare the homemade pizza dough according to the recipe instructions.
  • Adjust the oven rack to the lower-third position. Preheat the oven to 475°F (245°C).
  • Roll the dough out into a 12-inch circle. You can also do this directly on your pizza pan. If you are using a pizza stone, do this step directly on your pizza peel.
  • Spray your pizza pan with non-stick spray and dust lightly with flour or cornmeal. Once you've shaped the dough, gently transfer it to your prepared pizza pan.
  • Brush the top of the pizza dough with the olive oil. Spread half of the BBQ sauce evenly over the crust leaving a 1-inch bare rim around the edge.
  • Sprinkle the chicken and onion over the sauce. Top with remaining BBQ sauce.
  • Spread the mozzarella cheese evenly over the top.
  • Bake for 15-17 minutes, or until the crust is golden brown and the cheese has melted. Rotate halfway through the cooking time.
  • Let cool on a wire rack for 10 minutes. Garnish with cilantro if desired before slicing and serving.

Notes

Tips for Success:
  • When making homemade pizza dough, be sure to weigh the flour for best results.
  • Don't use raw chicken! Always use cooked chicken as pizzas cook quickly and raw chicken may not cook through properly. Rotisserie chicken works great!
  • You can toss the chicken in the remaining BBQ sauce instead of topping it with sauce for extra flavor.
  • For spicier onion flavor, use red onions. For mild flavor, use sweet or yellow onion.
Make Ahead Tips:
  • Wrap baked and cooled pizza tightly in plastic wrap. Store in refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Baked and cooled pizza slices can be wrapped tightly and stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 275kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 15gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 36mgSodium: 689mgPotassium: 125mgFiber: 1gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 193IUVitamin C: 0.5mgCalcium: 116mgIron: 2mg
Keyword Homemade Pizza, The Best Homemade BBQ Chicken Pizza
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Quick And Easy English Muffin Pizzas Recipe

July 5, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

When you need dinner on the table in under 20 minutes, English Muffin Pizzas are about to become your new best friend! These little guys saved me on more Tuesday nights than I can count.

I still remember the first time I made these for Emily when she was going through her "I only eat pizza" phase at age 8. She was being so picky about everything, and I was honestly running out of ideas. Then I spotted those English muffins sitting on the counter and thought, "Why not?"

Best decision ever! Emily loved them so much that she started requesting them for lunch, dinner, and even tried to convince me they counted as breakfast food (nice try, kiddo). Now they're our go-to when we want something quick, tasty, and way better than delivery.

The beauty of these English muffin pizzas is that everyone can make their own exactly how they like it. Emily goes heavy on the cheese (obviously), while I love adding extra pepperoni and sometimes a sprinkle of red pepper flakes when she's not looking.

If you're looking for more homemade pizza inspiration, you might want to check out my no-knead pizza dough recipe for weekend pizza nights, or try my sheet pan pepperoni pizza when you're feeding a crowd.

Why You Will Like This English Muffin Pizza Recipe

Three mini pepperoni pizzas on a plate with shredded cheese

Here's what makes these little English muffin pizzas absolutely perfect for busy weeknights:

  • Ready in just 17 minutes - Seriously, from start to finish, you're looking at less than 20 minutes total
  • Kids can help make them - Emily's been making her own since she was 10, and it's become our little bonding activity
  • Uses ingredients you probably already have - English muffins, pizza sauce, cheese, and pepperoni are pantry staples in our house
  • Perfect portion control - Each person gets exactly what they want without fighting over toppings
  • Great for meal prep - You can assemble them ahead of time and just pop them in the oven when ready
  • Way cheaper than ordering pizza - We're talking about $1.50 per person versus $15+ for delivery

Ingredients For English Muffin Pizzas

Here's everything you'll need to make these mini pizzas:

  • 6 whole wheat English muffins, split - I prefer whole wheat because they hold up better and don't get soggy
  • ½ cup pizza sauce - Use your favorite brand or make your own (I won't judge if you use the jar stuff!)
  • 2 cups shredded mozzarella cheese - Don't skimp on this - the cheese is what makes these special
  • 4 ounces mini pepperoni - The mini ones distribute better than regular pepperoni slices

That's it! Simple ingredients that probably live in your kitchen right now.

How To Make English Muffin Pizzas

Getting Started

  1. Preheat your oven to 375°F - This temperature gives you perfectly melted cheese without burning the English muffins
  2. Toast the English muffins in a toaster - This step is crucial! I learned this the hard way when my first batch came out soggy in the middle. Nobody wants soggy pizza, trust me on this one.
  3. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil - Future you will thank present you for this easy cleanup trick
Eight toasted muffin halves on a baking sheet
Eight muffins topped with pizza sauce on a baking sheet

Assembly Process

  1. Arrange the toasted English muffin halves cut-side up - Make sure they're evenly spaced on your prepared baking sheet
  2. Spread pizza sauce evenly on each muffin half - Don't go crazy with the sauce here. I use about 1 tablespoon per half. Too much sauce equals soggy centers, and we've already established that's not happening on my watch.
  3. Sprinkle mozzarella cheese generously - This is where you can be a little heavy-handed. The cheese creates a nice barrier that helps prevent sogginess too.
  4. Top with mini pepperoni slices - Distribute them evenly so every bite gets some pepperoni goodness
Unbaked pizzas with cheese and pepperoni on a sheet
Baked mini pizzas with melted cheese and pepperoni

Baking The Perfect Mini Pizzas

  1. Bake for 10-12 minutes - Watch for the cheese to melt completely and start browning around the edges. That's when you know they're perfect.
  2. Let them cool for 2-3 minutes - The cheese will be molten hot, and I've definitely burned my tongue more than once being impatient.

Storage And Reheating Your English Muffin Pizzas

These English muffin pizzas are great for making ahead of time. Here's how to store them properly:

Refrigerator Storage: You can assemble them completely and store covered in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Just add 2-3 extra minutes to the baking time if you're starting from cold.

Freezer Storage: These freeze beautifully! Assemble them on a baking sheet, freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer bag. They'll keep for up to 3 months.

Reheating: Pop them in a 350°F oven for 8-10 minutes if they're refrigerated, or 15-18 minutes if frozen. The toaster oven works great for just a few pieces.

Tips For Perfect English Muffin Pizza Success

Hand holding one mini pizza over a plate

Here are my tried-and-true tips for making the best English muffin pizzas every single time:

  • Always toast the English muffins first - I cannot stress this enough. This one step makes all the difference between soggy disappointment and crispy perfection.
  • Use pizza sauce sparingly - Too much sauce will make everything soggy. Start with less than you think you need.
  • Don't overload with toppings - I know it's tempting, but less is more here. Heavy toppings make the muffins soggy and hard to eat.
  • Try different cheeses - While mozzarella is classic, Emily loves when I use a mix of mozzarella and cheddar. Sometimes I'll add a sprinkle of parmesan too.
  • Make them your own - Bell peppers, mushrooms, olives, ham, sausage - whatever you like on regular pizza works here. Just keep the pieces small and don't go overboard.

What's your favorite pizza topping combination? I'm always looking for new ideas to try!

English Muffin Pizza Recipe Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make English muffin pizzas ahead of time?

Yes, assemble them up to 24 hours in advance and store covered in the refrigerator. Add 2-3 extra minutes to baking time if baking from cold.

Can I freeze English muffin pizzas?

Yes, freeze assembled unbaked pizzas for up to 3 months. Bake directly from frozen, adding 5-7 extra minutes to the cooking time.

What other toppings can I use besides pepperoni?

Try cooked sausage, ham, bell peppers, mushrooms, olives, or pineapple. Keep toppings light to prevent soggy centers.

How do I prevent my English muffin pizzas from getting soggy?

Always toast the English muffins first and use pizza sauce sparingly. Avoid watery toppings like fresh tomatoes or excess vegetables.

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoyed these English muffin pizzas, you might also love these other quick and easy recipes:

  • Air Fryer Tuna Melts - Another quick meal that's perfect for busy weeknights and ready in minutes
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - These bite-sized sandwiches are great for parties or when you want something a little more substantial
  • Mini Blueberry Muffins - Perfect for breakfast or snacking, and Emily loves helping me make these too

Conclusion

Hand grabbing a mini pizza from a plate

These English Muffin Pizzas have been a game-changer in our kitchen, and I know they'll be in yours too. They're quick, easy, and so much better than anything you can order. Plus, there's something really satisfying about making your own pizza, even if it's the simplified version.

The best part? Everyone can make their own exactly how they like it. No more arguments about toppings or having to pick them off. Emily gets her extra cheese, I get my pepperoni, and we're both happy.

Next time you're staring at the clock wondering what to make for dinner, remember these little lifesavers. Your family will thank you, and you'll wonder why you ever stressed about quick weeknight meals.

Give these a try and let me know what toppings you come up with! I'm always looking for new combinations to surprise Emily with.

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for those busy weeknight emergencies!

Pinterest CTA
Personal English Muffin Pizzas
Personal English Muffin Pizzas recipe

Three mini pepperoni pizzas on a white plate

English Muffin Pizzas

Quick and easy English Muffin Pizzas are toasted split English Muffins with pizza sauce, Mozzarella cheese and mini pepperonis for an easy meal. Perfect for busy weeknights and ready in just 17 minutes!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 12 minutes mins
Total Time 17 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Lunch, Snack
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 12 pizzas
Calories 164 kcal

Equipment

  • Toaster
  • Baking Sheet
  • Oven

Ingredients
  

  • 6 whole wheat English muffins split
  • ½ cup pizza sauce
  • 2 cups shredded mozzarella cheese
  • 4 ounces mini pepperoni

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F (190°C).
  • Toast the English muffins in a toaster to prevent the middle from being soggy when you bake them. You can also bake them for a few minutes in the preheated oven.
  • Arrange the toasted English muffin halves cut-side up on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil for easy clean up.
  • Spread pizza sauce evenly on top of each one; sprinkle with mozzarella cheese and top with mini pepperoni slices.
  • Bake in the preheated oven at 375 degrees F for 10-12 minutes or until the cheese is melted and browned on the edges.

Notes

Always toast the English muffins first to prevent soggy centers. You can assemble these up to 24 hours in advance and store covered in the refrigerator. Add 2-3 extra minutes to baking time if baking from cold. These can also be frozen for up to 3 months - bake directly from frozen, adding 5-7 extra minutes to the cooking time.

Nutrition

Calories: 164kcalCarbohydrates: 16gProtein: 8gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 18mgSodium: 403mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3g
Keyword English Muffin Pizzas, English Muffin Pizzas recipe, Muffin Pizzas, Muffin Pizzas Recipe, pizzas
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza Recipe

July 5, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Let me tell you about the day I discovered sheet pan pepperoni pizza - it was one of those "why didn't I think of this sooner?" moments that changed our family pizza nights forever!

It started when Emily invited six friends over for a sleepover (without much warning, as teenagers do). I was staring at my regular pizza stone thinking there was no way I could make enough individual pizzas to feed eight hungry kids. That's when I remembered seeing my neighbor make pizza on a huge sheet pan, and honestly? Best decision ever!

This sheet pan pepperoni pizza recipe creates a thick, chewy crust that's crispy on the bottom and soft on top. The dough is super forgiving, and you can feed 12 people with just one pan. Plus, it takes way less time than making multiple regular pizzas.

Speaking of crowd-pleasing recipes, if you're planning a party, you might also want to check out these garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs - they disappear just as fast as this pizza!

Why You Will Like This Sheet Pan Pizza Recipe

Hand holding thick cheesy pizza slice

Here's what makes this sheet pan pepperoni pizza so great:

  • Feeds a crowd - One pan serves 12 people, perfect for parties or big families
  • Simple ingredients - Just basic pantry staples plus pepperoni and cheese
  • Forgiving dough - No kneading machine required, and it's hard to mess up
  • Crispy yet chewy texture - The olive oil creates the perfect crust
  • Ready in about an hour - Including rise time, you're eating in 70 minutes
  • Budget-friendly - Way cheaper than ordering pizza for 12 people

Ingredients For The Best Sheet Pan Pizza

For the pizza dough:

  • 2 packages (4-½ teaspoons) active dry yeast
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar
  • 2 cups warm water
  • 4 cups all-purpose flour or bread flour
  • 1 tablespoon garlic salt
  • ½ cup olive oil, divided

For the toppings:

  • 1 cup pizza sauce
  • 40–45 pepperonis
  • 3 cups shredded mozzarella cheese
  • Italian seasoning

The olive oil is what makes this crust special - don't skip it! I learned this the hard way when I tried to make it "healthier" once. The pizza was okay, but not nearly as good as the original.

Instructions For Making Sheet Pan Pizza

  1. Prep your pan first - Coat a 17×12-inch sheet pan with ¼ cup olive oil and set aside. This step is crucial for getting that crispy bottom!
  2. Make the dough - In the bowl of an electric mixer fitted with a dough hook, combine the yeast and sugar with the warm water. Let it sit for about 10 minutes until it gets foamy.
  3. Mix everything together - Add the flour and garlic salt, then mix on low speed for a few minutes. Slowly add the remaining ¼ cup of olive oil and mix until a smooth ball starts to form (about 5 minutes).
Bowl with flour and sugar on dough
Smooth ball of pizza dough in glass bowl

Getting The Perfect Crust

  1. Press and shape - Press the dough evenly onto the bottom and up the sides of your prepared sheet pan. Don't worry if it's not perfect - rustic looks good!
  2. Let it rise - Cover with plastic wrap and let rise in a warm place for about 30 minutes. I usually put mine on top of the warm oven.
  3. Preheat and reshape - Heat your oven to 450°F. Once the dough has almost doubled in height, gently flatten the bottom and press the dough up the sides again.
Raw pizza with pepperoni before baking
Raw pizza with cheese and seasoning

Adding The Toppings

  1. Sauce it up - Spread pizza sauce evenly over the dough. Don't go crazy with the sauce - too much makes it soggy.
  2. Layer the goods - Sprinkle half the cheese over the sauce, then add all the pepperoni. Top with the remaining cheese and a sprinkle of Italian seasoning.
  3. Bake to perfection - Bake for 20-25 minutes until the crust starts to brown and the cheese bubbles. Let it sit for 5-10 minutes before cutting - trust me on this one!

Storage And Reheating Your Sheet Pan Pizza

This sheet pan pizza keeps really well, which is great because you might have leftovers (though not likely!).

Storing leftovers: Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. I usually cut it into squares and stack them with parchment paper between layers.

Reheating options: The oven method works best - 350°F for 5-7 minutes brings back that crispy bottom. Microwave works too (30-45 seconds per slice), but you'll lose some of that crunch.

Freezing tips: You can freeze slices for up to 2 months. Wrap individually in plastic wrap, then put them in a freezer bag. Thaw overnight in the fridge before reheating.

Variations For Your Sheet Pan Pizza Recipe

Baked sheet pan pizza cut in squares

The beauty of sheet pan pizza is how easy it is to customize! Here are some ideas I've tried:

  • Meat lovers - Add sausage, bacon, and ham along with the pepperoni
  • Veggie supreme - Bell peppers, mushrooms, and onions (cook them first!)
  • White sauce - Skip the red sauce and use garlic butter or alfredo
  • Breakfast pizza - Top with scrambled eggs, bacon, and cheese
  • BBQ chicken - Use BBQ sauce instead of pizza sauce and add cooked chicken

Want to make it spicier? Add some red pepper flakes to the dough. Emily loves when I do this, but I have to warn the guests first!

Frequently Asked Questions About Sheet Pan Pizza

Can I make sheet pan pizza dough ahead of time?

Yes! You can make the dough up to 24 hours ahead. After the first rise, cover tightly and refrigerate. Let it come to room temperature before stretching into the pan.

What size sheet pan do I need for this recipe?

You'll need a 17×12-inch sheet pan (half-sheet pan). A smaller pan will make the crust too thick, while a larger one will make it too thin.

Can I use different toppings instead of pepperoni?

Absolutely! Try sausage, mushrooms, bell peppers, or any of your favorite pizza toppings. Just avoid wet vegetables that could make the crust soggy.

How do I store and reheat leftover sheet pan pizza?

Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes or in the microwave for 30-45 seconds per slice.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this sheet pan pizza, here are some other crowd-pleasers from my kitchen:

  • Old-Fashioned Baked Macaroni and Cheese - Another comfort food that feeds a crowd and always gets rave reviews
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - Perfect party food that's just as easy to make for a group
  • Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs - These disappear faster than you can make them!

Conclusion

This sheet pan pepperoni pizza has seriously changed how we do pizza night at our house. No more making four separate pizzas or spending a fortune on delivery when we have friends over.

The dough is forgiving, the toppings are classic, and everyone gets fed without me being stuck in the kitchen all night. Plus, there's something so satisfying about pulling this huge, beautiful pizza out of the oven!

Give this recipe a try next time you need to feed a crowd. I promise it'll become your go-to sheet pan pizza recipe just like it did for us. Don't forget to save this to Pinterest so you can find it again when you need it!

Pinterest CTA
Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza Family Size
Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza Family Size recipe

Sliced sheet pan pepperoni pizza overhead

Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza

A scratch-made simple & scrumptious sheet pan pizza that feeds 12 people! Perfect thick, chewy crust with crispy bottom that everyone will love.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 45 minutes mins
Cook Time 25 minutes mins
Rising Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course Main Dish, Pizza
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 12 servings
Calories 285 kcal

Equipment

  • 17x12-inch Sheet Pan
  • Electric Mixer with Dough Hook
  • Plastic Wrap

Ingredients
  

Pizza Dough

  • 2 packages active dry yeast 4-½ teaspoons
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar
  • 2 cups warm water
  • 4 cups all-purpose flour or bread flour
  • 1 tablespoon garlic salt
  • ½ cup olive oil divided

Pizza Toppings

  • 1 cup pizza sauce
  • 40-45 pepperoni slices
  • 3 cups shredded mozzarella cheese
  • Italian seasoning for sprinkling

Instructions
 

  • Coat a 17×12-inch sheet pan with ¼ cup olive oil and set aside.
  • In the bowl of an electric mixer fitted with a dough hook, combine the yeast and sugar with the warm water. Allow to proof about 10 minutes until foamy.
  • Add the flour and garlic salt and mix on low speed for a few minutes before slowly adding the remaining ¼ cup of olive oil. Mix until a smooth ball starts to form, about 5 minutes.
  • Press dough evenly onto the bottom and up the sides of the prepared sheet pan. Cover with plastic wrap and let rise in a warm place for about 30 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, preheat oven to 450°F. Once dough has risen to almost double in height, flatten the bottom and press the dough up the sides of the pan with your hands.
  • Spread pizza sauce evenly over dough. Sprinkle sauce evenly with half the cheese and then all the pepperoni. Sprinkle pepperoni evenly with remaining cheese and then sprinkle the whole pizza with a little Italian seasoning.
  • Bake for 20-25 minutes or until the crust starts to brown and the cheese starts to bubble. Let set 5-10 minutes before cutting and serving.

Notes

This sheet pan pizza is perfect for feeding a crowd! You can customize the toppings to your liking - just avoid wet vegetables that could make the crust soggy. The olive oil is crucial for getting that crispy bottom crust. Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to 3 days and reheat in a 350°F oven for best results.

Nutrition

Calories: 285kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 12gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 20mgSodium: 680mgPotassium: 180mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 260IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 180mgIron: 2.2mg
Keyword Party Food, Pepperoni Pizza, Sheet Pan Pepperoni Pizza
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Best No-Knead Pizza Dough Recipe

July 5, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Ever wondered if you could make amazing pizza dough without all the arm-wrestling that comes with kneading? Well, I've got some fantastic news for you! This no-knead pizza dough recipe is about to change your pizza game forever.

Last month, Emily asked if we could make pizza from scratch for her sleepover party. I'll be honest – my first thought was "oh no, not the kneading!" But then I remembered this incredible technique I learned from a chef friend who swore by letting time do all the work instead of your muscles.

The result? Four perfect 10-inch pizzas with crispy, bubbly edges and that perfect chewy-yet-tender texture that makes restaurant pizza so amazing. Plus, you can make the dough up to 18 hours ahead, which means less stress on pizza night!

Speaking of making things easier, if you're looking for the perfect sauce to pair with this dough, check out my homemade pizza sauce recipe – it's been a family favorite for years and takes just 15 minutes to make.

Why You Will Like This No-Knead Pizza Dough Recipe

Hand holding slice of baked cheese pizza

  • Zero kneading required – seriously, just mix and let it sit
  • Only 5 simple ingredients you probably already have
  • Perfect for meal prep – make it 12-18 hours ahead
  • Makes 4 generous pizzas – perfect for families or parties
  • Crispy crust with bubbly edges that rivals any pizzeria
  • Freezer-friendly – portion and freeze for up to 4 weeks
  • No special equipment needed – no stand mixer, no fancy tools

Ingredients For The Best Pizza Dough Recipe

No Knead Pizza Dough

  • 3 ½ cups (1 lb 2 oz/497 g) bread flour
  • 2 teaspoons salt
  • ¼ teaspoon instant dried yeast
  • 1 ⅓ cups (10 ½ fl oz/ 298 g) lukewarm water
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

Pizza Topping

  • 1 recipe homemade pizza sauce
  • 4 cups (12 oz/360 g) shredded mozzarella

The secret to this no-knead pizza dough is using just a tiny amount of yeast and letting it work its magic over 12-18 hours. Don't worry about the long fermentation time – it's totally hands-off!

Instructions For Making No-Knead Pizza Dough

The Day Before: Make The No Knead Dough

Glass bowl of mixed pizza dough
Smooth ball of pizza dough in glass bowl

  • Mix the dry ingredients: In a large bowl, add the flour, salt, and yeast. Give it a good stir to combine everything evenly.
  • Add the wet ingredients: Pour in the lukewarm water and olive oil. Mix until all the flour is fully hydrated and forms a shaggy ball. Don't worry if it looks messy – that's exactly what you want!
  • Prepare for fermentation: Add a splash of olive oil to the bowl and coat the dough ball completely. Cover tightly with plastic wrap and a kitchen towel.
  • Let time do the work: Allow the dough to sit at room temperature for a minimum of 12 hours, but up to 18 hours. After 18 hours, you can refrigerate it for up to 3 days.

The Next Day: Shape And Bake The Pizza

Risen dough in clear glass bowl
Raw pizza on metal peel with cheese

  • Turn out the dough: Place the fermented dough onto a lightly floured surface. It should look bubbly and smell slightly tangy – that's the fermentation working!
  • Divide the dough: Cut the dough into 4 equal pieces (about 205g each). Gently knock out the air by pulling and folding each piece.
  • Shape into balls: Form each portion into a smooth ball. Place on a floured tray, cover, and let rest for at least 1 hour.
  • Preheat your oven: Set the oven to 450°F (225°C) and place a pizza stone or heavy baking tray on the middle rack to heat up.
  • Stretch the dough: On a floured pizza peel or flat baking tray, gently stretch each dough ball to about 10 inches. If it springs back, let it rest another 10 minutes.
  • Add toppings: Spread pizza sauce, leaving a 1-inch border. Add cheese and any other toppings you like. Remember – less is more for the perfect pizza!
  • Bake to perfection: Slide the pizza onto the preheated stone or tray. Bake for about 10 minutes until the crust is golden and the cheese is bubbly.
  • Enjoy immediately: Serve hot from the oven for the best experience!

Storage And Reheating Your Pizza Dough

Fresh dough storage: Any unused dough balls can be refrigerated for up to 2 days or frozen for up to 4 weeks. Just wrap them individually in plastic wrap first.

Freezing tips: I like to portion the dough after the first rise, then freeze in individual bags. When you're ready to use it, just thaw overnight in the fridge and let it come to room temperature before shaping.

Reheating leftover pizza: Pop slices in a hot skillet for 2-3 minutes, then cover with a lid for another minute. This keeps the bottom crispy while melting the cheese on top perfectly!

Variations For Your No-Knead Pizza Dough Recipe

Sliced cheese pizza on parchment paper

Want to switch things up? Here are some of my tested variations:

  • Whole wheat version: Replace up to half the bread flour with whole wheat flour for a nuttier flavor
  • Herb-infused dough: Add 2 tablespoons of dried Italian herbs to the flour mixture
  • Garlic lovers: Mix in 2 minced garlic cloves with the wet ingredients
  • Slightly sweet: Add 1 tablespoon of honey with the water for a touch of sweetness

Have you ever tried making pizza dough and felt intimidated by all the kneading? This method totally eliminates that stress! The long fermentation actually develops better flavor than traditional kneading methods.

Frequently Asked Questions About No-Knead Pizza Dough

How long does the pizza dough need to ferment?

Minimum 12 hours at room temperature, up to 18 hours, then can be refrigerated for up to 3 days.

Can I make this pizza dough ahead of time?

Yes! The dough can be refrigerated for 2 days or frozen for up to 4 weeks after shaping.

Do I really need to knead this pizza dough?

No kneading required! Just mix until all flour is hydrated and let time do the work through fermentation.

How many pizzas does this recipe make?

This recipe makes 4 individual 10-inch pizzas (about 205g of dough each).

Recipes You May Like

  • Old-Fashioned Baked Macaroni and Cheese - Another comfort food classic that's perfect for family dinners
  • Creamy Tuscan Chicken Pasta - Italian-inspired pasta that pairs beautifully with homemade bread
  • Irish Soda Bread Recipe - Another no-knead bread that's ready in under an hour

Why This No-Knead Pizza Dough Works So Well

_Crispy cheese pizza sliced on parchment

I've tested this recipe countless times (Emily can attest to that!), and it consistently produces restaurant-quality results. The secret is the long, slow fermentation that develops complex flavors while the minimal yeast creates the perfect texture.

The bread flour gives you that chewy, stretchy crust that holds up to all your toppings, while the olive oil adds richness and helps create those gorgeous golden bubbles around the edges.

This homemade pizza dough has become our go-to for pizza nights, and I know it'll become yours too. There's something so satisfying about making pizza completely from scratch, and this method makes it totally doable even on busy weeknights.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out! Don't forget to save this post to Pinterest so you can find it easily for your next pizza night.

Pinterest CTA
No-Knead Best Pizza Dough Recipe
No-Knead Best Pizza Dough

Golden cheese pizza sliced on parchment

Best No-Knead Pizza Dough Recipe

This amazing no-knead pizza dough recipe uses just 5 ingredients and creates restaurant-quality crispy crust! No mixer needed - just mix and let time do the work through 12-hour fermentation.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 20 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Fermentation Time 12 hours hrs
Total Time 12 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Course Pizza
Cuisine Italian
Servings 4 pizzas
Calories 385 kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Pizza stone or baking tray
  • Pizza peel or flat baking tray

Ingredients
  

No Knead Pizza Dough

  • 3.5 cups bread flour 1 lb 2 oz/497g
  • 2 teaspoon salt
  • 0.25 teaspoon instant dried yeast
  • 1.33 cups lukewarm water 10½ fl oz/298g
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil

Pizza Toppings

  • 1 recipe homemade pizza sauce
  • 4 cups shredded mozzarella 12 oz/360g

Instructions
 

  • The Day Before: Make the No Knead Dough
  • In a large bowl add in the flour, salt and yeast and mix together.
  • Add the water and oil and mix until all of the flour is fully hydrated and forms a ball. You don't want any lumps of flour left dry.
  • Add a splash of olive oil to the bowl and coat the dough in it. Cover tightly with cling wrap and a kitchen towel and allow the dough to sit at room temperature and ferment for a minimum of 12 hours but up to 18. After 18 hours it can be put in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • The Next Day: Shape and Bake the Pizza
  • Turn out the dough onto a lightly floured surface.
  • Cut the dough into 4 pieces (about 205g each) and knock out the air from the dough by pulling and folding the dough.
  • Shape each portion of dough into a ball. Allow the dough to rest on a floured tray covered for a minimum of 1 hour.
  • Preheat the oven to 450℉ (225℃) and place a pizza stone or a tray on the rack.
  • On a flat baking tray or pizza peel, dust it with flour or semolina. With floured hands gently stretch your pizza dough to 10-inches. You can also use a rolling pin to stretch it out. If you find the dough is springing back and is hard to stretch then let it rest for 10 minutes on the counter.
  • Spread on pizza sauce, leaving a 1-inch border around the pizza. Follow with the cheese and any other toppings you like. You don't want to add too many heavy toppings on your pizza otherwise you won't be able to slide it off the baking tray.
  • Slide onto the preheated tray in your oven and bake for roughly 10 minutes or until golden and the base is crisp and golden brown.
  • Enjoy the pizza fresh from the oven. Any raw dough that is leftover can be refrigerated for up to 2 days or even frozen for up to 4 weeks.

Notes

This no-knead pizza dough can be made 12-18 hours ahead for perfect fermentation. The dough can be refrigerated for up to 3 days or frozen for up to 4 weeks. For best results, use bread flour for the perfect chewy texture.
Pro tip: If the dough springs back when stretching, let it rest for 10 minutes and try again. Don't overload with toppings - less is more for the perfect pizza!

Nutrition

Calories: 385kcalCarbohydrates: 75gProtein: 12gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 590mgPotassium: 115mgFiber: 3gSugar: 1gCalcium: 2mgIron: 4.5mg
Keyword Best No-Knead Pizza Dough Recipe, Easy, homemade, Make Ahead, No-Knead Pizza Dough
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie Recipe

June 29, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

When I first tried Crumbl's Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie, I knew I had to figure out how to make these at home. There's something magical about that super thick, fudgy chocolate cookie base topped with vanilla cream cheese frosting and those perfect Oreo crumbs on top!

Last month, Emily and I spent three weekends testing different versions until we nailed it. The secret? Black cocoa powder and not one, but TWO AND A HALF CUPS of crushed Oreos mixed right into the dough. I'm not kidding when I say these taste exactly like the real thing.

These cookies are seriously thick - like hockey puck thick - and that's exactly what makes them so special. Each bite gives you that perfect contrast between the rich chocolate cookie and the creamy, sweet frosting. Plus, they're way easier to make than you'd think!

If you're on a Crumbl copycat kick like we are, you'll want to check out my Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe and Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe too!

Why You Will Love This Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie Recipe

Oreo frosted cookie on cooling rack

  • Tastes exactly like Crumbl - I've done the testing so you don't have to
  • Ready in just 45 minutes - including cooling time for the frosting
  • Makes 12 giant cookies - perfect for sharing (or not sharing!)
  • Uses black cocoa powder - gives that intense, almost-black chocolate color
  • Loaded with real Oreo pieces - over 40 cookies go into this recipe
  • Thick bakery-style texture - these aren't your average thin cookies

Ingredients For The Best Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies

Oreo Cookie Base

  • 1 ½ cups (333g) salted butter
  • ¾ cup (173g) granulated sugar
  • 1 ½ cups (369g) brown sugar
  • 2 eggs
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla
  • 3 cups (456g) all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup (120g) black cocoa powder
  • 2 ½ cups (220g) crushed Oreos (about 40 cookies)
  • 2 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt

Cream Cheese Frosting

  • ¼ cup (56g) salted butter, softened
  • 8 oz cream cheese, room temperature
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla
  • 4 cups (428g) powdered sugar
  • Milk to thin, if needed

How To Make Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies Step By Step

Preparing The Cookie Dough

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (180°C). Line two large baking sheets with parchment paper.
  • Cream the butter and sugars together in a large bowl using an electric mixer. Beat for about 3-4 minutes until the mixture is light and fluffy. This step is really important for getting that perfect texture!
Brown sugar and white sugar in glass bowl
Creamed butter and sugar in swirl pattern

  • Add the eggs and vanilla. Mix until everything is well combined and the mixture looks creamy and pale.

Mixing The Dry Ingredients

  • Combine all dry ingredients in a separate bowl. Whisk together the flour, black cocoa powder, crushed Oreos, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
Egg and vanilla in creamed butter mixture
Cookie dough after adding eggs

  • Gradually add the dry ingredients to the wet mixture. Mix on low speed until just combined. Don't overmix here - we want tender cookies, not tough ones!

Shaping And Baking

  • Portion the dough into ½ cup portions. I use a large ice cream scoop for this - it makes twelve perfectly sized cookies. Roll each portion into a ball.
  • Arrange 6 cookies on each baking sheet. Make sure they're spaced about 3 inches apart because they will spread a bit.
Oreo cocoa flour mixture in glass bowl
Dark chocolate cookie dough in glass bowl

  • Press down slightly on each cookie to flatten it into what looks like a thick hockey puck. They should be about 1 inch thick.
  • Bake for 12-15 minutes until the tops are no longer glossy and look set. Don't overbake - they'll continue cooking on the hot pan.
  • Cool on the pan for 20 minutes before frosting. This is crucial for the frosting not to melt!

Making The Cream Cheese Frosting

Raw cookie dough balls on baking sheet
Baked chocolate cookies on baking sheet

  • Beat the softened butter, cream cheese, and vanilla until smooth and creamy. Make sure your cream cheese is at room temperature or you'll have lumps.
  • Add powdered sugar one cup at a time, beating well after each addition.
  • Add milk if needed - just a teaspoon at a time until you reach your desired consistency. The frosting should be smooth and pipeable.
  • Transfer frosting to a gallon-sized zip bag. Cut off one corner and pipe in a spiral pattern on each cooled cookie.
  • Sprinkle extra crushed Oreos on top of the frosting for that authentic Crumbl look.

Storage And Reheating Your Oreo Cookies

These Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 5 days at room temperature.

For longer storage, keep them in the refrigerator for up to a week. The cream cheese frosting actually tastes even better after a day or two!

If you want to warm them up, just pop them in the microwave for 10-15 seconds. The cookie base gets slightly warm and gooey while the frosting stays cool - it's amazing!

Tips And Variations For Perfect Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies

Chocolate cookies with cream frosting on plate

Here are my best tips after making these cookies probably fifty times (Emily lost count!):

  • Don't skip the black cocoa powder - regular cocoa won't give you that intense chocolate flavor and dark color
  • Room temperature ingredients are key - especially the cream cheese and butter
  • Crush your own Oreos - store-bought crumbs don't have the same texture
  • Use a kitchen scale if you have one - these measurements by weight are super accurate

Want to mix things up? Try these variations:

  • Double Stuff Oreo version - use Double Stuff Oreos for extra cream filling flavor
  • Mint Oreo twist - substitute mint Oreos for a refreshing change
  • Birthday cake style - add rainbow sprinkles to the frosting

The key to getting that perfect Crumbl texture is not to overbake them. They should still look slightly underdone when you take them out - trust me on this one!

Frequently Asked Questions About Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies

How long do Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies stay fresh?

Store in an airtight container for up to 5 days at room temperature or 1 week in the refrigerator.

Can I substitute regular cocoa powder for black cocoa powder?

Yes, but the cookies won't be as dark. Use the same amount of regular unsweetened cocoa powder.

How do I know when the Oreo Crumbl cookies are done baking?

The cookies are ready when the tops are no longer glossy and look set, about 12-15 minutes.

Can I freeze Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie dough?

Yes, portion the dough into balls and freeze for up to 3 months. Bake directly from frozen, adding 2-3 extra minutes.

Recipes You May Like

  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - Perfect when you want just a few cookies
  • Cookie Monster Cookies - Another fun cookie loaded with mix-ins
  • Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies - If you love Crumbl copycat recipes

Final Thoughts On These Amazing Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies

These Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies have become our go-to treat when we want something special but don't want to leave the house. The combination of that rich, fudgy cookie base with the creamy frosting and Oreo crumbs is absolutely perfect.

Emily's friends are always asking me to make these for school events, and honestly, they disappear faster than I can make them. The best part? They taste exactly like the ones from Crumbl but cost a fraction of the price to make at home.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how yours turn out! Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it again when you need your next chocolate fix.

Pinterest CTA
Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie
Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie recipe

Frosted chocolate cookies with Oreo crumbs on white plate

Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie

These copycat Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookies are super rich dark chocolate cookies with a vanilla cream cheese frosting and garnished with Oreo crumbs. They taste exactly like the bakery version!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Cooling Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 45 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 24 servings
Calories 448 kcal

Equipment

  • Flex Edge Beater Kitchenaid
  • Kitchenaid Stand Mixer
  • Cookie Sheet

Ingredients
  

Oreo Cookie Base

  • 1 ½ cups salted butter 333g
  • ¾ cup granulated sugar 173g
  • 1 ½ cups brown sugar 369g
  • 2 eggs
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour 456g
  • 1 cup black cocoa powder 120g
  • 2 ½ cups crushed oreos 220g, about 40 oreos crushed
  • 2 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt

Cream Cheese Frosting

  • ¼ cup salted butter 56g, softened
  • 8 oz cream cheese room temperature
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla
  • 4 cups powdered sugar 428g
  • milk to thin, if needed

Instructions
 

  • Preheat oven to 350°F (180°C).
  • Cream together the butter, granulated sugar and brown sugar.
  • Add the egg and vanilla. Mix until light in color and creamy.
  • Add in the dry ingredients (flour, black cocoa, crushed oreos, baking soda, baking powder and salt), mix into the dough. Mix until completely combined.
  • Portion out the dough into ½ cup portions. Roll into a ball and arrange 6 onto each cookie sheet. Press down slightly on the cookie dough, flattening it into what looks like a hockey puck.
  • Bake for 12-15 minutes, until the cookies are no longer glossy on the top.
  • Allow the cookies to cool on the pan for 20 minutes before frosting.
  • While the cookies are cooling, make the frosting by whipping the butter, cream cheese and vanilla until smooth.
  • Add the powdered sugar, one cup at a time.
  • Add milk a teaspoon at a time until you've reached your desired consistency, if needed.
  • Add the frosting to a gallon sized zip top bag, cut the corner of the bag and use it to pipe the frosting onto the warm cookies in a spiral.
  • Add extra crushed Oreos on top for garnish.
  • Serve warm.
  • Store in an air tight container either in the fridge or on the counter.

Notes

These cookies taste exactly like the ones from Crumbl but cost a fraction of the price to make at home. The key is using black cocoa powder for that intense chocolate flavor and not overbaking them - they should still look slightly underdone when you take them out.

Nutrition

Calories: 448kcalCarbohydrates: 64gProtein: 4gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 12gCholesterol: 60mgSodium: 423mgPotassium: 112mgFiber: 1gSugar: 46gVitamin A: 561IUCalcium: 40mgIron: 2mg
Keyword Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie, cookies, Copycat Recipe, Crumbl, oreo cookies
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

The Best Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe

June 29, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

This crumbl pink sugar cookie recipe will have you making bakery-quality cookies at home! Have you ever walked into a Crumbl store and just melted at the sight of those thick, perfectly frosted pink sugar cookies? I'm telling you, the first time Emily and I saw them, we both just stood there staring like they were some kind of magical creation!

After weeks of testing (and yes, eating way too many cookies in the process), I've cracked the code on making these thick, buttery cookies topped with the most incredible almond-flavored pink frosting that'll make you forget all about the bakery version.

The best part? You can make these at home anytime you want! No more waiting in those crazy long Crumbl lines or paying premium prices. Just pure cookie happiness right from your own kitchen.

If you're looking for more copycat treats, you'll definitely want to check out my mocha cookie crumble frappuccino recipe and my best Crumbl cornbread cookie recipe for the complete at-home bakery experience!

Why You Will Like This Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe

stacked sugar cookies with pink frosting bite taken

  • Super thick and soft - these cookies are seriously chunky, just like the real thing
  • Ready in just 30 minutes - from mixing to frosting, you'll be eating cookies in no time
  • Perfect pink frosting - that signature almond buttercream that makes Crumbl famous
  • Uses simple ingredients - nothing fancy here, just pantry staples that actually work
  • Stays fresh for days - store them just like the originals and they keep perfectly
  • Kid-approved - Emily actually said these taste better than the store-bought ones (and that's saying something!)

Ingredients For The Perfect Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookies

For The Sugar Cookies:

  • 1 cup salted butter, softened
  • 1 cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon almond extract (this is key!)
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder

For The Pink Almond Frosting:

  • ½ cup salted butter, softened
  • 3 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon almond extract
  • 1-3 tablespoons milk
  • Pink food coloring (gel works best)

Instructions For Making Your Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe

Preparing The Cookie Dough

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F and line two cookie sheets with parchment paper or silicone mats.
  2. Cream the butter and sugar in a large bowl using an electric hand mixer until the mixture is light and fluffy (about 3-4 minutes).
  3. Scrape down the sides of the bowl, then add the eggs, vanilla extract, and almond extract. Beat everything together until it's completely smooth and combined.
  4. Mix in the dry ingredients by adding the flour and baking powder. Beat on low speed, scraping the bowl frequently, until you have a cohesive cookie dough.
Raw sugar cookie dough ball
Pressing cookie dough with flat cup

Shaping And Baking The Cookies

  1. Scoop ¼ cup portions of cookie dough and roll each into a ball. This might seem like a lot of dough, but trust me - that's what makes them thick like Crumbl's!
  2. Arrange the dough balls on your prepared cookie sheets, leaving about 2 inches between each cookie. You'll fit about 6 cookies per sheet.
  3. Gently flatten each cookie using the bottom of a drinking glass or measuring cup. Don't press too hard - you want them thick, not pancake-flat!
  4. Bake for 9-11 minutes until the centers are puffed and no longer glossy. They won't turn golden brown like regular cookies, so don't worry about that.
  5. Cool on the baking sheet for at least 10 minutes before moving them. This helps them stay thick and prevents breaking.
Flattened sugar cookie dough with ridge
Baked plain sugar cookies on cooling rack

Making The Pink Almond Frosting

  1. Beat the softened butter in a medium bowl until it's completely smooth and creamy.
  2. Gradually add powdered sugar, almond extract, and 1 tablespoon of milk. Beat until the frosting is smooth and spreadable.
  3. Add more milk if needed to reach your desired consistency. The frosting should spread easily but not be too runny.
  4. Mix in the pink food coloring - start with just 3-4 drops of gel coloring and add more until you get that perfect Crumbl pink shade.
  5. Spread frosting on the slightly warm cookies. The gentle warmth helps the frosting settle into that smooth, professional look.

Storage & Reheating Your Homemade Crumbl Cookies

Room Temperature Storage: These frosted sugar cookies will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 5 days. Just like the original Crumbl cookies, they actually taste better after a day!

Refrigerator Storage: If you want to store them exactly like Crumbl does, keep them covered in the refrigerator. They'll maintain that perfect texture for up to a week.

Freezing Options: You can freeze the unfrosted cookies for up to 3 months. Wrap each one individually in plastic wrap, then store in a freezer bag.

Cookie Dough Freezing: Shape the cookie dough into balls, flash freeze for 30 minutes, then store in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Bake frozen with 2-3 extra minutes added to the time.

Tips For Perfect Copycat Crumbl Sugar Cookies

Frosted pink sugar cookies on white plate

Here's what I learned after making these cookies about fifteen times (Emily thought I'd lost my mind, but hey - we had some delicious research!):

  • Don't skip the almond extract - this is what gives them that distinctive Crumbl flavor that sets them apart from regular sugar cookies
  • Use a kitchen scale if you have one - measuring ¼ cup of dough by weight keeps all your cookies the same size
  • Let the butter soften naturally - microwaving it makes the cookies spread too much and lose that thick texture
  • Press gently when flattening - I learned this the hard way when my first batch turned into regular thin cookies instead of thick ones
  • Frost while slightly warm - this creates that smooth, bakery-style finish that looks just like the real thing

The almond extract in both the cookies and frosting is really what makes this recipe special. Trust me on this one - vanilla just doesn't give you that signature Crumbl taste!

Frequently Asked Questions About Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe

How long do these copycat Crumbl sugar cookies stay fresh?

Store frosted cookies covered at room temperature for up to 5 days, or refrigerate them like the original Crumbl cookies for best texture.

Can I make these cookies without almond extract?

Yes! You can substitute vanilla extract for the almond extract in both the cookies and frosting without affecting the texture.

Why are my cookies not as thick and soft as Crumbl's?

Make sure not to flatten the cookies too much when pressing with the glass, and don't overbake - remove them when centers are still slightly glossy.

Can I freeze the cookie dough to bake later?

Absolutely! Shape the dough into balls, flash freeze for 30 minutes, then store in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Bake frozen with 2-3 extra minutes.

Recipes You May Like

  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - When you want homemade cookies but don't need dozens of them
  • Cookie Monster Cookies - These fun blue cookies are perfect for kids and cookie lovers alike
  • Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies - Another amazing Crumbl copycat that'll blow your mind

Conclusion

frosted sugar cookies stacked with bite mark

This crumbl pink sugar cookie recipe has honestly become one of my most-requested treats! Emily's friends are always asking when I'm going to make "those pink cookies" again, and I love that I can whip them up anytime without the crazy bakery prices.

The combination of that thick, buttery cookie base with the sweet almond frosting is just perfection. Plus, there's something so satisfying about making these copycat crumbl cookies at home and knowing they taste just as good (if not better!) than the originals.

So grab your mixing bowls and get ready to make some cookie magic happen in your kitchen. Trust me, once you try these homemade crumbl cookies, you'll never want to wait in those long bakery lines again!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for later - you'll definitely want to make these again and again!

Pinterest CTA
Copycat Crumbl Sugar Cookie Recipe
Copycat Crumbl Sugar Cookie

sugar cookies with smooth pink frosting on tray

Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe

This copycat Crumbl pink sugar cookie recipe creates thick, buttery cookies topped with sweet pink almond frosting. They taste just like the famous bakery cookies but can be made at home in just 30 minutes!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Cooling & Frosting Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 12 large cookies
Calories 385 kcal

Equipment

  • Mixing bowls
  • Electric hand mixer
  • Spatula
  • Cookie Sheets
  • Parchment paper or silicone mats
  • Drinking glass (for flattening)

Ingredients
  

Sugar Cookies

  • 1 cup salted butter softened
  • 1 cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon almond extract
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder

Pink Almond Frosting

  • ½ cup salted butter softened
  • 3 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon almond extract
  • 1-3 tablespoons milk
  • 3-4 drops pink food coloring gel preferred

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F and line two cookie sheets with parchment paper or silicone mats.
  • Cream the butter and sugar in a large bowl using an electric hand mixer until the mixture is light and fluffy (about 3-4 minutes).
  • Scrape down the sides of the bowl, then add the eggs, vanilla extract, and almond extract. Beat everything together until it's completely smooth and combined.
  • Mix in the dry ingredients by adding the flour and baking powder. Beat on low speed, scraping the bowl frequently, until you have a cohesive cookie dough.
  • Scoop ¼ cup portions of cookie dough and roll each into a ball. This creates the signature thick Crumbl-style cookies.
  • Arrange the dough balls on your prepared cookie sheets, leaving about 2 inches between each cookie. You'll fit about 6 cookies per sheet.
  • Gently flatten each cookie using the bottom of a drinking glass or measuring cup. Don't press too hard - you want them thick, not flat!
  • Bake for 9-11 minutes until the centers are puffed and no longer glossy. They won't turn golden brown like regular cookies.
  • Cool on the baking sheet for at least 10 minutes before moving them. This helps them stay thick and prevents breaking.
  • For the frosting: Beat the softened butter in a medium bowl until it's completely smooth and creamy.
  • Gradually add powdered sugar, almond extract, and 1 tablespoon of milk. Beat until the frosting is smooth and spreadable. Add more milk if needed.
  • Mix in 3-4 drops of pink gel food coloring until you achieve the perfect Crumbl pink shade.
  • Spread frosting on the slightly warm cookies. The gentle warmth helps the frosting settle into that smooth, professional look.
  • Place frosted cookies on a cooling rack to completely cool and set the frosting before serving.

Notes

Storage Tips: Store frosted cookies covered at room temperature for up to 5 days, or refrigerate like original Crumbl cookies. Unfrosted cookies can be frozen for up to 3 months.
Pro Tips: Don't skip the almond extract - it's what gives these the signature Crumbl flavor! Use gel food coloring for the best color results. The cookies should be thick, not flat - resist over-pressing when flattening.
Make Ahead: Cookie dough can be shaped and frozen for up to 3 months. Bake frozen with 2-3 extra minutes added to baking time.

Nutrition

Calories: 385kcalCarbohydrates: 62gProtein: 4gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 65mgSodium: 280mgPotassium: 45mgFiber: 1gSugar: 45gVitamin A: 450IUCalcium: 4mgIron: 2.1mg
Keyword Copycat Recipe, Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe, decorated sugar cookies, pink cookies, Sugar Cookies
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe

June 28, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you bite into a crumbl oatmeal cookie recipe and it's so good you actually close your eyes? That's exactly what happened when Emily and I first tried Crumbl's Mom's Recipe cookies last month.

I'm not kidding when I say these are the most loaded, thick, and chewy oatmeal cookies I've ever tasted! Packed with chocolate chips, peanut butter chips, AND toffee bits, they're basically everything good about cookies rolled into one amazing treat.

After spending way too much money at Crumbl (don't tell my husband!), I decided I had to figure out how to make these at home. It took me four tries to get them just right, but trust me - this copycat version is spot on.

The secret? Using the right ratio of oats to flour and not overbaking them. These cookies should look slightly underdone when you pull them out, which was hard for me to accept at first!

If you're looking for more cookie inspiration, you might want to check out my mocha cookie crumble frappuccino recipe, crumbl cornbread cookie recipe, or crumbl peanut butter cookie recipe for more bakery-style treats you can make at home.

Why You Will Like This Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe

baked cookies with chocolate and peanut butter chips

These loaded oatmeal cookies are seriously special, and here's why you're going to love them:

  • Incredibly thick and chewy - Just like the real Crumbl cookies, these are about an inch thick and perfectly soft
  • Triple the mix-ins - Chocolate chips, peanut butter chips, and toffee bits make every bite different
  • Ready in just 25 minutes - From start to finish, including prep time
  • Perfect bakery-style texture - Crispy edges with a soft, chewy center
  • Makes 18 large cookies - Perfect for sharing or freezing extras
  • Uses simple pantry ingredients - No weird stuff you can't find at your grocery store

Ingredients For The Best Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe

Here's everything you need to make these amazing soft oatmeal cookies:

For The Cookie Base:

  • 1 cup unsalted butter, softened
  • 1 cup brown sugar, packed (I use light brown sugar)
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 2 cups + 2 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 ½ cups rolled oats
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¾ teaspoon salt

For The Mix-Ins:

  • ¾ cup semi-sweet chocolate chips
  • ¾ cup peanut butter chips
  • ¾ cup toffee bits (or chopped Heath bars)
  • Flaky sea salt for topping

The key to these chocolate chip oatmeal cookies is using the right type of oats. Make sure you're using old-fashioned rolled oats, not quick oats. Trust me on this one - I learned the hard way when my first batch turned out too dense!

Instructions To Make This Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe

Getting Started

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  2. Cream the butter and sugars in a large bowl using an electric mixer for about 2 minutes. This step is really important for getting that perfect texture!
butter and sugars in glass bowl
egg added to creamed butter and sugar

Mixing The Dough

  1. Add the eggs and vanilla to the butter mixture and mix until well combined. Don't forget to scrape down the sides of the bowl with a spatula.
  2. Combine all dry ingredients in a separate bowl. Add the flour, oats, baking soda, cinnamon, and salt, then mix everything together.
  3. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and mix until just combined. Don't overmix here - that's how you get tough cookies!

Adding The Mix-Ins

  1. Fold in all the chips and toffee bits using a wooden spoon or your hands. I actually prefer using my hands because you can make sure everything is evenly distributed.

Shaping And Baking

  1. Use a ¼ cup measuring cup to portion the crumbl oatmeal cookie recipe dough into balls. These cookies are meant to be big!
  2. Flatten each ball with the palm of your hand until it forms a thick disk. This helps them bake evenly and gives you that signature Crumbl look.
  3. Place 6 cookies per baking sheet - they need space to spread slightly. Sprinkle the tops with flaky sea salt (this is what makes them taste like the real thing!).
cookie dough balls on baking tray
portioned cookie dough on parchment tray

Baking To Perfection

  1. Bake for 9-11 minutes until the edges are set and lightly golden brown. The centers should still look slightly underdone - this is exactly what you want!
  2. Let them cool on the baking sheet for 5-10 minutes before transferring to a wire rack. This cooling time lets them finish cooking and prevents them from falling apart.

The hardest part about this recipe? Waiting for them to cool before eating one! Emily always tries to sneak one while they're still warm (and honestly, I don't blame her).

Storage & Reheating

These chewy oatmeal cookies stay fresh for 3-4 days when stored in an airtight container at room temperature.

I like to put a piece of bread in the container with them - it keeps them extra soft! Just replace the bread slice every couple of days.

For longer storage, you can freeze the baked cookies for up to 3 months. Just thaw them at room temperature when you're ready to eat them.

If you want to make the dough ahead of time, portion it into balls and refrigerate for up to 3 days. You can also freeze the dough balls for up to 3 months and bake them straight from frozen (just add 1-2 extra minutes to the baking time).

Tips For Perfect Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe Success

After making these cookies more times than I can count, here are my best tips:

  • Don't overbake them - Seriously, this is the most important tip. They should look slightly underdone when you take them out.
  • Use room temperature butter - Cold butter won't cream properly with the sugars, and melted butter will make your cookies too flat.
  • Measure your flour correctly - Too much flour makes dry, dense cookies. Spoon it into your measuring cup and level it off.
  • Chill the dough if it's too soft - If your kitchen is warm and the dough feels too sticky, pop it in the fridge for 30 minutes.

Want to switch up the mix-ins? Try using butterscotch chips instead of toffee bits, or add some mini marshmallows for a s'mores vibe. Emily loves when I add dried cranberries and white chocolate chips for a more "grown-up" version.

Frequently Asked Questions About Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe

How Long Do Mom's Recipe Cookies Stay Fresh?

Store these chewy oatmeal cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days. They'll maintain their soft, chewy texture when properly stored. I use a glass container with a tight-fitting lid, and sometimes I throw in a slice of bread to keep them extra soft.

Can I Substitute The Toffee Bits In Mom's Recipe Cookies?

Yes! You can use chopped Heath bars, butterscotch chips, or even mini marshmallows. I've also tried caramel bits, which were incredible. You can omit toffee bits entirely and add more chocolate or peanut butter chips instead.

Why Do My Mom's Recipe Cookies Look Underdone In The Center?

This is exactly what you want! The centers should look slightly underdone after 9-11 minutes. They'll finish cooking on the hot baking sheet and stay perfectly soft and chewy. I made the mistake of overbaking my first batch, and they turned out too crispy.

Can I Make Crumbl Mom's Recipe Cookie Dough Ahead Of Time?

Absolutely! Portion the dough into balls and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze for up to 3 months. If baking from frozen, add 1-2 extra minutes to the baking time. This is perfect for when you want fresh cookies but don't want to make the whole mess again!

Recipes You May Like

If you loved these loaded oatmeal cookies, you'll definitely want to try these other cookie recipes:

  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - Perfect when you just want a few cookies without the temptation of a full batch
  • Cookie Monster Cookies - Fun blue cookies that are perfect for kids (Emily requests these for every birthday party!)
  • Almond Flour Chocolate Chip Cookies - A healthier take that's still incredibly delicious

Conclusion

broken cookie with melted chocolate

This crumbl oatmeal cookie recipe has become one of my most-requested treats! Emily's friends always ask when I'm making "those thick cookies with all the stuff in them" (that's how they describe them, and honestly, it's pretty accurate).

The combination of chocolate chips, peanut butter chips, and toffee bits makes every bite different and exciting. Plus, they're thick enough that one cookie actually feels like a real treat.

Whether you're trying to recreate your Crumbl experience at home or just want to make some seriously good homemade crumbl cookies, this recipe delivers every single time.

Make sure to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it later - you're definitely going to want to make these again!

Pinterest CTA
Mom’s Recipe Crumbl Cookie
Mom’s Recipe Crumbl Cookie recipe

soft cookie with gooey chocolate center

crumbl oatmeal cookie recipe

A soft oatmeal cookie studded with chocolate chips, peanut butter chips, and toffee bits. These chewy cookies are perfect for any occasion and taste just like the famous Crumbl cookies!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 25 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 18 cookies
Calories 450 kcal

Equipment

  • Baking Sheet
  • Electric Mixer
  • Parchment Paper

Ingredients
  

Cookie Dough

  • 1 cup unsalted butter softened
  • 1 cup brown sugar packed
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 2 cups + 2 tablespoons all purpose flour
  • 2 ½ cups rolled oats
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¾ teaspoon salt

Mix-ins

  • ¾ cup semi sweet chocolate chips
  • ¾ cup peanut butter chips
  • ¾ cup toffee bits
  • flaky sea salt for topping

Instructions
 

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper, set aside.
  • Cream butter, brown sugar, and granulated sugar for 2 minutes using an electric mixer.
  • Add the eggs and vanilla and mix to combine. Scrape down the sides of the bowl with a spatula.
  • Add flour, oats, baking soda, cinnamon, and salt and mix to combine. Add chocolate chips, peanut butter chips and toffee bits. Mix to incorporate.
  • Use a ¼ cup to portion the cookie dough into balls.
  • Flatten each ball with the palm of your hand until it's a thick disk. Place 6 per baking sheet. Sprinkle flaky salt over the tops.
  • Bake for 9-11 minutes, the edges should be set and lightly golden brown, the centers will still appear slightly underdone but they will continue to cook on the baking sheet.
  • Remove from the oven and let cool on the baking sheet for 5-10 minutes before transferring to a wire rack to cool completely.

Notes

For the toffee bits, you can buy toffee bits or you can make your own with chopped Heath bars.
Store cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 450kcalCarbohydrates: 61gProtein: 7gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 12gCholesterol: 60mgSodium: 200mgPotassium: 147mgFiber: 3gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 463IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 36mgIron: 3mg
Keyword Chocolate Chip, cookies, Crumbl, crumbl oatmeal cookie recipe, Oatmeal
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Copycat Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe

June 27, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you bite into a crumbl peanut butter cookie recipe at the store and think, "I need this in my life every single day"? That was me three months ago when Emily and I stopped by Crumbl after her soccer practice.

We split one of their classic peanut butter cookies, and I'm not kidding when I say it was gone in about thirty seconds. Emily looked at me and said, "Mom, we need to figure out how to make these at home." Challenge accepted!

After weeks of testing (and probably gaining five pounds in the process), I finally cracked the code. These copycat crumbl cookies are thick, chewy, and have that perfect peanut butter flavor that makes you want to hide the container from everyone else in your house.

If you're looking for more Crumbl-inspired treats, you'll want to check out my Crumbl cornbread cookie recipe and this amazing mocha cookie crumble frappuccino that pairs perfectly with these cookies.

Why You Will Like This Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe

peanut butter cookies stacked on plate with bite

Trust me, once you make these classic peanut butter cookies, you'll never want to buy them from the store again. Here's what makes them so special:

  • Ready in under 20 minutes - Because who has time to wait around when you're craving cookies?
  • Perfectly soft and chewy texture - They stay soft for days (if they last that long)
  • Rich peanut butter flavor - Uses the perfect ratio of creamy peanut butter to butter
  • No chilling required - You can go from craving to eating in record time
  • Freezer-friendly dough - Make a double batch and freeze half for later
  • Kid-approved - Emily gives these a solid 10/10, and she's pretty picky about her cookies

Ingredients For The Best Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookies

The secret to these soft peanut butter cookies is using the right ingredients in the right proportions. Here's what you'll need:

  • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened to room temperature
  • ¾ cup creamy peanut butter (I use Jif or Skippy - avoid the natural stuff for this recipe)
  • ¾ cup light brown sugar, packed
  • ¼ cup granulated sugar, plus 3 tablespoons for rolling
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour

A quick note about the peanut butter - stick with regular creamy peanut butter for these. I learned this the hard way when I tried using natural peanut butter and ended up with flat, oily cookies. Not cute!

How To Make Perfect Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookies

Making these homemade peanut butter cookies is actually pretty straightforward. Here's my step-by-step process:

Getting Started

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or a silicone baking mat.
  • Cream the butter and sugars. Using a stand mixer with the paddle attachment (or a hand mixer), cream together the softened butter, peanut butter, brown sugar, and ¼ cup of granulated sugar for 2-3 minutes until light and fluffy.
  • Add the wet ingredients. Beat in the egg and vanilla extract until everything is well combined.
peanut butter cookie dough in glass bowl
dough ball in sugar bowl on golden tray

Making The Cookie Dough

  • Mix in the dry ingredients. Add the salt, baking soda, and flour to the bowl. Mix just until combined - don't overwork the dough or your cookies will be tough.
  • Portion the dough. Scoop the dough into ¼ cup sized balls. This is key for getting that thick, bakery-style cookie!

The Secret Crumbl Technique

  • Roll in sugar. Roll each dough ball in the remaining 3 tablespoons of granulated sugar. This creates that slightly crispy exterior.
  • Create the classic pattern. Place 6 cookies per baking sheet, giving them room to spread. Using a fork, create that signature criss-cross pattern by pressing down about halfway through each cookie.
cookie dough discs on baking sheet
criss-cross cookies cooling on black wire rack

  • Bake to perfection. Bake for 8-10 minutes. Here's the important part - the centers should look slightly underdone! They'll continue cooking as they cool.
  • Cool properly. Let the cookies cool on the pan for 5-10 minutes before transferring to a wire rack. This prevents them from falling apart.

Storage And Reheating Your Peanut Butter Cookies

These chewy peanut butter cookies stay fresh for quite a while if you store them properly.

Room temperature storage: Keep them in an airtight container for up to 7 days. They'll stay soft and chewy the whole time.

Freezing the dough: This is my favorite trick! Roll the dough into balls, coat in sugar, then flash freeze on a baking sheet until firm. Transfer to a freezer bag and store for up to 3 months.

Baking from frozen: Add just 1 extra minute to the baking time. No need to thaw first!

Reheating: Pop them in the microwave for 10-15 seconds to get that fresh-baked warmth back.

Tips For Making The Best Copycat Crumbl Cookies

After making these cookies about fifty times (I'm not exaggerating), here are my top tips:

  • Don't skip the room temperature butter. Cold butter won't cream properly, and melted butter will make your cookies spread too much.
  • Pack that brown sugar. This adds moisture and chewiness to the cookies.
  • Use a cookie scoop. A ¼ cup cookie scoop makes perfectly uniform cookies every time.
  • Don't overbake. Seriously, they should look slightly underdone when you take them out.

Want to mix things up ? Try adding a handful of mini chocolate chips or chopped peanuts to the dough. Emily loves the chocolate chip version!

Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe FAQ

How Long Do Copycat Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookies Stay Fresh?

These peanut butter cookies stay fresh for up to 7 days when stored in an airtight container at room temperature. They maintain their soft, chewy texture the entire time. I actually think they taste even better the next day!

Can I Use Crunchy Peanut Butter For Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookies?

Yes, you can substitute crunchy peanut butter for creamy if you prefer some texture. Just avoid natural or oily peanut butters as they can affect how the cookies spread and their final texture.

Why Do My Peanut Butter Cookies Look Underdone In The Center?

This is totally normal and exactly what you want! The centers should look slightly underdone after 8-10 minutes of baking. They'll continue cooking and set as they cool on the pan, giving you that perfect chewy texture.

Can I Freeze Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Dough?

Absolutely! Roll the dough into balls, coat in sugar, then flash freeze on a baking sheet until firm. Transfer to a freezer bag for up to 3 months. Bake directly from frozen, adding just 1 extra minute to the baking time.

Recipes You May Like

If you're obsessed with these cookies like we are, you might want to try these other sweet treats:

  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - Perfect when you want just a few cookies without making a huge batch
  • Cookie Monster Cookies - Emily's absolute favorite with chocolate chips, M&Ms, and oats
  • Almond Flour Chocolate Chip Cookies - A slightly healthier option that still tastes amazing

The Bottom Line On This Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe

cookie stack on plate with bite on top cookie

These copycat Crumbl peanut butter cookies have become our go-to weekend baking project. They're simple enough that Emily can help, but impressive enough to bring to potluck dinners.

The best part? They're ready in under 20 minutes from start to finish. No waiting around for dough to chill or complicated techniques to master.

Next time you're craving those expensive bakery cookies, skip the trip and make these instead. Your wallet (and your taste buds) will thank you!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for later - trust me, you'll want to make these again and again.

Pinterest CTA
Crumbl Classic Peanut Butter Cookies
Crumbl Classic Peanut Butter Cookies recipe

classic peanut butter cookies with bite on top

Copycat Crumbl Classic Peanut Butter Cookies

These Classic Peanut Butter Cookies are super soft, chewy and have a delicious peanut butter flavor. They are the best peanut butter cookies ever!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 8 minutes mins
Total Time 18 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 10 cookies
Calories 355 kcal

Equipment

  • Baking Sheet
  • pre-cut parchment paper

Ingredients
  

  • ½ cup unsalted butter softened to room temperature
  • ¾ cup creamy peanut butter
  • ¾ cup light brown sugar packed
  • ¼ cup granulated sugar plus 3 tablespoons for rolling
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 ½ cups all purpose flour

Instructions
 

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line baking sheet with parchment paper or a baking mat.
  • Using a stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, or a hand mixer, cream butter, peanut butter, brown sugar, and ¼ cup of granulated sugar for 2-3 minutes. Add egg and vanilla and mix again until well combined.
  • Add the salt, baking soda, and flour and mix until combined.
  • Portion into ¼ cup sized balls and roll in the granulated sugar. Place 6 per baking sheet. Using a forks' tines, create a criss cross pattern in the dough, pressing down about halfway.
  • Bake for 8-10 minutes. The centers will look slightly underdone but will set as they cool.
  • Remove from oven and let cookies cool on pan for 5-10 minutes, then transfer to wire rack to cool completely.
  • Serve at room temperature or warm.

Notes

You can use crunchy peanut butter if you'd like. I don't recommend natural or oily peanut butter.
Store the cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 7 days.
To freeze the dough, I would recommend rolling the dough into balls, rolling them in the sugar, and then flash freezing on a baking sheet until firm. Transfer the frozen dough balls to a Ziplock bag and store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Remove and bake from frozen (adding about 1 minute to the bake time).

Nutrition

Calories: 355kcalCarbohydrates: 39gProtein: 8gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 43mgSodium: 270mgPotassium: 179mgFiber: 2gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 311IUCalcium: 31mgIron: 1mg
Keyword cookies, Crumbl, Peanut Butter, Peanut Butter Cookies
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

The Best Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Recipe

June 27, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that moment when you bite into something so good you actually stop talking mid-sentence? That's exactly what happened to me the first time I tried Crumbl's crumbl cornbread cookie recipe at their store last month!

Emily and I were doing our usual Saturday shopping run when we spotted that bright pink box calling our name. One bite of their cornbread cookie and I was absolutely hooked on the sweet, buttery goodness with that incredible honey butter frosting.

But here's the thing - spending $4 per cookie every time we get a sweet tooth just wasn't going to work for this family's budget (or my waistline, honestly!). So I decided to crack the code and make my own version at home.

After three attempts and way too many late-night kitchen experiments, I finally nailed this crumbl cornbread cookie recipe that tastes just like the original. The secret? That perfect balance of cornmeal texture, real honey sweetness, and the fluffiest butter frosting you've ever tasted.

Speaking of sweet treats that remind me of coffee shop favorites, you might also love my mocha cookie crumble frappuccino recipe - it's another copycat that'll save you money and tastes amazing!

Why You Will Like This Cornbread Cookie Recipe

Frosted cookies with honey drizzle and honey dipper

Trust me, these cornbread cookies are going to become your new go-to treat! Here's why I'm absolutely obsessed with them:

  • Super easy to make - No fancy techniques or equipment needed, just basic baking skills
  • Ready in under an hour - From start to finish, including prep and baking time
  • That signature cornmeal texture - Gives these cookies their unique, slightly grainy bite that's so addictive
  • Rich honey butter frosting - Creamy, sweet, and absolutely perfect on top
  • Way cheaper than buying - Making 18 cookies at home costs less than buying 4 from the store
  • Freezer-friendly - Make a big batch and save some for later (if they last that long!)

Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Ingredients You'll Need

Here's everything you need to make these amazing cornbread cookies. I always have most of these pantry staples on hand, which makes this recipe even more convenient!

For The Cookies:

  • ¾ cup unsalted butter, room temperature
  • ¼ cup shortening
  • ½ cup honey, divided
  • 1 cup light brown sugar, packed
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs, room temperature
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ teaspoon butter extract
  • 2½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup cornmeal
  • ¼ cup cornstarch
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt

For The Honey Butter Frosting:

  • ½ cup unsalted butter, room temperature
  • ¼ cup honey
  • 1½ cups powdered sugar
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 large pinch salt
  • 1 tablespoon heavy cream

How To Make The Perfect Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Recipe

Don't worry - this recipe is way easier than it looks! I'll walk you through each step so your cornbread cookies turn out absolutely perfect.

Getting Started

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F and line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
  2. In a large bowl or stand mixer, beat the butter, shortening, ¼ cup of honey, brown sugar, and granulated sugar together.
  3. Beat this mixture for 4-5 minutes on high speed until it's light and fluffy. This step is crucial for getting that perfect cookie texture!
Mixing bowl with butter sugar and shortening
Bowl with cornmeal and flour

Making The Cookie Dough

  1. Add the eggs and both extracts to your butter mixture and beat until everything's well combined.
  2. Make sure to scrape down the sides and bottom of the bowl periodically - I learned this the hard way when I found unmixed butter chunks in my first batch!
  3. In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, cornmeal, cornstarch, baking powder, and salt.
  4. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients in three separate additions, mixing until just combined after each addition.

Baking Your Cornbread Cookies

  1. Using a large cookie scoop, measure about ⅓ cup of dough onto your prepared baking sheets.
  2. Place only six dough balls on each sheet - these cookies spread quite a bit, and I learned that lesson when my first batch turned into one giant cookie!
  3. Bake for 13-15 minutes until the edges are just set. The centers will look slightly underbaked, but they'll continue cooking as they cool.
  4. If you want flatter cookies like Crumbl's, gently press the domed tops with the flat bottom of a glass right after they come out of the oven.
Cornbread cookie dough in metal bowl
Raw cookie dough balls on baking sheet

Adding The Honey Glaze

  1. Let the cookies cool on the baking sheet for 4-5 minutes before transferring to a cooling rack.
  2. Heat the remaining ¼ cup of honey in the microwave for 15-20 seconds until it's melted and easy to brush.
  3. Use a pastry brush to coat the tops of the warm cookies with that gorgeous honey glaze.

Making The Honey Butter Frosting

  1. Beat the butter and honey together in a large bowl until fluffy.
  2. Add the powdered sugar, vanilla, salt, and cream, then beat until light and fluffy.
  3. If your frosting seems too thick, add cream one teaspoon at a time until you get the perfect consistency.
  4. Once your cookies are completely cool, add a generous scoop of frosting on top of each cookie.
  5. Finish with a drizzle of honey and get ready for pure cookie heaven!
Frosting being spread on cornbread cookies
Cornbread cookies topped with frosting dollops

Storage And Reheating Your Cornbread Cookies

These cornbread cookies stay fresh for up to 5 days when stored in an airtight container at room temperature.

Since they have that creamy frosting, I actually prefer keeping them in the refrigerator - especially during warmer months. They taste amazing cold too!

For longer storage, you can freeze the unfrosted cookies for up to 3 months. Just make the frosting fresh when you're ready to serve them.

If you want to freeze the completed cookies, place them on a baking sheet first, freeze until solid, then transfer to freezer bags. This prevents the frosting from getting smooshed!

My Best Tips For Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Success

Frosted cookies with honey drizzle

After making these cookies way too many times (not complaining!), I've picked up some tricks that make all the difference:

Room temperature ingredients are key! I can't stress this enough - cold eggs and butter will give you dense, heavy cookies instead of light and fluffy ones.

Don't skip the cornstarch - it helps prevent the cookies from spreading too much and gives them that perfect chewy texture.

Chill your dough if it's too soft - if your kitchen is warm or your dough feels sticky, pop it in the fridge for 30 minutes before scooping.

The honey glaze while warm is magic - brushing it on when the cookies are still slightly warm helps it soak in and creates that signature sticky-sweet top.

Can you make these without the frosting? Absolutely! They're delicious on their own, but honestly, that honey butter frosting is what makes these cookies taste exactly like Crumbl's version.

What if you don't have butter extract? You can skip it, but it really does add that rich, bakery-style flavor that makes these cookies special.

Cornbread Cookie Recipe Frequently Asked Questions

What do cornbread cookies taste like?

Cornbread cookies have a sweet, buttery flavor with a slightly grainy texture from the cornmeal. They're softer than traditional cornbread with a cookie-like sweetness, topped with rich honey butter frosting.

How long do cornbread cookies stay fresh?

Store cornbread cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5 days, or freeze for up to 3 months. Keep frosted cookies refrigerated for best results.

Can I substitute the cornmeal in cornbread cookies?

You can replace cornmeal with equal amounts of fine polenta or add extra all-purpose flour, but you'll lose the signature texture and flavor that makes these cookies unique.

Why are my cornbread cookies spreading too much?

Make sure your butter is room temperature (not melted), chill the dough for 30 minutes before baking, and don't skip the cornstarch which helps maintain structure.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving these cornbread cookies, you'll definitely want to try these other amazing cookie recipes:

  • Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies - Another spot-on Crumbl copycat that tastes just like the original
  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - Perfect when you want fresh cookies without making dozens
  • Cookie Monster Cookies - Fun, colorful cookies that kids absolutely love

Final Thoughts On This Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Recipe

Cornbread cookies with swirled frosting on parchment

I can't believe how close these cornbread cookies taste to the original Crumbl version! The combination of that slightly sweet cornmeal base with the rich honey butter frosting is just perfection.

Emily now asks me to make these at least twice a month, and honestly, I don't mind one bit. They're so much more affordable than buying them from the store, and I love knowing exactly what goes into them.

The best part? Watching people's faces when they take that first bite and realize these homemade cookies taste just as good as the expensive bakery version. It happens every single time!

Give this crumbl cornbread cookie recipe a try and let me know what you think. I have a feeling these are going to become a regular favorite in your house too!

Happy baking!

Pinterest CTA
Cornbread Cookies (Crumbl Copycat)
Cornbread Cookies (Crumbl Copycat) recipe

Frosted cornbread cookies with honey drizzle and honey dipper

Crumbl Cornbread Cookies

Sweet and buttery cornbread cookies with honey butter frosting that taste just like the famous Crumbl cookies! These soft, chewy cookies have that perfect cornmeal texture and are topped with the most amazing honey butter frosting.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 25 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Cookies, Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 18 cookies
Calories 403 kcal

Equipment

  • Stand Mixer or Large Bowl
  • Baking Sheets
  • Large Cookie Scoop
  • Pastry Brush

Ingredients
  

Cookies

  • ¾ cup unsalted butter room temperature
  • ¼ cup shortening
  • ½ cup honey divided
  • 1 cup light brown sugar packed
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ teaspoon butter extract
  • 2 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup cornmeal
  • ¼ cup cornstarch
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Honey Butter Frosting

  • ½ cup unsalted butter room temperature
  • ¼ cup honey
  • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 pinch salt large pinch
  • 1 tablespoon heavy cream

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F and line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
  • In a large bowl or stand mixer, beat the butter, shortening, ¼ cup of honey, brown sugar, and granulated sugar together.
  • Beat this mixture for 4-5 minutes on high speed until it's light and fluffy. This step is crucial for getting that perfect cookie texture!
  • Add the eggs and both extracts to your butter mixture and beat until everything's well combined.
  • Make sure to scrape down the sides and bottom of the bowl periodically to ensure everything is evenly incorporated.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, cornmeal, cornstarch, baking powder, and salt.
  • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients in three separate additions, mixing until just combined after each addition.
  • Using a large cookie scoop, measure about ⅓ cup of dough onto your prepared baking sheets.
  • Place only six dough balls on each sheet - these cookies spread quite a bit!
  • Bake for 13-15 minutes until the edges are just set. The centers will look slightly underbaked, but they'll continue cooking as they cool.
  • If you want flatter cookies like Crumbl's, gently press the domed tops with the flat bottom of a glass right after they come out of the oven.
  • Let the cookies cool on the baking sheet for 4-5 minutes before transferring to a cooling rack.
  • Heat the remaining ¼ cup of honey in the microwave for 15-20 seconds until it's melted and easy to brush.
  • Use a pastry brush to coat the tops of the warm cookies with that gorgeous honey glaze.
  • Beat the butter and honey together in a large bowl until fluffy.
  • Add the powdered sugar, vanilla, salt, and cream, then beat until light and fluffy.
  • If your frosting seems too thick, add cream one teaspoon at a time until you get the perfect consistency.
  • Once your cookies are completely cool, add a generous scoop of frosting on top of each cookie.
  • Finish with a drizzle of honey and get ready for pure cookie heaven!

Notes

Room temperature ingredients are key for the best texture! Don't skip the cornstarch - it helps prevent spreading. These cookies can be stored in an airtight container for up to 5 days, or frozen for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 61gProtein: 3gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 53mgSodium: 144mgPotassium: 105mgFiber: 1gSugar: 39gVitamin A: 433IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 31mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Cookie Crumble, cookies, Crumbl Cornbread Cookies, crumble recipes
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe

June 27, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know those days when you're craving something sweet, caffeinated, and absolutely indulgent? That's exactly what happened to me last Tuesday when I found myself staring at my coffee maker, thinking it just wasn't going to cut it.I needed something more exciting - something that would make my afternoon feel special. That's when I remembered that mocha cookie crumble frappuccino recipe I'd been wanting to try!

I'll be honest - I was skeptical about making frappuccinos at home. How could anything I whip up compete with the coffee shop version? But after one sip of this homemade creation, I was completely won over.

Emily walked into the kitchen, took one look at my drink, and said, "Mom, that looks like dessert!" She wasn't wrong.

What makes this mocha cookie crumble frappuccino so special is how it captures that perfect balance of rich coffee, chocolate indulgence, and cookie crunch that makes your taste buds do a happy dance. Plus, you probably already have most of these ingredients in your kitchen right now.

Speaking of treats that feel like dessert, my cottage cheese chocolate mousse has that same "wait, this is actually good for me?" vibe that makes you feel a little less guilty about the indulgence.

Why This Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Will Become Your Favorite

layered frappuccino topped with whipped cream and crushed Oreos

Let me tell you exactly why this coffee drink is about to become your new obsession:

  • Ready in 5 minutes - Seriously! From start to finish, you'll be sipping this beauty in less time than it takes to drive to the coffee shop
  • Costs way less - I calculated it out, and making this homemade frappuccino at home saves about $4 per drink compared to buying it out
  • Rich mocha flavor - The combination of strong coffee and chocolate syrup creates this deep, satisfying taste that hits all the right notes
  • Perfect cookie crunch - Those Oreo pieces add texture and sweetness that makes every sip interesting
  • Customizable sweetness - You control exactly how much chocolate goes in, so it's perfect every time
  • Thick and creamy texture - The blended ice creates that signature frappuccino consistency we all love

What You Need For This Amazing Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe

Here's what you'll need to make this amazing iced coffee drink:

  • 1 cup strong brewed coffee (cooled)
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons chocolate syrup
  • 2 tablespoons chocolate chips
  • 4 Oreo cookies
  • 1-2 cups ice
  • Whipped cream for topping

The key to this mocha frappuccino recipe is using strong coffee - don't go weak here! I learned this the hard way when my first attempt tasted more like chocolate milk than a proper frappuccino.

Now I make my coffee extra strong and let it cool completely before blending.

How To Make The Perfect Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe

  • Prep Your Cookies - Start by crushing your Oreo cookies. I like to put them in a sealed plastic bag and give them a few good whacks with a rolling pin. Don't pulverize them completely - you want some chunky pieces for texture! Set aside about a tablespoon of the crushed cookies for your topping.
crushed Oreos on cutting board with spatula
chocolate chips poured into blender with coffee

  • Blend The Base - Add your cooled coffee, milk, chocolate syrup, chocolate chips, and most of the crushed Oreos to your blender. The chocolate chips might seem like overkill, but trust me - they add extra richness that makes this taste like a premium coffee shop drink. Blend everything until it's smooth and well combined. This usually takes about 30 seconds on high speed.
  • Add Ice And Blend Again - Here's where the magic happens! Add your ice to the blender and blend until you reach your preferred consistency. Want it thicker? Add more ice. Prefer it a bit thinner? Use less ice. I usually start with 1 cup and add more as needed. The texture should be thick enough to hold its shape but still drinkable through a straw.
  • Finish And Serve - Pour your mocha cookie crumble frappuccino into a tall glass. Top generously with whipped cream - don't be shy here! Sprinkle those reserved crushed Oreos on top and drizzle with a little extra chocolate syrup. Serve immediately while it's nice and cold. This homemade frappuccino is best enjoyed fresh!

Storage And Reheating Your Homemade Frappuccino

Let's be real - this iced coffee drink is meant to be enjoyed immediately. But life happens, and sometimes you need to save some for later!

If you absolutely must store it, keep it in the refrigerator for no more than 4 hours. The texture will separate and become less appealing over time. Give it a good stir before drinking.

I don't recommend freezing this mocha frappuccino - it just doesn't work well with the milk and will become icy and unpleasant.

The best approach? Make it fresh when you want it. It only takes 5 minutes, so there's really no need to prep ahead!

Creative Ways To Customize Your Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe

chocolate frappuccino with whipped cream and green straw

Want to mix things up? Here are some fun ways to customize your blended coffee drink:

  • Make it decaf - Use decaffeinated coffee if you're watching your caffeine intake. The taste stays exactly the same!
  • Try different cookies - Chocolate sandwich cookies, chocolate wafers, or even chocolate graham crackers work beautifully
  • Add peanut butter - A tablespoon of peanut butter turns this into a Reese's-inspired treat
  • Make it lighter - Use skim milk and sugar-free chocolate syrup to cut calories
  • Extra chocolatey - Add a tablespoon of cocoa powder for deeper chocolate flavor
  • Seasonal twist - Add a pinch of cinnamon or peppermint extract for holiday vibes

Have you ever tried making frappuccinos with different flavor combinations? I'm always experimenting with new ideas, and this base recipe is perfect for getting creative!

Your Questions About This Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe Answered

Can I make this frappuccino without a blender?

No, a blender is essential to properly crush the ice and create the smooth, frappuccino texture.

Can I substitute the Oreo cookies with other cookies?

Yes! Chocolate sandwich cookies, chocolate wafers, or even chocolate graham crackers work great as substitutes.

How can I make this recipe lower in calories?

Use skim milk instead of whole milk, sugar-free chocolate syrup, and reduce the whipped cream topping.

Can I make this with decaf coffee?

Absolutely! Decaf coffee works perfectly and won't affect the taste or texture of the frappuccino.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this mocha cookie crumble frappuccino, you might also enjoy these other treats:

  • Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse - Another chocolate fix that's surprisingly good for you
  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - Perfect for when you want fresh cookies but don't need dozens
  • Double Chocolate Chip Banana Bread - Because sometimes you need chocolate for breakfast too

Why This Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino Recipe Changed My Coffee Game

frappuccino with whipped cream and cookie crumbles on marble background

This mocha cookie crumble frappuccino recipe has honestly changed my afternoon coffee game. It's become my go-to treat when I need a pick-me-up or want to feel a little fancy without leaving the house.

The best part? You can make it exactly how you like it. Want it sweeter? Add more chocolate syrup. Prefer it less sweet? Cut back on the cookies.

It's completely customizable, which is something you just can't get at the coffee shop.

Emily has already claimed this as "her" drink (even though I'm the one making it!), and I have a feeling your family will love it just as much. Give it a try this week - I promise it'll become a regular in your recipe rotation.

So grab your blender and get ready to make the most satisfying homemade frappuccino you've ever tasted. Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it again later!

Pinterest CTA
Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino
Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino recipe

chocolate frappuccino with whipped cream and green straw

Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino

Skip the coffee shop and make this incredible mocha cookie crumble frappuccino at home in just 5 minutes! Rich coffee, chocolate syrup, and crushed Oreos create the perfect indulgent treat that tastes even better than the original.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 5 minutes mins
Course Beverage
Cuisine American
Servings 1 serving
Calories 593 kcal

Equipment

  • Blender
  • Tall Glass

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup strong brewed coffee cooled
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons chocolate syrup
  • 2 tablespoons chocolate chips
  • 4 Oreo cookies
  • 1-2 cups ice
  • whipped cream for topping

Instructions
 

  • Prep Your Cookies - Start by crushing your Oreo cookies. I like to put them in a sealed plastic bag and give them a few good whacks with a rolling pin. Don't pulverize them completely - you want some chunky pieces for texture! Set aside about a tablespoon of the crushed cookies for your topping.
  • Blend The Base - Add your cooled coffee, milk, chocolate syrup, chocolate chips, and most of the crushed Oreos to your blender. The chocolate chips might seem like overkill, but trust me - they add extra richness that makes this taste like a premium coffee shop drink. Blend everything until it's smooth and well combined. This usually takes about 30 seconds on high speed.
  • Add Ice And Blend Again - Here's where the magic happens! Add your ice to the blender and blend until you reach your preferred consistency. Want it thicker? Add more ice. Prefer it a bit thinner? Use less ice. I usually start with 1 cup and add more as needed. The texture should be thick enough to hold its shape but still drinkable through a straw.
  • Finish And Serve - Pour your mocha cookie crumble frappuccino into a tall glass. Top generously with whipped cream - don't be shy here! Sprinkle those reserved crushed Oreos on top and drizzle with a little extra chocolate syrup. Serve immediately while it's nice and cold. This homemade frappuccino is best enjoyed fresh!

Notes

The key to this recipe is using strong coffee - don't go weak here! Make your coffee extra strong and let it cool completely before blending. You can customize this drink by using different cookies, adding peanut butter, or making it lighter with skim milk and sugar-free chocolate syrup.

Nutrition

Calories: 593kcalCarbohydrates: 82gProtein: 9gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 11gCholesterol: 16mgSodium: 281mgPotassium: 603mgFiber: 4gSugar: 56gVitamin A: 213IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 199mgIron: 4mg
Keyword Cookie Crumble Frappuccino, cookies, Frappuccino, Mocha Cookie Crumble Frappuccino
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

June 23, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know that feeling when you bite into a Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies and suddenly understand why people wait in those crazy long lines? I get it now. After spending way too much money on the real deal (don't tell my husband how much I spent last month!), I decided it was time to crack the code and make these beauties at home.

Emily was actually the one who got me obsessed with these cookies. She came home from a friend's birthday party talking non-stop about these "giant cookies with the swirly chocolate stuff on top." I thought she was just being dramatic, but then I tried one myself and wow – these aren't just cookies, they're like little cakes disguised as cookies!

The best part about making these at home? You get twelve massive cookies for the price of about three from the store. Plus, you can control the sweetness and make them exactly how your family likes them. Trust me, once you master this recipe, you'll never need to wait in that Crumbl line again.

If you're looking for more amazing cookie recipes, you'll definitely want to check out my small batch chocolate chip cookies – they're perfect when you want something sweet but don't need a dozen giant cookies tempting you all week!

Why You Will Like This Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies Recipe

Frosted cookies on white plate with gray napkin

  • Takes just 30 minutes from start to finish (not counting cooling time)
  • Tastes exactly like the original – seriously, Emily couldn't tell the difference
  • Much cheaper than buying from the store
  • Perfect for special occasions or when you want to impress someone
  • Rich chocolate ganache frosting that's surprisingly easy to make
  • Can be frozen for up to 3 months if you want to make ahead

Ingredients For The Best Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

For the cookies:

  • 4 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 tablespoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter (room temperature)
  • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 1 teaspoon cake batter extract (this is the secret!)
  • ½ teaspoon almond extract
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

For the chocolate ganache frosting:

  • 16 ounces semi-sweet chocolate baking bars, finely chopped
  • 14 ounces heavy cream
  • ¼ cup light corn syrup
  • Chocolate sprinkles (optional but recommended)

The cake batter extract is what gives these cookies that distinctive Crumbl taste. I couldn't find it at my regular grocery store, so I ordered it online. Don't skip it – it makes all the difference!

How To Make Perfect Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F and line your sheet trays with parchment paper. You'll need at least two large baking sheets since these cookies are HUGE.
  2. In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, and salt. Set this aside – we'll need it in a minute.
  3. Using a stand mixer with the paddle attachment, cream the butter and sugar for about 3 minutes. You want it light and fluffy. This step is super important for getting that perfect texture!
  4. Add the eggs and egg yolks one at a time, mixing each one completely before adding the next. I learned this the hard way when I tried to speed things up and ended up with lumpy cookie dough.
Mixing bowl with flour on yellow dough
Rolled cookie dough balls on parchment

  1. Mix in all three extracts – the cake batter, almond, and vanilla. The smell at this point is incredible!
  2. Add the flour mixture in three separate batches, mixing each batch completely before adding the next. This prevents flour from flying everywhere (trust me on this one). Scrape down the sides of the bowl as needed.
  3. Portion the dough into 12 even pieces – each should be just over 4 ounces. I use a kitchen scale for this because these need to be uniform.
  4. Roll each portion into a smooth ball, then place them on your prepared baking sheets about 6 inches apart. They spread A LOT, so you'll probably need to bake them in two batches.
  5. Gently press each ball down to flatten it into a large circle. Don't make them too thin – we want them thick and cake-like.
  6. Bake for 13-15 minutes until they're lightly golden brown and look dry in the center. Don't overbake them or they'll be tough instead of soft and chewy.
  7. Let them cool completely on the baking sheets before frosting. This is crucial – if they're even slightly warm, the frosting will melt everywhere.

The dough will be pretty thick – that's exactly what we want for these crumbl chocolate cupcake cookies.

Flattened yellow cookie dough before baking
Whisk in bowl of glossy chocolate ganache

Making The Chocolate Ganache Frosting

While the cookies are cooling, let's make that gorgeous frosting.

  1. Place your chopped chocolate in a large heat-proof bowl.
  2. In a small saucepan, combine the heavy cream and corn syrup. Heat this mixture until it just starts to simmer, stirring occasionally.
  3. As soon as it begins to simmer, pour it over the chocolate. Let it sit for 5 minutes without touching it – this gives the heat time to melt the chocolate properly.
  4. After 5 minutes, whisk everything together until smooth and glossy. It'll take a few minutes of whisking to get it completely smooth, but don't give up!
  5. Let the ganache cool to room temperature until it's thick enough to pipe but still spreadable. I usually whisk it every few minutes to help it cool faster.
Frosted cookies cooling on black wire rack
Chocolate swirl cookies on a gray plate

If you're in a hurry, you can put it in the fridge and whisk it every few minutes, but be careful not to let it get too cold and hard.

Assembling Your Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

  1. Once your ganache is the right consistency, transfer it to a pastry bag fitted with an open star tip. If you don't have a pastry bag, a large zip-top bag with the corner cut off works too.
  2. Pipe rosettes on top of each cookie, but don't go all the way to the edges. You want to see some of the cookie around the outside – that's part of the classic Crumbl look.
  3. Immediately add chocolate sprinkles while the frosting is still soft. Don't wait too long or they won't stick!

Storage And Reheating Tips For Crumbl Style Cookies

These copycat crumbl cookies stay fresh for 3-4 days at room temperature in an airtight container. The frosting holds up really well, which surprised me.

You can also refrigerate them for up to a week, but let them come to room temperature before serving. Cold cookies just don't taste as good!

For longer storage, freeze the unfrosted cookies for up to 3 months. Wrap them individually in plastic wrap, then store in a freezer bag. Thaw completely before frosting.

I don't recommend freezing the frosted cookies because the ganache can get a bit weird when thawed.

Frosted cookies on a round white plate

Tips And Variations For The Best Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

Want to mix things up? Here are some variations I've tried:

  • Add mini chocolate chips to the cookie dough for extra chocolate goodness
  • Try different extracts – lemon extract gives them a subtle citrus note
  • Make them smaller if you want regular-sized cookies (bake for 10-12 minutes instead)
  • Skip the corn syrup in the ganache and add an extra ¼ cup heavy cream instead

The biggest tip I can give you? Don't rush the cooling process. I know it's tempting to frost them while they're still warm, but patience really pays off here.

Also, invest in a kitchen scale if you don't have one. These cookies need to be the same size to bake evenly, and eyeballing 4+ ounces of dough is harder than you think!

Frequently Asked Questions About Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

Are Crumbl cookies really 800 calories?

Yes, Crumbl cookies typically range from 600-900 calories each due to their large size and rich ingredients. This copycat recipe contains 815 calories per cookie.

How long are Crumbl cookies good for?

Crumbl cookies stay fresh for 3-4 days at room temperature in an airtight container, or up to 1 week refrigerated. These copycat cookies follow the same storage guidelines.

What's on top of Crumbl Cookies?

Crumbl cookies are topped with various frostings, glazes, or toppings. The chocolate cupcake variety features rich chocolate ganache frosting and chocolate sprinkles, just like this copycat recipe.

Does Crumbl need to be refrigerated?

Crumbl cookies don't require refrigeration but can be stored in the fridge to extend freshness. However, let them come to room temperature before serving for the best texture and flavor.

Chocolate swirl cookies stacked on round plate

Recipes You May Like

  • Cookie Monster Cookies – These fun, colorful cookies are perfect when you want something playful and delicious
  • Almond Flour Chocolate Chip Cookies – A gluten-free option that's just as satisfying as traditional cookies
  • Lemon Blueberry Cookies – For when you want something fruity and bright instead of rich chocolate

Final Thoughts On These Amazing Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

I've made these Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies at least a dozen times now, and they get better every time. The combination of that soft, cake-like cookie with the rich chocolate ganache is just perfection.

Emily's friends are always asking when I'm making them again, and honestly, I love having this recipe in my back pocket for special occasions. They look so impressive but are actually pretty straightforward to make.

Don't let the long ingredient list scare you – most of it is probably already in your pantry. And that ganache? It sounds fancy, but it's really just melted chocolate and cream. Anyone can do it!

Give these a try and let me know what you think. I bet you'll be just as obsessed as we are. Save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it again when that Crumbl cookie craving hits!

Pinterest CTA
Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies
Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies recipe
Stack of bitten frosted cookies on stone surface

Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies

These incredible Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies taste exactly like the bakery version! Soft, cake-like cookies topped with rich chocolate ganache frosting. Perfect for special occasions or when you're craving those famous Crumbl cookies at home.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Cooling Time 1 hour hr
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 12 cookies
Calories 815 kcal

Equipment

  • Stand mixer with paddle attachment
  • Large baking sheets
  • Parchment Paper
  • Kitchen scale (recommended)
  • Pastry bag with star tip
  • Heat-proof bowl
  • Small saucepan

Ingredients
  

For the Cookies

  • 4.5 cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 tablespoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1.5 cups unsalted butter room temperature
  • 1.5 cups granulated sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 1 teaspoon cake batter extract
  • 0.5 teaspoon almond extract
  • 0.5 teaspoon vanilla extract

For the Chocolate Ganache Frosting

  • 16 ounces semi-sweet chocolate baking bars finely chopped
  • 14 ounces heavy cream
  • 0.25 cup light corn syrup
  • chocolate sprinkles optional

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line sheet trays with parchment paper, set aside.
  • In a large bowl stir together the flour, baking powder, and salt, set aside.
  • In the body of a stand mixer with the paddle attachment, cream the butter with the sugar for 3 minutes until light and fluffy.
  • Add the eggs and egg yolks one at a time, mixing the last one fully before adding the next.
  • Add the cake batter extract, almond extract, and vanilla extract, mix it in.
  • In three batches, add the flour mixture, making sure it mixes in all the way before adding the next batch. Scrape down the sides as needed.
  • Portion the cookie dough into 12 even-sized portions, just over 4 ounces each. Roll them into a smooth ball and place them on the sheet trays, 6 inches apart.
  • Gently press down on the cookie dough balls and flatten them out into a large flat circle.
  • Bake for 13-15 minutes until lightly golden brown and they appear dry in the center of the cookies.
  • Let the cookies cool completely on the sheet trays.
  • While the cookies are cooling, make the frosting by placing the chopped chocolate into a large heat-proof bowl.
  • Add the heavy cream and corn syrup to a small saucepan and bring it to a simmer, stirring occasionally. As soon as it starts to simmer, pour it over the chocolate.
  • Let it sit for 5 minutes then whisk it all together until smooth, it will take a while to fully come together.
  • Let this come to room temperature until solid but pipeable. To speed up, place it in the refrigerator and whisk every few minutes until the right consistency.
  • Place the pipeable ganache into a pastry bag with an open star tip. Pipe rosettes on top of each cookie, but do not go all the way to the edge. Immediately add chocolate sprinkles and serve.

Notes

These cookies can be doubled if you'd like. If you do not want to add the corn syrup to the chocolate, add another ¼ cup heavy cream. You can top with other toppings if you'd like or leave ungarnished. These can be frozen for up to 3 months - wrap unfrosted cookies individually in plastic wrap.

Nutrition

Calories: 815kcalCarbohydrates: 79gProtein: 12gFat: 57gSaturated Fat: 35gCholesterol: 120mgSodium: 233mgPotassium: 400mgFiber: 8gSugar: 32gVitamin A: 15IUCalcium: 8mgIron: 6.2mg
Keyword Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies, Copycat Recipe, Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies, Crumbl Cookies
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl Recipe

June 9, 2025 by Sarah 2 Comments

Let me tell you about the night Emily came home from her friend's house raving about this amazing street corn chicken rice bowl she had at a food truck downtown. She was going on and on about how the creamy corn mixed with spicy chicken was "literally the best thing ever" (her words, not mine!).

I knew I had to recreate it at home, and after three attempts and some serious trial and error, I finally nailed it. This bowl combines everything I love about Mexican street food - that smoky, creamy, tangy goodness - with the comfort of a hearty rice bowl that actually fills you up.

The best part? It takes less than an hour from start to finish, and most of that time is just marinating the chicken while you prep everything else. Speaking of easy weeknight dinners, if you're looking for more quick meal ideas, my creamy chipotle chicken recipe is another family favorite that pairs perfectly with rice.

Why You'll Love This Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl

  • Ready in under an hour - Perfect for busy weeknights when you want something special without the stress
  • One-pan chicken cooking - Less cleanup means more time with your family (or more time scrolling TikTok, no judgment here)
  • Mexican street food flavors - All that smoky, creamy, tangy goodness you crave from elotes, but in a filling meal
  • Customizable toppings - Everyone can build their bowl exactly how they like it (peace in the family at last!)
  • Make-ahead friendly - The corn topping actually gets better after sitting for a few hours
  • Budget-friendly protein - Chicken thighs are way cheaper than chicken breasts and taste so much better
Chicken corn rice bowl with cilantro and tortilla chips

Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl Ingredients

For the Chicken:

  • 4 chicken thighs, boneless and skinless
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice
  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon cumin powder
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder (or 2 minced garlic cloves)
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Street Corn Topping:

  • 1 cup sweet corn kernels, grilled if possible (frozen works great too)
  • ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
  • 1 cup sour cream (save half to drizzle on top)
  • 2 tablespoon mayonnaise
  • ½ cup cotija cheese, crumbled (plus extra for garnish)
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • 1 lime, cut into wedges

Assembly:

  • 3 cups cooked rice
  • Fresh cilantro for garnish

How To Make Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl

  1. Season and marinate the chicken: Start by making your marinade in a shallow dish or bowl. Mix together the lime juice, avocado oil, chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, salt, and pepper until it's well combined. Add your chicken thighs to the marinade and make sure they're completely coated. I like to massage the marinade into the chicken with my hands (don't forget to wash them after!). Let the chicken marinate for at least 15 minutes, but 30 minutes is even better if you have the time. I usually start this first, then prep everything else while it's sitting.
  2. Cook the chicken to perfection: Heat your skillet over medium-high heat. Don't add oil since the chicken already has some from the marinade. When the pan is hot, add the chicken thighs. You should hear a nice sizzle when they hit the pan - that's what we want! Cook for 8-10 minutes on the first side without moving them around. This gives you that beautiful golden crust that adds so much flavor. Flip and cook for another 8-10 minutes until the internal temperature reaches 165°F. Remove from heat and let the chicken rest for about 5 minutes before slicing.
Raw chicken thighs marinating in garlic soy sauce

  1. Make the street corn topping: While the chicken is resting, make your street corn mixture. If you're using frozen corn, sauté it in a hot skillet for 3-4 minutes until it gets some color. Fresh corn that's been grilled is even better if you have it! In a mixing bowl, combine the corn, thinly sliced red onion, half the sour cream, mayonnaise, half the cotija cheese, and chili powder. Season with salt, pepper, and a squeeze of lime juice. Taste and adjust - you want it tangy, creamy, and just a little spicy.
  2. Prepare the rice base: If your rice is leftover from yesterday (like mine usually is), reheat it with a splash of water in the microwave for about 2 minutes. This keeps it from getting dry and sad. Fresh rice works too, obviously! I just always seem to have leftover rice hanging around.
Corn kernels with spices cheese mayo in mixing bowl

  1. Assemble your bowl: This is where it gets fun and everyone can customize their own bowl. Start with a generous scoop of warm rice in each bowl. Slice your rested chicken and arrange it on top of the rice. Don't forget to drizzle any juices from the cutting board over the chicken - that's liquid gold right there! Add a big spoonful of the street corn topping. Don't be shy with it - this is what makes the whole dish special. Sprinkle extra cotija cheese on top, add some fresh cilantro, and finish with a lime wedge for squeezing. If you want to go all out, drizzle a little extra sour cream on top and maybe a sprinkle of Tajín if you have it. Emily always adds extra everything, so feel free to do the same!

Storage and Reheating Your Rice Bowl

The great thing about this street corn chicken rice bowl is that it stores really well for meal prep.

Keep the components separate in the fridge for up to 4 days. The chicken and rice can go together, but store the corn topping separately so it doesn't get soggy.

To reheat, warm the chicken and rice in the microwave for 1-2 minutes, then add the cold corn topping and fresh garnishes. The contrast between warm and cool actually tastes really good!

The corn topping gets even more flavorful after a day in the fridge, so don't worry about making extra.

Creative Variations for Your Chicken Rice Bowl

Street corn rice bowl with sliced chicken and lime

Want to switch things up? Here are some ideas I've tried that work really well:

  • Protein swaps - Shrimp, fish, or even black beans work great instead of chicken
  • Spice level - Add jalapeños or chipotle peppers to the corn mixture for more heat
  • Cheese options - If you can't find cotija, crumbled feta or queso fresco work too
  • Veggie additions - Diced avocado, cherry tomatoes, or shredded lettuce make great additions
  • Rice alternatives - Cauliflower rice, quinoa, or even tortilla chips for a nachos vibe

The Mexican street corn flavors work with almost anything, so don't be afraid to experiment!

Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl FAQs

What goes in a chicken and rice bowl?

A chicken and rice bowl typically includes seasoned cooked chicken, rice as the base, and various toppings. This street corn version features marinated chicken thighs, fluffy rice, and a creamy Mexican street corn topping with cotija cheese.

What kind of cheese do you put on street corn?

Cotija cheese is the traditional choice for Mexican street corn (elotes). It's a crumbly, salty Mexican cheese that adds authentic flavor and texture to the corn topping in this rice bowl.

What cream is used for elotes?

Traditional elotes use a combination of sour cream and mayonnaise. This recipe uses both - sour cream for tanginess and mayo for richness - creating the perfect creamy base for the street corn topping.

How do you add flavor to rice bowls?

Layer flavors throughout - marinate the protein (like the lime-chili chicken here), season toppings well, use fresh herbs like cilantro, add acidic elements like lime juice, and incorporate bold flavors like the spicy-creamy street corn mixture.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this street corn chicken rice bowl, you'll definitely want to try these other crowd-pleasers:

  • Mexican Meal Prep Bowls - Perfect for weekly meal planning with similar flavors
  • Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe - Another Mexican-inspired favorite that's ready in minutes
  • Homemade Grilled Chicken Salad - For when you want something lighter but just as satisfying

Final Thoughts

This street corn chicken rice bowl has become our go-to weeknight dinner when we want something that feels special but doesn't require a ton of effort. The combination of smoky, creamy, tangy flavors just works so well together.

Emily now asks for this at least once a week, and honestly? I don't mind making it because it's that good and that easy. Plus, everyone can customize their own bowl, which means less complaining about what's for dinner (always a win in my book!).

Give this recipe a try and let me know what you think! Don't forget to save this to Pinterest so you can make it again and again.

Pinterest CTA
street corn chicken rice bowl
street corn chicken rice bowl recipe
Grilled chicken rice bowl with corn red onion sour cream

Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl

This amazing street corn chicken rice bowl brings all your favorite Mexican street food flavors together in one satisfying meal! Marinated chicken thighs, creamy cotija cheese corn topping, and fluffy rice make this the perfect weeknight dinner.
5 from 1 vote
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 30 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 50 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Lunch, Main Course
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 4 people
Calories 512 kcal

Equipment

  • Skillet
  • Wooden Cutting Board
  • Chef Knife
  • 2 Mixing Bowls

Ingredients
  

For the Chicken

  • 4 chicken thighs boneless and skinless
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice
  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon cumin powder
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder or 2 minced garlic cloves
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Street Corn Topping

  • 1 cup sweet corn kernels grilled if possible, frozen works great
  • ¼ cup red onion thinly sliced
  • 1 cup sour cream save half to drizzle on top
  • 2 tablespoon mayonnaise
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled, plus extra for garnish
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • salt and pepper to taste
  • 1 lime cut into wedges

For Assembly

  • 3 cups cooked rice
  • fresh cilantro for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Season and marinate the chicken: Start by making your marinade in a shallow dish or bowl. Mix together the lime juice, avocado oil, chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, salt, and pepper until it's well combined. Add your chicken thighs to the marinade and make sure they're completely coated. Let the chicken marinate for at least 15 minutes, but 30 minutes is even better if you have the time.
  • Cook the chicken to perfection: Heat your skillet over medium-high heat. Don't add oil since the chicken already has some from the marinade. When the pan is hot, add the chicken thighs. You should hear a nice sizzle when they hit the pan! Cook for 8-10 minutes on the first side without moving them around. Flip and cook for another 8-10 minutes until the internal temperature reaches 165°F. Remove from heat and let the chicken rest for about 5 minutes before slicing.
  • Make the street corn topping: While the chicken is resting, make your street corn mixture. If you're using frozen corn, sauté it in a hot skillet for 3-4 minutes until it gets some color. In a mixing bowl, combine the corn, thinly sliced red onion, half the sour cream, mayonnaise, half the cotija cheese, and chili powder. Season with salt, pepper, and a squeeze of lime juice. Taste and adjust - you want it tangy, creamy, and just a little spicy.
  • Prepare the rice base: If your rice is leftover from yesterday, reheat it with a splash of water in the microwave for about 2 minutes. This keeps it from getting dry and sad. Fresh rice works too!
  • Assemble your bowl: Start with a generous scoop of warm rice in each bowl. Slice your rested chicken and arrange it on top of the rice. Don't forget to drizzle any juices from the cutting board over the chicken! Add a big spoonful of the street corn topping. Sprinkle extra cotija cheese on top, add some fresh cilantro, and finish with a lime wedge for squeezing. If you want to go all out, drizzle a little extra sour cream on top and maybe a sprinkle of Tajín if you have it.

Notes

The great thing about this street corn chicken rice bowl is that it stores really well for meal prep. Keep the components separate in the fridge for up to 4 days. The chicken and rice can go together, but store the corn topping separately so it doesn't get soggy. To reheat, warm the chicken and rice in the microwave for 1-2 minutes, then add the cold corn topping and fresh garnishes.
Want to switch things up? Try protein swaps like shrimp, fish, or even black beans. Add jalapeños or chipotle peppers to the corn mixture for more heat. If you can't find cotija, crumbled feta or queso fresco work too.

Nutrition

Calories: 512kcalCarbohydrates: 43.5gProtein: 22.6gFat: 28.2g
Keyword chicken rice bowl, mexican street corn bowl, street corn, Street Corn Chicken Rice Bowl
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse Recipe

May 31, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Have you ever thought about turning cottage cheese chocolate mousse into your new go-to dessert? I know, I know - cottage cheese in dessert sounds weird at first. But trust me on this one!

Last month, Emily walked into the kitchen while I was making this and immediately wrinkled her nose. "Mom, what are you doing with cottage cheese?" she asked with that tone only teenagers can master. Fast forward twenty minutes, and she was practically licking the bowl clean, asking when I'd make it again!

This cottage cheese chocolate mousse completely changed how I think about healthy desserts. It's rich, creamy, and satisfies every chocolate craving without the guilt. Plus, with 16 grams of protein per serving, it actually keeps you full instead of leaving you hunting for more sweets an hour later.

Want to try more creative cottage cheese recipes? My blueberry cottage cheese breakfast bake has become a weekend favorite, and these egg bites with cottage cheese are perfect for busy mornings.

Why You'll Love This Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

Side view of mousse in glasses with raspberries

I've been experimenting with cottage cheese as a secret ingredient lately, and this high-protein chocolate mousse is just another reason why it's become my pantry staple.

High in Protein – Thanks to the cottage cheese, this mousse delivers 16 grams of protein per serving while still tasting completely indulgent.

Only 3 Ingredients – You probably already have everything you need in your fridge or pantry right now.

5 Minute Prep – This cottage cheese chocolate mousse comes together in just 5 minutes with a blender. The hardest part? Waiting for it to chill in the fridge.

Perfect for Meal Prep – Make a batch on Sunday and you'll have healthy desserts ready all week long.

Kid-Approved – Even my picky teenager couldn't tell this was made with cottage cheese until I told her.

Budget-Friendly – Much cheaper than buying fancy protein desserts from the store.

Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse Ingredients

  • 1 cup full-fat cottage cheese
  • 2 tablespoons unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 2 tablespoons pure maple syrup
Spoon dipped in chocolate mousse with whipped cream and raspberry

Ingredient Substitutions

This recipe is super flexible, so feel free to switch things up based on what you have or your dietary needs.

Cottage Cheese: I always use full-fat cottage cheese for the creamiest texture, but low-fat works too. The brand matters here - I love Good Culture because it blends incredibly smooth.

Sweetener Options: Honey or agave syrup work perfectly if you're out of maple syrup. For sugar-free versions, try liquid stevia or monk fruit sweetener. Start with just a few drops and taste as you go.

Cocoa Powder: Unsweetened cocoa powder is my go-to, but raw cacao powder creates a more intense chocolate flavor with extra antioxidants.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

Step 1: Blend Everything Together

  1. Add the cottage cheese, cocoa powder, and maple syrup to your blender.
  2. Blend on high speed for 60-90 seconds until completely smooth. Don't rush this step - you want zero cottage cheese curds remaining.
Cocoa powder cottage cheese and syrup in a blender

Step 2: Taste and Adjust

  1. Give it a quick taste. Want it sweeter? Add another teaspoon of maple syrup. Need more chocolate? Toss in another half tablespoon of cocoa powder.

Step 3: Chill and Set

  1. Pour the chocolate cottage cheese mousse into serving containers or one large bowl.
  2. Refrigerate for at least 2 hours, though I prefer 4 hours for the best texture.
Blended chocolate mousse inside a blender

Step 4: Serve and Enjoy

  1. Serve straight from the fridge with your favorite toppings.

I learned the hard way that this mousse is best served cold - it loses that perfect creamy texture if left at room temperature too long.

Storage and Reheating for Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

Chocolate mousse topped with whipped cream and raspberry

This cottage cheese chocolate mousse stores beautifully in the fridge for up to 5 days. I like storing individual portions in small mason jars so they're ready to grab as quick snacks.

Cover tightly with plastic wrap or store in airtight containers to prevent the mousse from absorbing other fridge flavors.

If any separation occurs (which sometimes happens), just give it a quick stir before serving. The texture comes right back.

Don't freeze this mousse - the cottage cheese doesn't handle freezing well and you'll end up with a grainy texture when thawed.

Pro Tips for Perfect Chocolate Cottage Cheese Mousse

Spoonful of chocolate mousse with whipped cream and raspberry

After making this recipe probably fifty times (no joke!), I've picked up some tricks that make all the difference.

Use a High-Powered Blender: A Vitamix or similar blender works best for getting that silky smooth texture. A food processor works too, just blend a bit longer.

Room Temperature Ingredients: Let your cottage cheese sit out for 15 minutes before blending. It creates a smoother final texture.

Blend Long Enough: Don't stop blending until it's completely smooth. This usually takes 60-90 seconds in a good blender.

Taste as You Go: Everyone's sweet tooth is different. Start with the recipe amounts, then adjust the sweetener to your preference.

Chill Time Matters: I know waiting is hard, but that 2-hour chill time really does make the texture so much better.

Creative Serving Ideas for Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

Two glasses of mousse with whipped cream and chocolate chips

This mousse tastes amazing on its own, but I love dressing it up with different toppings depending on my mood.

Fresh Berries: Strawberries and raspberries add a bright, tangy contrast to the rich chocolate. Emily's favorite combo!

Chocolate Chips: Mini dark chocolate chips or shaved chocolate make this feel extra fancy.

Nuts and Seeds: Chopped almonds, walnuts, or even hemp seeds add great texture and extra protein.

Nut Butter Drizzle: A drizzle of almond or peanut butter turns this into a chocolate-peanut butter masterpiece.

Whipped Cream: A dollop of whipped cream makes this feel like restaurant-quality dessert.

Graham Crackers: Crushed graham crackers give it a s'mores vibe that kids absolutely love.

Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse FAQs

Can you make mousse from cottage cheese?

Yes! Cottage cheese blends into a perfectly smooth, creamy mousse when combined with cocoa powder and sweetener. The key is blending until completely smooth.

Is cottage cheese chocolate mousse good for you?

Absolutely! This mousse packs 16 grams of protein per serving while being lower in calories than traditional mousse, making it a guilt-free dessert option.

What does whipped cottage cheese taste like?

When blended smooth with chocolate and sweetener, it tastes rich and creamy like traditional chocolate mousse—you won't even taste the cottage cheese!

Is cottage cheese chocolate mousse good?

Yes! It's surprisingly rich, creamy, and satisfies chocolate cravings while providing extra protein. Most people are amazed it's made with cottage cheese.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this cottage cheese recipe, you'll definitely want to try these other crowd-pleasers:

  • Small Batch Chocolate Chip Cookies - When you want fresh cookies but don't need dozens of them
  • Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread - Another amazing way to use cottage cheese in unexpected places
  • Double Chocolate Chip Banana Bread - For when you want chocolate for breakfast too

Final Thoughts on Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

This cottage cheese chocolate mousse has seriously become one of my most-requested recipes. It's amazing how something so simple can taste so decadent while still being good for you.

The best part? You can whip this up whenever a chocolate craving hits, and you'll actually feel good about eating it. No sugar crash, no guilt - just pure chocolatey satisfaction.

Give this recipe a try and let me know what you think! I bet you'll be as surprised as Emily was about how delicious cottage cheese can be in dessert form.

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it later when those chocolate cravings hit!

Pinterest CTA
cottage cheese chocolate mousse
cottage cheese chocolate mousse recipe
Front view of mousse topped with raspberry and chips

Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse

Rich, creamy cottage cheese chocolate mousse with just 3 ingredients! High protein, ready in 5 minutes. This healthy dessert satisfies chocolate cravings while delivering 16 grams of protein per serving.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Chill Time 2 hours hrs
Total Time 5 minutes mins
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Servings 2 servings
Calories 187 kcal

Equipment

  • High-Speed Blender

Ingredients
  

  • 1 cup full-fat cottage cheese
  • 2 tablespoons unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 2 tablespoons pure maple syrup

Instructions
 

  • Add the cottage cheese, cocoa powder, and maple syrup to your blender.
  • Blend on high speed for 60-90 seconds until completely smooth. Don't rush this step - you want zero cottage cheese curds remaining.
  • Give it a quick taste. Want it sweeter? Add another teaspoon of maple syrup. Need more chocolate? Toss in another half tablespoon of cocoa powder.
  • Pour the chocolate cottage cheese mousse into serving containers or one large bowl.
  • Refrigerate for at least 2 hours, though I prefer 4 hours for the best texture.
  • Serve straight from the fridge with your favorite toppings.

Notes

This mousse stores beautifully in the fridge for up to 5 days. Store in airtight containers to prevent absorbing other fridge flavors. If any separation occurs, just give it a quick stir before serving. Don't freeze this mousse as the cottage cheese doesn't handle freezing well.

Nutrition

Calories: 187kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 16gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 25mgSodium: 350mgPotassium: 159mgFiber: 2gSugar: 16gCalcium: 8mgIron: 1.2mg
Keyword Chocolate Mousse, Cottage Cheese, Cottage Cheese Chocolate Mousse, Healthy, High Protein
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs Recipe

May 28, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

When Emily asked for corn dogs last week but I didn't want to heat up the whole oven, I figured I'd try tossing some air fryer frozen corn dogs in there instead.

Honestly? Best decision ever! They came out so crispy and golden that Emily actually asked if I bought them from the fair. The air fryer makes them way better than the oven method I used to do.

This takes about 10 minutes total and there's basically no prep work involved. Just grab whatever frozen corn dogs you have sitting in your freezer and you're good to go. No oil, no mess, and they taste amazing.

I've been playing around with different frozen foods in the air fryer lately, and my frozen hash browns in the air fryer turned out pretty great too.

Why You Will Like This Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs Recipe

  • Takes 10 minutes - Seriously, that's it. From freezer to plate in 10 minutes
  • Gets super crispy - Way crispier than the oven without any oil
  • No cleanup hassle - No splattering grease or sticky pans to scrub
  • Works for busy nights - When you need something quick and the kids will actually eat
  • Emily approved - If it passes the picky 12-year-old test, it's a win
  • Uses what you have - Just whatever corn dogs are in your freezer
Corn dog with bite on top of another with mustard and ketchup

Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs Ingredients

  • Frozen corn dogs (any brand works - I've tried store brand, name brand, doesn't matter)

Yep, that's the whole list! I love when recipes don't require a grocery store run.

How To Cook Frozen Corn Dogs In Air Fryer

Getting Started

Heat your air fryer to 370°F for 5 minutes. I know it seems like an extra step, but trust me - it makes a difference.

I used to just throw them in right away, but they cook way more evenly when you let it heat up first.

Setting Them Up

Put the frozen corn dogs in the basket without them touching each other.

The air needs to get around each one or they won't cook right. I learned this when I tried to cram four of them in at once and ended up with one side crispy and the other side still cold.

The Cooking Part

Cook for 10 minutes, flip them over at 5 minutes.

When you flip them, you'll see they're already starting to turn that nice golden color. The kitchen starts smelling really good around this point too.

Check with a meat thermometer - they should hit 165°F. Serve them right away while they're hot.

Close-up of four corn dogs lined up in air fryer on gray surface

Storage And Reheating Instructions

In the fridge: Put any leftovers in a container and they'll keep for 3-4 days.

Back in the freezer: If you have extra uncooked ones, just put them back in the original package.

Heating up leftovers: Toss them back in the air fryer at 350°F for 2-3 minutes. They get crispy again, which is way better than the microwave.

Four corn dogs cooking in air fryer on marble background

Tips For Perfect Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs

Don't crowd them - I made this mistake once trying to cook six at the same time. Half of them were perfect, the other half were still cold in the middle.

Actually flip them halfway - Set a timer because it's easy to forget. Both sides need that hot air action.

Different sizes work too - Regular ones, mini ones, those fancy cheese-filled ones - they all work with this method.

Skip the cooking spray - You really don't need it. The air fryer does its thing without any extra oil.

Watch the first batch - Every air fryer is a little different. Mine cooks pretty fast, so yours might need a minute more or less.

Eat them hot - They're definitely best right out of the air fryer. Once they cool down, the coating gets kind of chewy.

If you want to make it a real meal, try making my air fryer sweet potato wedges on the side.

What To Serve With Air Fryer Corn Dogs

frozen corn dog air fryer

The usual stuff: Fries, mozzarella sticks, onion rings - you know, fair food vibes.

If you want something healthier: A salad or some roasted veggies. Emily rolls her eyes when I suggest this, but sometimes I feel like we need actual vegetables.

Dipping sauces: Mustard and ketchup are classic. We also like barbecue sauce, cheese sauce, and Emily's weird but apparently delicious ranch dressing combo.

Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs FAQ

How long should you cook frozen corn dogs in an air fryer?

Cook frozen corn dogs for 10 minutes at 370°F, flipping halfway through for even cooking.

Can you put frozen corn dogs in an air fryer?

Yes! You can cook corn dogs straight from frozen - no thawing required.

What temperature to cook hot dogs in an air fryer?

Set your air fryer to 370°F for the perfect crispy exterior and heated-through interior.

Are frozen corn dogs already cooked?

Most frozen corn dogs are pre-cooked, but always heat to 165°F internal temperature for food safety.

Recipes You May Like

  • Air Fryer Tuna Melts - Another quick air fryer dinner that actually tastes good
  • Air Fryer Sweet Potato Wedges - These go really well with corn dogs
  • Air Fryer Salmon Patties - When you want something a little fancier but still easy

Conclusion

These air fryer frozen corn dogs have been a total game-changer for our busy nights. Emily's happy, I'm happy because there's no mess to clean up, and they actually taste really good.

The crispy outside and hot inside combo is just right, and honestly they taste better than when I used to make them in the oven. Plus, 10 minutes from start to finish? Can't beat that.

Try this method next time you need something quick and easy. I bet you'll end up doing it this way from now on too.

Save this to Pinterest so you can find it again when you need a quick dinner solution!

Pinterest CTA
Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs
Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs recipe
frozen corn dogs in air fryer

Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs

When you need a quick and easy meal that's ready in just 10 minutes, these air fryer frozen corn dogs are absolutely perfect! No oil needed - just crispy, golden results every time.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 1 minute min
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Preheating Time 5 minutes mins
Total Time 11 minutes mins
Course Main Course, Snack
Cuisine American
Servings 1 serving
Calories 111 kcal

Equipment

  • Air Fryer
  • Meat Thermometer

Ingredients
  

  • frozen corn dogs any brand

Instructions
 

  • Preheat the air fryer to 370°F for 5 minutes.
  • Place the number of corn dogs you want into the air fryer in a single layer, not touching each other.
  • Air fry for 10 minutes, flipping halfway through at the 5-minute mark.
  • Check internal temperature with a meat thermometer - they should reach 165°F when done.
  • Serve immediately while hot and crispy.

Notes

Be sure to arrange your corn dogs in a single layer in your air fryer basket. Overlapping might cause them to cook unevenly. Don't forget to flip your corn dogs halfway through cooking for the best results. Different air fryers may require slightly different cooking times, so keep an eye on your corn dogs the first time you make them. Serve immediately for the best taste and texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 111kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 5gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 20mgSodium: 308mgPotassium: 66mgVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 1mg
Keyword Air Fryer, Air Fryer Frozen Corn Dogs, Corn Dogs, frozen corn dogs in air fryer, frozen corndog air fryer
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese Recipe (Perfect Copycat!)

May 28, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Who knew that recreating Chick-fil-A's famous mac and cheese at home could be this simple? When Emily and I first tried making this Chick Fil A Mac and Cheese Recipe, I honestly wasn't expecting much – but wow, were we in for a surprise! After countless attempts and tweaks (and maybe a few too many trips to the actual restaurant for "research"), I finally cracked the code to their ultra-creamy, perfectly cheesy masterpiece.

The secret? It's all about that 20-minute pasta cook time and the magical three-cheese blend that makes this dish absolutely irresistible. This copycat version delivers that same rich, velvety texture that makes Chick-fil-A's version so addictive.

If you love comfort food classics like this, you'll definitely want to try my old-fashioned baked macaroni and cheese – it's another family favorite that never disappoints!

Why You Will Love This Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese Recipe

Baked mac and cheese in glass dish

  • Incredibly creamy texture that rivals the restaurant version
  • Ready in just 45 minutes with simple pantry ingredients
  • Three-cheese blend creates the perfect flavor combination
  • Family-friendly – even picky eaters can't resist this one
  • Makes a large batch perfect for feeding a crowd or meal prep
  • Broiled golden top adds that extra special restaurant touch

Ingredients For The Best Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese Recipe

  • 1 pound elbow macaroni
  • ¼ cup butter
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ⅛ teaspoon ground paprika
  • 2 cups whole milk
  • 1 egg yolk
  • 8 slices American cheese
  • 16 ounces freshly grated extra sharp cheddar cheese, divided
  • 1 cup Italian blend cheese, shredded
Cheesy baked mac and cheese scoop

Instructions For Perfect Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese

Preparing The Pasta

  1. Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the elbow macaroni and cook for 20 minutes (yes, really – this is the secret to that tender texture!).
  2. Drain the macaroni and set aside while you prepare the cheese sauce.

Making The Cheese Sauce

  1. In a large pot over medium heat, melt the butter completely.
  2. Whisk in the flour, salt, and paprika, stirring constantly to prevent lumps from forming.
  3. Add the whole milk gradually, a little at a time, whisking thoroughly after each addition until completely smooth.
  4. Continue whisking for 1-2 minutes until the sauce thickens to a creamy consistency.
Three cheese mix in white pot
Creamy stovetop mac and cheese in pot

Tempering The Egg

  1. In a small bowl, place your egg yolk. Add a spoonful of the hot milk mixture to the egg yolk and immediately whisk together (this prevents the egg from scrambling).
  2. Add the tempered egg yolk mixture back to the pot and whisk until fully incorporated.

Adding The Cheeses

  1. Turn the heat down to low. Tear the American cheese into pieces and add to the pot.
  2. Add half of the cheddar cheese and all of the Italian blend cheese to the sauce.
  3. Stir gently until all cheeses are completely melted and the sauce is smooth.
Unbaked mac and cheese with shredded cheddar
Golden mac and cheese casserole

Final Assembly

  1. Add the cooked macaroni to the cheese sauce and stir gently until everything is well combined.
  2. Transfer the mac and cheese to a 9×13-inch baking dish.
  3. Top with the remaining cheddar cheese.
  4. Place under the broiler until the top is golden brown (watch carefully – it can burn quickly!).
  5. Remove from oven and serve immediately while hot and bubbly.

Storage And Reheating Tips For Your Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese

This copycat Chick Fil A mac and cheese stores beautifully for future meals. I love making a big batch on Sunday and enjoying it throughout the week!

Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. For longer storage, wrap the baking dish with plastic wrap and foil, then freeze for up to 3 months.

To reheat, thaw overnight in the refrigerator if frozen. Cover and bake at 350°F until heated through, or microwave individual portions until warm. The creamy texture holds up wonderfully!

Speaking of comforting soups, if you enjoy cheesy dishes like this, my cheeseburger macaroni soup is another crowd-pleaser that combines similar flavors in soup form.

Mini mac and cheese cups

Tips And Variations For The Ultimate Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese Recipe

Here are my tried-and-true tips for making this Chick Fil A mac and cheese recipe absolutely perfect every time:

  • Use whole milk only – don't substitute with lower-fat options as it affects the creamy texture
  • Freshly grate your cheese from the block for the best melting and flavor
  • Cook the pasta for the full 20 minutes – this creates that signature tender texture
  • Don't skip the broiling step – it adds that restaurant-quality golden top

Want to mix things up? Try adding crispy bacon bits, a sprinkle of parmesan cheese, or even some sautéed spinach for extra flavor and nutrition.

For a lighter twist, you could experiment with my cottage cheese cloud bread as a side – it's a fun, protein-packed addition that pairs surprisingly well!

Frequently Asked Questions About This Chick Fil A Mac And Cheese Recipe

What is Chick-fil-A mac and cheese made of?

This copycat recipe uses elbow macaroni, a creamy cheese sauce made with butter, flour, whole milk, and three types of cheese: American cheese, sharp cheddar, and Italian blend cheese, topped with extra cheddar and broiled until golden.

What cheese does Chick-fil-A use?

The recipe combines American cheese slices, freshly grated extra sharp cheddar cheese, and Italian blend shredded cheese for the perfect creamy and flavorful cheese combination that mimics Chick-fil-A's signature taste.

Why is Chick-fil-A's mac and cheese so good?

The secret lies in cooking the pasta for a full 20 minutes until very tender, using whole milk for creaminess, and the specific three-cheese blend that creates an ultra-smooth, rich sauce with perfect flavor balance.

What cheese is best for mac and cheese?

For this Chick-fil-A copycat, the winning combination is American cheese for smoothness, extra sharp cheddar for flavor, and Italian blend for complexity - freshly grated from the block works best for optimal melting and texture.

Recipes You May Like

  • Old-Fashioned Baked Macaroni And Cheese – Another classic comfort food favorite with a crispy breadcrumb topping
  • Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup – All the flavors of a cheeseburger in a cozy soup form
  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken – The perfect main dish to serve alongside this mac and cheese

Conclusion

This Chick Fil A Mac and & Recipe has become one of our most requested dishes, and for good reason! The combination of that perfectly tender pasta, ultra-creamy three-cheese sauce, and golden broiled top creates a dish that's even better than the restaurant version.

I love how this recipe brings the family together around the dinner table. Emily always asks for seconds (and sometimes thirds!), and I never mind making extra because it reheats so beautifully for busy weeknight dinners.

Give this copycat Chick Fil A mac & cheese a try and let me know what you think! Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it easily when that mac and cheese craving hits.

Happy cooking!

Pinterest CTA
chick fil a mac and cheese recipe
copycat chick fil a mac and cheese
Gooey mac and cheese scoop with cheese pull

Chick Fil A Mac and Cheese Recipe

This incredible copycat Chick-fil-A mac and cheese recipe creates the perfect ultra-creamy, cheesy comfort food that rivals the restaurant version. Made with a three-cheese blend and cooked to perfection in just 45 minutes!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 45 minutes mins
Course Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 8 servings
Calories 674 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Pot
  • Whisk
  • 9"x13" Baking Dish
  • Small Bowl

Ingredients
  

  • 1 pound elbow macaroni
  • ¼ cup butter
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ⅛ teaspoon ground paprika
  • 2 cups whole milk
  • 1 egg yolk
  • 8 slices American cheese
  • 16 ounces freshly grated extra sharp cheddar cheese divided
  • 1 cup Italian blend cheese shredded

Instructions
 

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the elbow macaroni and cook for 20 minutes (yes, really – this is the secret to that tender texture!).
  • Drain the macaroni and set aside while you prepare the cheese sauce.
  • In a large pot over medium heat, melt the butter completely.
  • Whisk in the flour, salt, and paprika, stirring constantly to prevent lumps from forming.
  • Add the whole milk gradually, a little at a time, whisking thoroughly after each addition until completely smooth.
  • Continue whisking for 1-2 minutes until the sauce thickens to a creamy consistency.
  • In a small bowl, place your egg yolk. Add a spoonful of the hot milk mixture to the egg yolk and immediately whisk together (this prevents the egg from scrambling).
  • Add the tempered egg yolk mixture back to the pot and whisk until fully incorporated.
  • Turn the heat down to low. Tear the American cheese into pieces and add to the pot.
  • Add half of the cheddar cheese and all of the Italian blend cheese to the sauce.
  • Stir gently until all cheeses are completely melted and the sauce is smooth.
  • Add the cooked macaroni to the cheese sauce and stir gently until everything is well combined.
  • Transfer the mac and cheese to a 9×13-inch baking dish.
  • Top with the remaining cheddar cheese.
  • Place under the broiler until the top is golden brown (watch carefully – it can burn quickly!).
  • Remove from oven and serve immediately while hot and bubbly.

Notes

This makes a nice large batch, you can halve this if you'd like. Make sure you use whole milk, do not substitute it. Freshly shredding your cheese from the block is best. This can be frozen - wrap the baking dish with plastic wrap and foil, then freeze for up to 3 months. Try not to switch up the cheese as this combination creates the perfect flavor. Yes you really need to cook your pasta for 20 minutes for that signature tender texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 674kcalCarbohydrates: 51gProtein: 31gFat: 39gSaturated Fat: 20gCholesterol: 127mgSodium: 1112mgPotassium: 298mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 1091IUCalcium: 741mgIron: 1mg
Keyword cheesy, chick fil a mac and cheese, chick fil a recipe, Chick-fil-A, copycat chick fil a mac and cheese, Mac and Cheese
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Crispy Air Fryer Salmon Patties Recipe

May 26, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Who says you need to stand over a hot stove to make perfectly crispy salmon patties? Not me! I discovered the magic of making air fryer salmon patties when I was trying to find a quicker way to get dinner on the table for Emily and me on busy weeknights.

These golden, flaky patties come together in just 22 minutes and taste way better than anything you'd get from a restaurant. Trust me – I've tested this recipe more times than I can count, and every single batch turns out perfectly crispy on the outside and tender on the inside.

If you're looking for more delicious salmon recipes, you'll also love my salmon cake recipe that's equally simple and satisfying!

Why You Will Love These Air Fryer Salmon Patties

  • Super quick cooking time – Ready in just 22 minutes from start to finish
  • Crispy exterior with tender inside – The air fryer creates the perfect texture every time
  • Budget-friendly meal – Uses affordable canned salmon that's always in my pantry
  • Kid-approved flavor – Emily devours these every time I make them (and that's saying something!)
  • Healthy protein option – Packed with omega-3s and way less oil than pan-frying
  • Meal prep friendly – Make a big batch and freeze for quick dinners later
Air fried salmon patties with golden brown crust in basket

Ingredients For The Best Air Fryer Salmon Patties

Here's what you'll need to make these crispy salmon patties in your air fryer:

  • 14.75 ounce canned salmon (I prefer pink salmon for the best flavor)
  • 1 large egg
  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon dried dill
  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley (optional but adds great color)
  • Lemon wedges and tartar sauce for serving

The key to amazing salmon patties in air fryer is using quality canned salmon and making sure you pick out all the bones and skin. I learned this the hard way when Emily bit into a bone during our first attempt – lesson learned!

Stacked salmon patties with tartar sauce and lemon wedges

How To Make Salmon Patties In Air Fryer

  1. Spray your air fryer basket with olive oil nonstick cooking spray. This prevents sticking and helps create that beautiful golden crust we're after.
  2. Open your canned salmon and drain it well. Here's my secret trick: pick through every bit of salmon to remove bones and skin, then give it a rough chop. This creates the perfect texture for your patties.
  3. Add the prepared salmon, egg, mayonnaise, panko breadcrumbs, fresh lemon juice, dried dill, onion powder, garlic powder, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and fresh parsley to a large bowl.
Unmixed salmon patty ingredients arranged in clear glass bowl
Mixed salmon patty ingredients in glass bowl with wooden spoon

  1. Mix everything together until well combined, but don't overmix – you want the mixture to hold together without being too dense. The consistency should be moist enough to form patties but not so wet that they fall apart.
  2. Divide the mixture into four equal portions and gently form them into patties about 3 inches wide and ¾ inch thick. Don't pack them too tightly – loose patties stay more tender!
  3. Place the salmon patties in the air fryer basket, making sure they don't touch each other. Spray the tops with cooking spray for extra crispiness.
  4. Cook on the air fry setting at 390°F for 10-12 minutes until the patties are fully cooked and golden brown. No need to preheat your air fryer for this recipe – another time saver!
Raw salmon patties in air fryer basket before cooking
Golden brown cooked salmon patties in air fryer basket

  1. Check for doneness – the patties are ready when they're golden brown and feel firm to the touch. If you want them extra crispy, add another minute or two to the cooking time.

Storage And Reheating Your Salmon Patties

These air fryer salmon patties keep beautifully in the refrigerator for up to 3 days in an airtight container. I often make a double batch on Sunday for quick lunches throughout the week.

For longer storage, freeze the cooked patties in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Layer them between parchment paper to prevent sticking.

To reheat, pop them back in the air fryer at 350°F for 3-4 minutes until heated through and crispy again. They taste almost as good as fresh!

Four perfectly cooked salmon patties in square air fryer basket

Tips And Variations For Perfect Salmon Patties Air Fryer Style

Want to switch things up? Here are some of my favorite variations that Emily and I have tried:

  • Add a kick of heat – Mix in a pinch of cayenne pepper or a dash of hot sauce
  • Go Mediterranean – Replace dill with dried oregano and add a tablespoon of capers
  • Make them gluten-free – Swap panko for crushed pork rinds or almond flour
  • Boost the vegetables – Fold in finely diced bell peppers or green onions
  • Try different herbs – Fresh chives or basil work wonderfully too

One thing I've learned through trial and error? Don't skip the mayo! It keeps the patties moist and helps create that perfect golden crust. I tried making them without it once, and they turned out dry and crumbly.

If you're serving these as a main dish, pair them with my frozen hash browns in air fryer for a complete meal that's ready in minutes!

Broken salmon patty showing flaky interior with tartar sauce

Frequently Asked Questions About Air Fryer Salmon Patty Recipes

How Long To Cook Salmon Patties In Air Fryer?

Cook salmon patties at 390°F for 10-12 minutes until golden brown and fully cooked through. The exact time depends on the thickness of your patties and your specific air fryer model. Start checking at 10 minutes to avoid overcooking.

What Temperature To Cook Salmon Patties In Air Fryer?

Set your air fryer to 390°F degrees for the best results with these salmon cakes. This temperature creates the perfect balance of a crispy exterior and tender interior without drying out the fish.

How To Reheat Salmon Patties In Air Fryer?

Reheat leftover salmon patties at 350°F for 3-4 minutes until warmed through and crispy again. This method works so much better than the microwave and brings back that fresh-cooked texture.

Can I Put Frozen Salmon Patties In The Air Fryer?

Yes, cook frozen salmon patties at 390°F for 14-16 minutes, adding 2-4 extra minutes to the original cooking time. You can cook them straight from frozen – no need to thaw first!

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoyed these air fryer salmon patties, you'll love these other quick and delicious recipes:

  • Blackened Salmon With Mango Salsa – Another fantastic salmon recipe with bold flavors
  • Egg Bites With Cottage Cheese – Perfect protein-packed breakfast or snack
  • Southern Living Biscuits And Gravy – Comfort food at its finest

Final Thoughts On These Air Fryer Salmon Patties

These crispy air fryer salmon patties have become one of our go-to weeknight dinners, and I think they'll quickly become a favorite in your kitchen too. They're simple enough for busy nights but tasty enough to serve to guests.

The best part? You probably have most of these ingredients in your pantry right now. So why not give them a try tonight?

Serve them with a squeeze of fresh lemon and your favorite dipping sauce – Emily loves them with tartar sauce, but I'm partial to a little spicy mayo myself.

Let me know how yours turn out! I love hearing about your cooking adventures and any tweaks you make to the recipe.

Pinterest CTA
Air Fryer Salmon Cakes
Air Fryer Salmon Cakes recipe
Crispy golden salmon patties finished cooking in air fryer

Air Fryer Salmon Patties

Crispy air fryer salmon patties ready in just 22 minutes! Golden, flaky, and perfectly seasoned with a tender interior. Made with simple pantry ingredients for a quick and delicious meal.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 12 minutes mins
Total Time 22 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 4 patties
Calories 183 kcal

Equipment

  • Air Fryer
  • Large Bowl
  • Cooking Spray

Ingredients
  

  • 14.75 ounce canned salmon pink salmon preferred
  • 1 large egg
  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon dried dill
  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley optional
  • lemon wedges for serving
  • tartar sauce for serving

Instructions
 

  • Spray your air fryer basket with olive oil nonstick cooking spray. This prevents sticking and helps create that beautiful golden crust we're after.
  • Open your canned salmon and drain it well. Here's my secret trick: pick through every bit of salmon to remove bones and skin, then give it a rough chop. This creates the perfect texture for your patties.
  • Add the prepared salmon, egg, mayonnaise, panko breadcrumbs, fresh lemon juice, dried dill, onion powder, garlic powder, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and fresh parsley to a large bowl.
  • Mix everything together until well combined, but don't overmix – you want the mixture to hold together without being too dense. The consistency should be moist enough to form patties but not so wet that they fall apart.
  • Divide the mixture into four equal portions and gently form them into patties about 3 inches wide and ¾ inch thick. Don't pack them too tightly – loose patties stay more tender!
  • Place the salmon patties in the air fryer basket, making sure they don't touch each other. Spray the tops with cooking spray for extra crispiness.
  • Cook on the air fry setting at 390°F for 10-12 minutes until the patties are fully cooked and golden brown. No need to preheat your air fryer for this recipe – another time saver!
  • Check for doneness – the patties are ready when they're golden brown and feel firm to the touch. If you want them extra crispy, add another minute or two to the cooking time.

Notes

I like to use pink salmon for this recipe. Pick all the bones and fish skin out of the canned salmon and then chop up what is left over. Olive oil nonstick spray is less likely to gunk up your air fryer basket over time. These can be frozen for up to 3 months. Regular breadcrumbs will work in this recipe. Serve with your favorite dipping sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 183kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 15gFat: 12gSodium: 472mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1g
Keyword Air Fryer, air fryer salmon patties, Quick, salmon patties, salmon patties air fryer, salmon patties in air fryer
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Easy Salmon Cake Recipe (Salmon Patties)

May 26, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know what I love about a good salmon cake recipe? It's one of those dishes that sounds fancy but is actually so simple to make!

I discovered this recipe when I was trying to find ways to get more fish into our weekly meal rotation. Emily was being picky about salmon (shocking, right?), but these crispy, golden patties? She devoured them! Now they're a regular in our dinner lineup.

What makes this salmon cake recipe special is how it transforms humble canned salmon into something that tastes restaurant-worthy. The combination of fresh herbs, a touch of Dijon mustard, and that perfect crispy exterior makes these patties absolutely irresistible.

If you're looking for more quick protein options, you'll love my blackened salmon with mango salsa - another family favorite that's ready in no time!

Why You Will Love This Salmon Cake Recipe

  • Super quick - From start to finish in just 30 minutes
  • Budget-friendly - Uses affordable canned salmon
  • Crispy perfection - Golden brown exterior with tender, flaky interior
  • Fresh herb flavor - Dill and parsley make these taste amazing
  • Versatile serving - Great as dinner, lunch, or even breakfast
  • Kid-approved - Even picky eaters love these crispy patties
Golden salmon patties on cream plate with dill sauce and lemon wedge

Ingredients For The Best Salmon Cake Recipe

Here's what you'll need to make these delicious salmon cakes:

  • 1 (14.75 ounce) can salmon (see note below)
  • 1 egg
  • ¼ cup mayo
  • ½ tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • ¼ cup chopped scallions
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh dill
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • Pepper to taste
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil for frying

Pro tip: I always go for sockeye salmon when I can find it - the color and flavor are just better! But pink salmon works perfectly fine too.

Salmon patty cut open showing flaky interior with fork and herb sauce

How To Make Perfect Salmon Cakes Every Time

Preparing The Salmon Mixture

  1. Start by draining your canned salmon really well. I usually give it a good press with paper towels to get out any excess liquid.
  2. Add the salmon to a medium prep bowl and flake it with a fork. Don't worry about making it super fine - you want some texture! If you're using salmon that isn't boneless or skinless, you can either mash those pieces in (they're totally safe and nutritious) or pick them out if you prefer.
Raw salmon mixture ingredients in glass bowl with egg and fresh herbs
Flaked salmon mixed with herbs and breadcrumbs in prep bowl with fork

Mixing The Ingredients

  1. Add all the remaining ingredients except the olive oil to your bowl. Here's where I learned something important - mix everything together gently!
  2. The first time I made these, I was way too aggressive with my mixing and ended up with mushy patties. A gentle fold is all you need to bring everything together.

Forming The Patties

  1. This is probably the trickiest part, but once you get the hang of it, it's easy! Form the mixture into 6 patties that are about ½ inch thick.
  2. I like to wet my hands slightly when forming the patties - it prevents the mixture from sticking to your fingers. Don't pack them too tightly either, or they'll be dense instead of tender.
Six salmon patties cooking in black cast iron skillet with herb garnish
Three salmon cakes frying in cast iron pan with bubbling oil

Cooking Your Salmon Cake Recipe To Perfection

  1. Heat the olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Let that pan heat up for a few minutes - this is crucial for getting that beautiful golden crust!
  2. Fry the patties in two batches (trust me on this - overcrowding the pan is a recipe for disaster). Cook for about 3-4 minutes per side until they're lightly browned and crispy.
  3. Add a splash more oil for the second batch if needed. Since the salmon is already cooked, you're really just heating them through and creating that gorgeous crispy exterior.

Speaking of crispy breakfast foods, these salmon cakes pair wonderfully with my frozen hash browns in air fryer for a complete meal!

Storage And Reheating Your Salmon Patties

Three crispy salmon cakes arranged on white plate with tzatziki and fresh dill

Refrigerator Storage

Store your leftover salmon cakes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. They actually taste pretty good cold too - I've been known to eat them straight from the fridge as a quick snack!

Reheating Methods

To reheat, you can use a skillet over medium-low heat, the microwave on low power, or pop them in a 350°F oven until warmed through.

The skillet method is my favorite because it helps restore some of that crispy exterior.

Freezing Instructions

These salmon patties freeze beautifully! Once cooked and cooled, you can freeze them for up to 3 months. Just wrap them individually or layer between parchment paper in a freezer-safe container.

Delicious Variations For This Salmon Cake Recipe

Fresh Salmon Alternative

You can absolutely use cooked fresh salmon instead of canned! Just flake it with a fork and proceed with the recipe as written. This is perfect when you have leftover salmon from dinner.

Breadcrumb Substitutions

No panko? No problem! You can swap for regular breadcrumbs - I actually love using Italian-seasoned ones for extra flavor.

Herb Modifications

Can't find fresh dill? Either leave it out or use 1 teaspoon of dried dill instead. The flavor won't be quite as bright, but it'll still be delicious.

Spice It Up

Want to change the flavor profile? Try adding a teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning or Cajun seasoning. Just go easy on the extra salt since these seasonings usually contain plenty already!

For more protein-packed breakfast ideas, check out my egg bites with cottage cheese - they're another family favorite!

Perfectly browned salmon cakes on plate with dill garnish and sauce bowl

Essential Tips For The Best Salmon Cake Recipe

Choosing Your Salmon

I prefer sockeye salmon for its superior color and flavor, but it can be harder to find. Pink salmon is readily available and works great for this recipe.

Look for cans labeled "skinless and boneless" to make your life easier, but don't stress if you can only find bone-in, skin-on varieties.

Handling The Mixture

These patties need a gentle touch! Handle the mixture as little as possible to keep them tender. I recommend frying them in two batches so you have plenty of room to flip them without breaking.

Cooking Temperature

Medium heat is key here. Too high and the outside burns before the inside heats through. Too low and you won't get that beautiful golden crust we're after.

Timing Is Everything

Remember, since the salmon is already cooked, these don't need long at all. Those 3-4 minutes per side are perfect - any longer and they might dry out.

Frequently Asked Questions About Salmon Cake Recipe

What to use to keep salmon patties from falling apart?

Use egg and panko breadcrumbs as binders, handle the mixture gently, and let patties rest before cooking. The egg binds ingredients while breadcrumbs absorb excess moisture.

How to make fried salmon patties?

Mix drained salmon with egg, mayo, breadcrumbs, and seasonings. Form into ½-inch thick patties and fry in olive oil over medium heat for 3-4 minutes per side until golden brown.

How to make salmon patties without eggs?

Replace the egg with extra mayo (use ⅓ cup total) or mashed avocado. You can also use Greek yogurt or a flax egg (1 tablespoon ground flaxseed + 3 tablespoon water) as binding alternatives.

What sauce for salmon cake?

Best sauces include tzatziki, remoulade, garlic aioli, or tartar sauce. Serve with fresh lemon wedges for added brightness and flavor.

How many calories in a salmon patty?

Each salmon patty contains approximately 235 calories with 18g protein and 16g fat, making it a nutritious, protein-rich meal option.

What goes good with salmon patties?

Serve with coleslaw, roasted vegetables, rice pilaf, or a fresh green salad. They're also delicious on buns as salmon burgers with lettuce and tomato.

Recipes You May Like

  • Blackened Salmon With Mango Salsa - Another fantastic salmon recipe with fresh, bright flavors
  • Healthy Buffalo Chicken Wraps - Perfect for when you want something crispy and satisfying
  • Air Fryer Tuna Melts - Another delicious way to enjoy canned fish

Final Thoughts On This Salmon Cake Recipe

This salmon cake recipe has become such a reliable weeknight dinner in our house! There's something so satisfying about transforming a simple can of salmon into these gorgeous, crispy patties.

What I love most is how forgiving this recipe is - you can adjust the seasonings to your taste, swap herbs based on what you have, and even make them ahead of time.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out! I'd love to hear about any variations you come up with. Don't forget to save this to Pinterest so you can find it again when you need a quick, delicious dinner solution.

Pinterest CTA
salmon cake recipe
salmon cake recipe Salmon Patties
Close-up of golden-brown salmon patties with creamy herb sauce and lemon

Easy Salmon Cake Recipe (Salmon Patties)

These crispy, golden salmon cakes are made with simple ingredients and ready in just 30 minutes! Perfect for a quick weeknight dinner that the whole family will love.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Main Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 6 patties
Calories 235 kcal

Equipment

  • Medium prep bowl
  • Fork
  • Skillet

Ingredients
  

  • 1 can salmon 14.75 ounce, drained
  • 1 egg
  • ¼ cup mayo
  • ½ tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • ¼ cup chopped scallions
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh dill
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • pepper to taste
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil for frying

Instructions
 

  • Drain the salmon and add it to a medium prep bowl. Flake the salmon with a fork. If your salmon isn't boneless/skinless, mash the pieces in or pick those pieces out if you prefer.
  • Add the remaining ingredients (except for the olive oil) to the bowl and mix together gently.
  • Form into 6 patties that are about ½" thick.
  • Add the olive oil to a skillet over medium heat. Let the pan heat up for a few minutes, then fry the patties in two batches for about 3-4 minutes/side or until they're lightly browned on both sides. Add a splash more oil to the pan for the second batch if needed.
  • Serve warm. I love to serve these with tzatziki or remoulade sauce (or any garlicky mayo/aioli will work!) along with lemon wedges.

Notes

You can use cooked fresh salmon vs. canned salmon if you prefer (just pop a piece in the oven or use up leftover cooked salmon). As far as canned salmon goes, I prefer sockeye salmon as it has better color and flavor, in my opinion, but it can be harder to find. Pink salmon is easily available and will work for this recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 235kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 18gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 89mgSodium: 581mgPotassium: 279mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 195IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 217mgIron: 1mg
Keyword best salmon cake, recipe salmon cakes, salmon cake recipe, salmon patties
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Crockpot Pierogi Casserole With Kielbasa

May 24, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

There's something magical about coming home to the smell of comfort food cooking away in your crockpot. This Crockpot Pierogi Casserole with Kielbasa has become my go-to recipe when I want something hearty, delicious, and ridiculously easy to make.

I discovered this recipe on one of those crazy busy weekdays when Emily had soccer practice and I had absolutely no time to think about dinner. I threw some frozen pierogies, kielbasa, and cheese into my slow cooker, crossed my fingers, and hoped for the best. Six hours later? Pure magic happened in that crockpot! The creamy, cheesy goodness paired with smoky kielbasa created the most satisfying meal we'd had in weeks.

If you love hearty one-pot meals like this, you'll definitely want to try my kielbasa potato soup - it's another family favorite that combines those same comforting flavors in a totally different way.

Cheesy kielbasa pierogi casserole top view

Why You Will Love This Crockpot Pierogi Casserole With Kielbasa

  • Super easy prep - Just 10 minutes of hands-on time and your slow cooker does the rest
  • Perfect comfort food - Creamy, cheesy, and loaded with smoky kielbasa and pierogi flavors
  • Family-friendly - Even picky eaters can't resist this cheesy goodness
  • Great for meal prep - Makes excellent leftovers and freezes beautifully
  • Budget-friendly - Uses simple, affordable ingredients you can find anywhere
  • Hands-off cooking - Set it and forget it while you tackle your day

Ingredients For This Crockpot Pierogi Casserole

Creamy pierogi bake with sausage slices overhead

  • 3 packages Mrs. T's Cheddar Pierogies (frozen work perfectly!)
  • 4 cups chicken broth (divided - trust me on this)
  • 1 block (8 oz) cream cheese (the secret to ultimate creaminess)
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese, plus extra for topping
  • 1 pound kielbasa, sliced into rounds
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Green onions for garnish (optional but so pretty!)

The beauty of this pierogi casserole crock pot recipe is how simple the ingredient list is. No fancy stuff - just good, honest comfort food ingredients that work together perfectly.

How To Make Crockpot Pierogi Casserole With Kielbasa

Getting Started With Your Slow Cooker

  1. Step 1: Grab your 4-6 quart crockpot and add the frozen pierogies directly - no thawing needed!I love how this recipe doesn't require any pre-cooking. Just like my slow cooker creamy chicken and dumplings, everything goes straight into the pot.
  2. Step 2: Add your sliced kielbasa, 3 cups of chicken broth, and the cup of shredded cheddar cheese.
  3. Step 3: Give everything a gentle stir to distribute evenly. Don't worry if it looks like a lot - the pierogies will absorb so much of that delicious broth!

The Magic Happens Here

  1. Step 4: Cover and cook on high for 3-4 hours or low for 6 hours.I typically go with the low setting because I love coming home to that amazing aroma after a long day. The slow cooking really allows all those flavors to meld together beautifully.
  2. Step 5: About 30 minutes before serving time, warm the cream cheese with the remaining 1 cup of chicken broth.

You can do this in the microwave (about 1-2 minutes) or on the stovetop. Whisk it until smooth - this creates the most incredible creamy base for your crockpot pierogi casserole!

The Final Touch

  1. Step 6: Pour that smooth cream cheese mixture right into your crockpot and stir gently.
  2. Step 7: Sprinkle extra cheddar cheese on top, cover, and cook on low for another 30 minutes.This final step reminds me of making my crockpot marry me chicken - that last bit of cheese just takes everything over the top!
  3. Step 8: Serve hot with a sprinkle of chopped green onions if you're feeling fancy.
Golden-baked pierogi and sausage in white crockpot

Storage And Reheating Your Pierogi Casserole

This kielbasa and pierogi crock pot casserole keeps beautifully! Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to 3 days in an airtight container.

For longer storage, this casserole freezes wonderfully for up to 2 months. Just portion it into freezer-safe containers and you've got easy meals ready to go.

When reheating, I like to add a splash of chicken broth to keep everything creamy and delicious. The microwave works fine, but stovetop reheating gives you more control over the texture.

Cheddar kielbasa pierogi casserole in white crockpot

Creative Variations For Your Crockpot Pierogi Casserole

Make It Lighter: Use turkey kielbasa and reduced-fat cream cheese - still delicious but a bit healthier!

Veggie Boost: Add some frozen spinach or diced bell peppers during the last hour of cooking.

Cheese Lovers: Try mixing in some mozzarella or smoked gouda for different flavor profiles.

Spice It Up: A pinch of paprika or some diced jalapeños can add a nice kick.

Gluten-Free Option: Simply use gluten-free pierogies - the rest of the recipe stays exactly the same.

Just like my crock pot chicken alfredo, this recipe is super adaptable to whatever you have in your kitchen or whatever your family prefers.

Frequently Asked Questions About Crockpot Pierogi Casserole With Kielbasa

Do You Thaw Frozen Pierogies Before Cooking?

Nope! One of the best things about this pierogi slow cooker recipe is that you can toss those frozen pierogies right into the crockpot. No planning ahead required - which is perfect for those days when you forget to pull anything out of the freezer (happens to me all the time!).

What Goes With Pierogies And Kielbasa?

This casserole is pretty hearty on its own, but I love serving it with some sauerkraut on the side for that traditional Polish flavor combo. A simple green salad or some steamed broccoli adds a nice fresh contrast to all that creamy goodness. And honestly? A dollop of sour cream never hurt anyone!

What Sauce Goes With Pierogies And Sausage?

The creamy cheese sauce that develops in this recipe is absolutely perfect, but you can always serve extra sour cream, mustard, or even a bit of applesauce on the side. Emily loves dipping hers in ranch (kids, right?), and I won't judge if that's your thing too!

What's The Best Thing To Put On Perogies?

For this casserole, the melted cheddar and cream cheese create the most incredible coating for every pierogi. But traditional toppings like crispy bacon bits, caramelized onions, or fresh green onions work beautifully as garnishes. Sometimes I'll add some crispy fried onions on top just before serving - so good!

Recipes You May Like

  • Slow Cooker Round Steak And Gravy - Another hearty slow cooker comfort food that's perfect for busy weeknights
  • Crockpot Marry Me Chicken Pasta - Creamy, cheesy, and just as easy as this pierogi casserole
  • Old Fashioned Baked Macaroni And Cheese - For when you're craving that ultimate comfort food cheese fix

Final Thoughts On This Crockpot Pierogi Casserole

This Crockpot Pierogi Casserole with Kielbasa has honestly become one of my most-requested recipes. There's something so satisfying about a meal that requires almost no effort but delivers maximum comfort food vibes.

The combination of tender pierogies, smoky kielbasa, and that incredible creamy cheese sauce is just chef's kiss. Plus, knowing that I can throw everything in the crockpot in the morning and come home to dinner ready? That's what I call a win!

Give this recipe a try - I promise your family will be asking for it again and again. And don't forget to save this to Pinterest so you can find it easily when those busy weeknights roll around!

Pinterest CTA
Crockpot Pierogi Casserole with Kielbasa
pierogi and kielbasa crockpot
Pierogi casserole in white crockpot with melted cheese

Crockpot Pierogi Casserole with Kielbasa

This easy Crockpot Pierogi Casserole with Kielbasa is the ultimate comfort food! Creamy, cheesy, and packed with smoky kielbasa flavors. Just 10 minutes prep time and your slow cooker does all the work.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 6 hours hrs
Total Time 6 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Polish
Servings 4 servings
Calories 485 kcal

Equipment

  • 4-6 Quart Crockpot
  • Whisk

Ingredients
  

  • 3 packages Mrs. T's Cheddar Pierogies frozen
  • 4 cups chicken broth divided
  • 8 oz cream cheese 1 block
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese plus extra for topping
  • 1 pound kielbasa sliced
  • salt and pepper to taste
  • green onions for garnish, optional

Instructions
 

  • In a 4-6 quart crockpot, combine 3 cups of the chicken broth, frozen pierogies, sliced kielbasa, and 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese. Stir gently to distribute ingredients evenly.
  • Cover and cook on high for 3-4 hours or on low for 6 hours. The long cooking time allows flavors to develop and meld together beautifully.
  • About 30 minutes before the end of cooking time, warm the cream cheese with the remaining 1 cup of chicken broth in a microwave (1-2 minutes) or on stovetop until soft.
  • Whisk the cream cheese mixture until completely smooth and creamy.
  • Pour the smooth cream cheese mixture into the crockpot and stir gently to combine with the pierogi mixture.
  • Sprinkle extra shredded cheddar cheese over the top. Cover and cook on low for an additional 30 minutes until cheese melts.
  • Serve hot, garnished with sliced green onions if desired. Season with salt and pepper to taste.

Notes

Storage: Store leftovers in refrigerator for up to 3 days or freeze for up to 2 months. Reheat with a splash of broth to maintain creaminess.
Variations: Try turkey kielbasa for a lighter option, add frozen spinach or bell peppers for extra veggies, or experiment with different cheese combinations like mozzarella or smoked gouda.
Tips: No need to thaw frozen pierogies - they go straight into the crockpot! The cream cheese mixture is key to achieving that ultra-creamy texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 485kcalCarbohydrates: 42gProtein: 22gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 12gCholesterol: 75mgSodium: 1250mgPotassium: 420mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 280IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 185mgIron: 2.1mg
Keyword crockpot pierogi casserole, crockpot pierogi casserole with kielbasa, kielbasa and pierogi crock pot, pierogi crock pot, pierogi slow cooker
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

One Pot Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup

May 23, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

When I first discovered this cheeseburger macaroni soup recipe, I thought it sounded too good to be true – all the comfort of a classic cheeseburger and creamy mac and cheese in one bowl?

But let me tell you, after making this for my family countless times (and watching Emily go back for seconds and thirds!), this has become our go-to comfort food soup.

I remember the first time I made this during a particularly busy week when I needed something hearty that wouldn't require multiple pots and pans.

The beauty of this recipe is that everything cooks in one pot, which means less cleanup and more time to actually enjoy dinner with the family.

Plus, who doesn't love the combination of ground beef, elbow macaroni, and melted cheddar cheese all swimming in a rich, creamy broth?

Speaking of hearty one-pot soups, if you're looking for another satisfying option, you'll absolutely love my kielbasa potato soup – it's another family favorite that delivers maximum comfort with minimal effort.

Why You Will Love This Hearty Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

Bright bowl of cheeseburger soup with carrots

  • Quick and easy - Ready in just 30 minutes from start to finish
  • One pot wonder - Everything cooks in a single pot for easy cleanup
  • Kid-friendly - Combines all the flavors kids already love
  • Hearty and filling - Perfect for cold nights when you need something substantial
  • Customizable - Easy to add your favorite cheeseburger toppings
  • Budget-friendly - Uses simple, affordable ingredients you probably have on hand

Simple Ingredients For Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

For The Soup:

  • 1 lb. ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano, divided
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme, divided
  • 6 tablespoons butter
  • 1 cup yellow onion, diced
  • 1 cup sliced carrots
  • 1 cup sliced celery
  • 5 cloves garlic, minced
  • 4 tablespoons flour
  • 8 cups chicken broth
  • 8 oz. uncooked elbow macaroni
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 8 oz. sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
  • 1 teaspoon white balsamic vinegar
  • Kosher salt
  • Fresh cracked pepper

For The Croutons:

  • 4 sesame seed buns, diced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

Garnish:

  • Sliced green onion
  • Additional shredded cheddar cheese
Bowl of creamy cheeseburger macaroni soup

Step By Step Instructions For Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

Preparing The Sesame Seed Croutons

  1. Heat your oven to 400 degrees.
  2. Place the sesame seed bun cubes in a single layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet.
  3. Drizzle with olive oil and toss to coat evenly.
  4. Bake for 10 minutes or until they're golden and crispy on the outside.

Cooking The Ground Beef

  1. Heat a large pot over medium heat.
  2. Add the ground beef, 1 teaspoon of dried oregano, 1 teaspoon of dried thyme, and a couple pinches of salt and pepper.
  3. Brown the ground beef, crumbling it with a spatula until it's cooked through.
  4. Remove from the pan and set aside.
Ground beef cooked in Dutch oven
Sauteed carrots celery and onion in pot

Building The Soup Base

  1. Heat 6 tablespoons of butter in the same large pot over medium heat (no need to wipe it out or drain the grease – that's where all the flavor is!).
  2. Add the diced onion, sliced carrots, sliced celery, and a large pinch of salt and pepper.
  3. Turn the heat to medium-high and cook, stirring occasionally, for 10 minutes.

Adding The Aromatics

  1. Reduce the heat to medium and add the minced garlic, remaining 1 teaspoon oregano, and remaining 1 teaspoon thyme.
  2. Cook for another minute until fragrant.
  3. Add the flour and stir to coat all the veggies.
  4. Cook for one more minute, stirring frequently to prevent burning.

Creating The Broth

  1. Add a splash of chicken broth to deglaze the pot, scraping up all those yummy browned bits from the bottom.
  2. Stir in the rest of the chicken broth and the uncooked macaroni noodles, along with another pinch of salt and pepper.
  3. Turn the heat to medium-high and bring to a simmer.
Macaroni added to herbed broth
Cheddar and cream added to soup base

Cooking The Pasta

  1. Once it begins to simmer, turn the heat to low and simmer for 5-7 minutes, or until the pasta is al dente.
  2. Stir occasionally to prevent the noodles from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

Finishing The Soup

  1. Remove the soup from heat.
  2. Stir in the heavy cream and shredded cheese until everything is melted and combined.
  3. Add the white balsamic vinegar and the cooked ground beef back into the pot.
  4. Heat the soup over medium heat for a couple of minutes until the beef is heated through.
  5. Season to taste with salt and pepper, then serve with those crispy sesame seed bun croutons and garnish with green onions and extra shredded cheddar cheese!
Cooked beef on creamy soup in Dutch oven
Finished soup garnished with cheese and onions

Storage & Reheating Your Delicious Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

Keep in mind that this macaroni cheeseburger soup will thicken considerably as it sits because the noodles continue to absorb the liquid.

When reheating, warm the soup in a saucepan over medium heat, stirring frequently.

You'll likely need to add a splash of broth or cream to loosen it back up to your desired consistency.

Season with salt and pepper before serving, as the flavors can mellow during storage.

Soup bowl with beef pasta and cheddar

Pro Tips For The Best Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

Shred your own cheese – I can't stress this enough!

Pre-shredded cheese is coated with cellulose to prevent clumping, which also prevents it from melting smoothly.

Taking those extra few minutes to shred your own sharp cheddar makes all the difference in texture.

Don't skip the deglazing step – Those browned bits at the bottom of the pot after cooking the beef and vegetables are pure flavor gold.

Make sure to scrape them up when you add that first splash of broth.

Watch your pasta timing – The elbow macaroni will continue cooking even after you remove the pot from heat, so aim for just barely al dente when you're ready to add the cream and cheese.

Have you ever tried making soup with pasta cooked directly in the broth? It's a game-changer for flavor absorption!

If you're planning to make this ahead of time, consider cooking the pasta separately and adding it just before serving to maintain the best texture.

Similar to my chicken pot pie soup, the noodles can get a bit mushy if they sit too long in the liquid.

Creamy macaroni soup topped with green onions

Variations For Your Cheeseburger Mac Soup

Want to switch things up? Here are some of my favorite additions:

  • Crispy bacon pieces for extra smokiness
  • Diced pickles for that classic cheeseburger tang
  • Fresh chopped parsley for a pop of color and freshness
  • Pepper jack cheese instead of cheddar for some heat
  • Diced tomatoes for a fresh veggie boost
  • Sour cream swirled in at the end for extra richness

The beauty of this recipe is how adaptable it is to your family's preferences!

Frequently Asked Questions About Cheeseburger Macaroni Soup

How to make hamburger soup with macaroni?

Brown ground beef with seasonings in a large pot. Remove the beef, then sauté your vegetables (onion, carrots, celery) in the same pot.
Add flour to thicken, then gradually stir in chicken broth and uncooked elbow macaroni.
Simmer until the pasta is al dente, then stir in cream and cheese for that creamy cheeseburger flavor.

Do you have to cook macaroni before adding to soup?

No! One of the best parts about this one pot macaroni cheeseburger soup is that you add the uncooked elbow macaroni directly to the simmering broth.
Cook it for 5-7 minutes until al dente. This method allows the pasta to absorb all those delicious flavors while it cooks.

What is cheeseburger soup made of?

This cheeseburger macaroni soup combines ground beef, classic soup vegetables (onion, carrots, celery), chicken broth, elbow macaroni, heavy cream, and sharp cheddar cheese.
The seasonings include oregano, thyme, garlic, and a touch of white balsamic vinegar for brightness. It's essentially all the flavors of a cheeseburger and mac and cheese in soup form!

How do I keep noodles from getting mushy in soup?

Cook the pasta just until al dente, then immediately remove the soup from heat before adding the cream and cheese. For leftovers, the noodles will continue to absorb liquid and soften.
If you're meal prepping, consider cooking the pasta separately and adding it when you reheat individual portions.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving this comforting cheeseburger soup with macaroni, you'll definitely want to try these other hearty favorites:

  • Best Marry Me Chicken Soup Recipe - Another creamy, one-pot wonder that's perfect for busy weeknights
  • Tuscan White Bean And Kale Soup - A healthier but equally satisfying soup option
  • Bacon Cheeseburger Soup Recipe - If you love this recipe, you'll go crazy for the bacon version!

Final Thoughts

This one pot macaroni cheeseburger soup has honestly become one of our most-requested meals around here. Emily asks for it at least once a week, and I don't blame her – it's pure comfort food magic!

The combination of hearty ground beef, tender vegetables, creamy cheese, and perfectly cooked macaroni creates something that's way more than the sum of its parts. Plus, the fact that it all comes together in one pot means I can have dinner on the table in 30 minutes without creating a mountain of dishes.

I hope your family loves this cheeseburger macaroni soup as much as mine does. Don't forget to make those sesame seed croutons – they really do make it feel like you're eating a deconstructed cheeseburger! Save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it easily when you need a quick, satisfying dinner solution.

Pinterest CTA
Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup
One-Pot Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup
Bowl of cheeseburger soup with gold spoon

One Pot Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup

This hearty cheeseburger macaroni soup combines all the comfort of a classic cheeseburger and creamy mac and cheese in one satisfying bowl. Ready in just 30 minutes with minimal cleanup required!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Main Dish
Cuisine American
Servings 8 servings
Calories 465 kcal

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven
  • Measuring cups

Ingredients
  

For The Soup

  • 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano divided
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme divided
  • 6 tablespoons butter
  • 1 cup yellow onion diced
  • 1 cup sliced carrots
  • 1 cup sliced celery
  • 5 cloves garlic minced
  • 4 tablespoons flour
  • 8 cups chicken broth
  • 8 oz uncooked elbow macaroni
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 8 oz sharp cheddar cheese shredded
  • 1 teaspoon white balsamic vinegar
  • Kosher salt to taste
  • fresh cracked pepper to taste

For The Croutons

  • 4 sesame seed buns diced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

Garnish

  • sliced green onion for garnish
  • shredded cheddar cheese for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Heat oven to 400 degrees. Place sesame seed bun cubes in a single layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet. Drizzle with olive oil and toss to coat evenly. Bake for 10 minutes or until crispy on the outside.
  • Heat a large pot over medium heat. Add 1 pound ground beef, 1 teaspoon of dried oregano, 1 teaspoon of dried thyme, and a couple pinches of salt and pepper. Brown ground beef, crumbling with a spatula until cooked through. Remove from pan and set aside.
  • Heat 6 tablespoons of butter in the same large pot over medium heat (no need to wipe it out or drain the grease).
  • Add 1 cup diced onion, 1 cup sliced carrots, 1 cup sliced celery, and a large pinch of salt and pepper. Turn heat to medium-high and cook, stirring occasionally for 10 minutes.
  • Reduce heat to medium and add 5 cloves minced garlic, the remaining 1 teaspoon oregano, and the remaining 1 teaspoon thyme, and cook for another minute.
  • Then add 4 tablespoons flour and stir to coat veggies. Cook for one more minute, stirring frequently.
  • Add a splash of chicken broth to deglaze the pot, scraping all the yummy bits off the bottom.
  • Stir in the rest of the 8 cups of chicken broth and 8 oz. of uncooked macaroni noodles along with another pinch of salt and pepper. Turn heat to medium-high, and bring to a simmer.
  • Once it begins to simmer, turn the heat to low and simmer for 5-7 minutes or pasta is al dente. Stir occasionally to prevent noodles from sticking to the bottom of the pot.
  • Remove soup from heat. Stir in 1 cup of heavy cream and 8 oz. of shredded cheese.
  • Then add 1 teaspoon of white balsamic vinegar. Add cooked ground beef back into the pot. Heat the soup over medium heat for a couple minutes, until the beef is heated through. Season to taste with salt and pepper.
  • Serve soup with sesame seed bun croutons and garnish with green onions and shredded cheddar cheese and enjoy!

Notes

Shred your own cheese: Freshly shredded cheese melts better and will give you a smoother texture. Pre-shredded cheeses are coated in cellulose which helps prevent them from clumping but also means they won't melt as well.
Soup will thicken: This cheeseburger chowder will thicken as it cools. Feel free to add an extra splash or two of broth or cream to loosen it up.
Make ahead tip: If making ahead, consider cooking noodles separately and combining just before serving to prevent mushy pasta.

Nutrition

Calories: 465kcalCarbohydrates: 31.3gProtein: 25.7gFat: 26.3gCholesterol: 106.8mgSodium: 1175.7mgFiber: 2.2gSugar: 4.3g
Keyword cheeseburger macaroni soup, cheeseburger soup, cheeseburger soup with macaroni, Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup, One Pot Macaroni Cheeseburger Soup, One-Pot, soup
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Grandma's Ground Beef Casserole Recipe

May 21, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Have you ever needed a dinner that's both comforting and super easy to throw together? This ground beef casserole recipe has been my go-to for years! It's one of those meals that makes me feel like a kitchen superhero even when I'm running on empty. The combination of savory beef, creamy cheese, and tender noodles creates something magical that my daughter Emily requests at least once a week.

I still remember the first time I made this casserole. Emily was having a rough day at school, and I wanted to make something that would feel like a warm hug on a plate. This casserole did exactly that! Now it's our official "bad day buster" meal. If you're looking for another hearty beef dish, my Healthy Beef Stroganoff is another family favorite that's just as comforting but with a lighter touch.

Why You Will Like This Ground Beef Casserole

  • Ready in just 40 minutes from start to finish
  • Uses simple pantry ingredients you probably already have
  • Perfect for busy weeknights when you're short on time
  • Freezes beautifully for meal prep
  • Creamy, cheesy comfort food that kids and adults both love
  • Easily customizable with your favorite add-ins
Ground beef casserole with melted cheese and parsley

Ingredients For This Beef Casserole Recipe

  • 2 cans (15 oz. each) tomato sauce
  • 1 large white onion, diced
  • 1 package (8 oz.) egg noodles
  • 1 cup sour cream
  • 1 package (3 oz.) cream cheese
  • 1 lb. ground beef
  • ½ cup shredded sharp Cheddar cheese, or more to taste (I always add more!)
  • 1 teaspoon garlic salt
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon white sugar

Instructions For Making This Ground Beef Casserole

Preparing The Meat Sauce

  1. Heat a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the ground beef and cook until browned and crumbly, about 5-7 minutes. Drain excess grease.
  2. Stir in garlic salt, salt, and tomato sauce. Mix until well combined, then simmer for about 20 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove the skillet from heat and cover.
  3. While the sauce simmers, preheat your oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C) and grease a 9x13-inch casserole dish with cooking spray.

Cooking The Pasta

  1. In a large pot, bring salted water to a boil. Cook the egg noodles until al dente according to package directions (usually about 5-6 minutes).
  2. Drain and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process. This prevents the noodles from getting mushy in the casserole.
Cheesy baked casserole with golden top

Assembling The Casserole

  1. In a mixing bowl, combine diced onion, sour cream, and cream cheese until smooth. This creamy mixture is what makes this casserole so incredibly rich!
  2. Layer half of the noodles in the bottom of the prepared casserole dish. Top with half of the sour cream mixture, then half of the beef mixture. Repeat layers.
  3. Sprinkle the top generously with Cheddar cheese. (This is where I get a bit carried away – can you ever have too much cheese? I think not!)

Baking The Casserole

  1. Bake in the preheated oven for about 25 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and bubbly and the edges are slightly crispy.
  2. Remove from the oven, let it sit for about 5 minutes (if you can wait that long!), then serve warm and enjoy!

Recipe Highlights And Tips

The secret to making this ground beef casserole recipe truly amazing is in the details. Here are some tips I've picked up after making this dish approximately one million times (okay, maybe not that many, but close!):

Hot casserole with bubbling cheese and herbs

Sauce Tips

For the best flavor, use high-quality tomato sauce. I've tried many brands, and honestly, the difference is noticeable! The pasta will absorb some of the sauce during baking and even while stored, so don't worry if it seems a bit saucy at first.

Sometimes I add a splash of red wine to the sauce while it simmers. It's totally optional, but it adds such a nice depth of flavor. (Just a splash for the sauce, a glass for the cook – that's my rule!)

Cheese Recommendations

I'm a firm believer that cheese makes everything better, especially in a beef casserole recipe. Sharp cheddar gives the best flavor punch, but feel free to experiment! A mixture of cheddar and mozzarella creates the most amazing cheese pull when you serve it.

Always shred your own cheese from a block if possible – pre-shredded cheese has anti-caking agents that can affect how it melts.

Pasta Options

While egg noodles are my go-to for this recipe, you can absolutely substitute with penne, ziti, or rigatoni. Each gives a slightly different texture, but they all work wonderfully.

The key is to cook the pasta just until al dente – it will continue cooking in the oven, and no one likes mushy pasta!

Meat Variations

This casserole is super versatile! Besides ground beef, you can use:

  • Ground turkey for a lighter option
  • Italian sausage for extra flavor
  • A mix of beef and pork for richness

I've tried all these variations when I'm in the mood for something different, and they're all delicious in their own way.

Vegetable Add-Ins

Want to sneak in some extra veggies? I've successfully added:

  • Diced green bell peppers or mushrooms (sauté them with the onions)
  • Frozen mixed vegetables (add them to the meat mixture)
  • Fresh spinach (wilt it into the sauce at the end of cooking)

Emily doesn't always notice the extra veggies, which counts as a major mom win in my book!

Flavor Boosters

For an unexpected flavor boost, try adding:

  • A teaspoon of mustard powder
  • A few dashes of hot sauce (my personal favorite trick!)
  • Italian seasoning or fresh herbs

These little additions don't overpower the dish but add a "what makes this so good?" element that keeps everyone coming back for seconds.

Casserole with beef cheese and red peppers

Make-Ahead Tips For Ground Beef Casserole

As a busy mom, make-ahead meals are my lifeline. This ground beef casserole recipe works perfectly for meal prep:

One Day in Advance

You can assemble the entire casserole, cover it with foil, and refrigerate overnight. When you're ready to eat, just pop it in the oven! You might need to add 5-10 minutes to the baking time since it's starting cold.

Freezer Instructions

This casserole freezes beautifully! Assemble it, cover tightly with foil and plastic wrap, and freeze for up to three months. I like to add a bit of extra sauce when I know I'm freezing it, as the pasta tends to absorb more moisture during the freezing/thawing process.

Thaw in the refrigerator for 24 hours before baking as directed. If you're in a hurry, you can bake from frozen – just keep it covered with foil until the last 15 minutes, and plan for about double the baking time.

Serving Suggestions

This casserole is pretty hearty on its own, but I love to round out the meal with:

  • A simple green salad with a light vinaigrette
  • Steamed broccoli or green beans
  • Garlic bread or dinner rolls (for sopping up that amazing sauce!)

My daughter's favorite way to eat this is with a side of garlic bread and extra cheese sprinkled on top. The girl knows what's good!

Storing Leftovers

If you're lucky enough to have leftovers (we rarely do!), they store beautifully:

  • Refrigerate in an airtight container for 3-4 days
  • Reheat individual portions in the microwave for 1-2 minutes
  • For larger portions, reheat in the oven at 350°F for 15-20 minutes

The flavors actually develop overnight, so don't be surprised if the leftovers taste even better the next day!

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoy this ground beef casserole recipe, you might also want to try these other beef dishes from my blog:

  • Cheesy Ground Beef Quesadillas - Another quick and easy way to use ground beef!
  • Beef and Tomato Stew - Perfect for colder months when you need something warming.
  • Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs - A fun twist on burgers that kids absolutely love.

FAQ About This Ground Beef Casserole Recipe

What's an easy casserole to make?

This ground beef casserole is incredibly easy to make! With just 15 minutes of prep time and 25 minutes of baking, you'll have a delicious meal ready in 40 minutes total. The simple layering process makes it foolproof even for beginners.

How do you make a casserole taste better?

For the best flavor in this ground beef casserole, use high-quality marinara sauce (like Rao's), shred your own whole milk mozzarella cheese, add flavor boosters like mustard powder or Frank's Hot Sauce, and consider mix-ins like green bell peppers or mushrooms for extra depth.

What to do with ground beef?

This versatile ground beef casserole is a perfect solution! The beef combines wonderfully with egg noodles, tomato sauce, and a creamy mixture of sour cream, cream cheese, and cheddar for a hearty, satisfying meal that pairs well with a simple side salad and bread.

Can I make this casserole ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can assemble this ground beef casserole one day in advance and refrigerate, or freeze it for up to three months. When freezing, add extra sauce before baking and allow it to thaw in the refrigerator for 24 hours before cooking for best results.

Conclusion

This ground beef casserole recipe might not be fancy, but it's the kind of reliable, comforting dish that earns a permanent spot in your recipe collection. It's saved my dinner plans countless times, and I'm betting it will do the same for you!

What I love most about casseroles like this is how they bring everyone to the table with smiles on their faces. There's something about that bubbling cheese and hearty filling that just makes everything better.

If you try this recipe, I'd love to know what you think! And don't forget to save it to Pinterest for later – trust me, you'll want to make this one again and again.

Pinterest CTA
Grandmother’s Classic Ground Beef Casserole recipe
Ground Beef Casserole
Grandmother’s Classic Ground Beef Casserole

Ground Beef Casserole

This easy ground beef casserole recipe combines savory meat, creamy cheese, and tender noodles for a quick family dinner ready in 40 minutes. It's my family's go-to comfort food!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 25 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine American
Servings 6 servings
Calories 462 kcal

Equipment

  • 9x13-inch Casserole Dish
  • Large Skillet
  • Large Pot
  • Mixing Bowl

Ingredients
  

Casserole Ingredients

  • 2 cans tomato sauce 15 oz. each
  • 1 large white onion diced
  • 1 package egg noodles 8 oz.
  • 1 cup sour cream
  • 1 package cream cheese 3 oz.
  • 1 lb ground beef
  • ½ cup shredded sharp Cheddar cheese or more to taste
  • 1 teaspoon garlic salt
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon white sugar

Instructions
 

  • Heat a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the ground beef and cook until browned and crumbly, about 5-7 minutes. Drain excess grease.
  • Stir in garlic salt, salt, and tomato sauce. Mix until well combined, then simmer for about 20 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove the skillet from heat and cover.
  • In a large pot, bring salted water to a boil. Cook the egg noodles until al dente according to package directions (usually about 5-6 minutes).
  • Drain the noodles and rinse with cold water to stop the cooking process.
  • Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Grease a 9x13-inch casserole dish with cooking spray.
  • In a mixing bowl, combine diced onion, sour cream, and cream cheese until smooth.
  • Layer half of the noodles in the bottom of the casserole dish. Top with half of the sour cream mixture, then half of the beef mixture. Repeat layers.
  • Sprinkle the top generously with Cheddar cheese.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for about 25 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and bubbly and the edges are slightly crispy.
  • Remove from the oven, let it sit for about 5 minutes, then serve warm and enjoy!

Notes

For the best flavor, use high-quality tomato sauce and shred your own cheese rather than using pre-packaged. Don't skip the simmering time for the meat sauce – those 20 minutes develop so much flavor!
Make-ahead tip: You can assemble this casserole one day in advance and refrigerate, or freeze it for up to three months. When freezing, add extra sauce before baking and allow to thaw in the refrigerator for 24 hours before cooking.
For variations, try using ground turkey for a lighter option or adding vegetables like diced bell peppers, mushrooms, or spinach.

Nutrition

Calories: 462kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 24gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 14gCholesterol: 112mgSodium: 1245mgPotassium: 624mgFiber: 3gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 680IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 193mgIron: 3.2mg
Keyword Casserole, easy dinner, ground beef, Ground Beef Casserole
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Hearty Kielbasa Potato Soup Recipe

May 21, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Do you ever crave a bowl of soup that's filling enough to be a meal on its own? This kielbasa potato soup is exactly what you need! It's rich, creamy, and packed with smoky sausage flavor that makes it so much more exciting than your average potato soup. I've been making this soup for years, and it's become one of Emily's favorite dinners when the weather turns chilly.

If you enjoy hearty soup recipes, you might also love my Tuscan White Bean and Kale Soup which has a similar cozy vibe but with completely different flavors. Both are perfect for those nights when you want something substantial but don't want to spend hours in the kitchen!

Why You Will Like This Kielbasa Potato Soup

Rustic bowl of sausage potato soup with carrots and herbs

  • Ready in just 40 minutes from start to finish
  • Hearty enough to be a complete meal
  • The smoky kielbasa adds amazing depth of flavor
  • Creamy without being too heavy
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have
  • Great for meal prep and weeknight dinners
  • Kid-friendly (Emily gives it two thumbs up!)
  • Perfect balance of protein, carbs, and veggies

Ingredients For This Potato and Kielbasa Soup

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 300g (10.5 oz) kielbasa sausage, cut into bite-size pieces
  • 1 medium onion, diced
  • 1 medium carrot, diced
  • 2 celery ribs, diced
  • 4 garlic cloves, finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon red chili flakes (adjust to your spice preference)
  • 750g (1½ lb) potatoes, peeled and cubed
  • 1.25 liters (5 cups) chicken stock
  • 300ml (1¼ cups) full-fat milk
  • 100g (3.5 oz) cheddar cheese, grated
  • 30g (½ cup) fresh parsley, roughly chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste
Steamy sausage potato soup in a dark ceramic bowl with herbS

How To Make The Best Kielbasa Potato Soup

Preparing The Base

  1. Heat the olive oil in a large pot or Dutch oven over medium heat. Add the kielbasa pieces and cook for 4-5 minutes until they develop a slight crisp on the edges. Remove the sausage with a slotted spoon and set aside. (I love how the kielbasa leaves behind its flavorful oils - this is where the magic begins!)
  2. In the same pot with the leftover oils, add the diced onion, carrot, and celery. Cook for about 5 minutes until the vegetables soften.
  3. Add the chopped garlic and red chili flakes, stirring for another minute until fragrant. (Your kitchen will smell amazing at this point - I always take a moment to appreciate these aromas!)
Diced vegetables with red pepper flakes in a Dutch oven
Cubed potatoes carrots and celery simmering in a pot

Adding Potatoes And Building Flavor

  1. Add the cubed potatoes and chicken stock to the pot. Bring everything to a boil, then reduce to a simmer. Cover with a lid and let cook for 10-12 minutes, or until the potatoes are fork-tender. (Don't overcook the potatoes or they'll fall apart completely - unless that's what you're going for!)
  2. Take a ladle of the hot soup and mix it with the milk in a measuring cup or bowl. This tempers the milk so it doesn't curdle when added to the hot soup. Pour this mixture back into the pot.
  3. Return the crispy kielbasa pieces to the soup and stir everything together.
Creamy cheese soup with sliced sausage in a teal-handled pot recipe
Finished kielbasa soup with parsley in a cream Dutch oven

Creating The Creamy Finish

  1. Add the grated cheddar cheese and stir until it's completely melted into the soup. (This is what makes the soup so luxurious - don't skimp on the cheese!)
  2. Let the soup simmer for 2-3 more minutes until it thickens slightly, then stir in the chopped parsley.
  3. Season with salt and pepper to taste. Remember that the kielbasa and chicken stock already contain salt, so taste before adding more.
  4. Serve in bowls with extra grated cheese on top if desired. A side of crusty bread makes this the perfect meal!

Storage And Reheating Tips For Your Soup

This polish sausage potato soup keeps well in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container. The flavors actually get better the next day, making it perfect for meal prep!

You can reheat it on the stovetop over medium-low heat until warmed through, or portion it into microwave-safe bowls for quick lunches.

I don't recommend freezing this soup because the milk-based broth may separate and have an odd texture once thawed. But honestly, it rarely lasts long enough in our house to worry about freezing!

Hearty potato sausage soup garnished with parsley in a blue bowl

Recipe Notes And Helpful Tips

  • If you want a thicker, creamier soup, mash some of the potatoes with the back of your spoon or a potato masher. I sometimes do this when Emily requests "super creamy soup night."
  • Feel free to add more kielbasa if you're a meat lover! My husband always sneaks in extra when he's helping with dinner.
  • For a lighter version, you can substitute half-and-half or 2% milk, but the soup won't be quite as rich.
  • Yellow or Yukon Gold potatoes work best in this recipe because they have a buttery flavor and hold their shape well.
  • If you like a bit more heat, increase the red chili flakes or add a dash of hot sauce at the end.
  • This soup pairs wonderfully with a simple green salad and crusty bread for a complete meal.
  • Don't skip the step of browning the kielbasa first - it adds so much flavor to the entire dish!

Frequently Asked Questions About Kielbasa Soup

Can you use kielbasa in soup?

Absolutely! Kielbasa adds rich, smoky flavor to soups. It holds up well during cooking and provides protein and delicious flavor to hearty soups like this potato soup recipe.

What can I add to my potato soup to make it more flavorful?

To enhance potato soup flavor, add ingredients like cheddar cheese, red chili flakes, fresh herbs (especially parsley), or increase the amount of kielbasa. Using full-fat milk also contributes to a richer taste profile.

What thickens potato soup?

This potato soup thickens naturally from the starch in the potatoes. For extra thickness, you can mash some potato pieces with the back of a spoon or use a potato masher as suggested in the recipe notes.

What side dishes go with kielbasa soup?

Crusty bread, garlic toast, a simple green salad, or a grilled cheese sandwich pair wonderfully with this hearty kielbasa potato soup. These sides complement the rich, savory flavors of the soup.

How to doctor up potato soup?

Customize this potato soup by adding extra toppings like crispy bacon bits, sour cream, extra cheese, green onions, or croutons. You can also incorporate different herbs or increase the spice level with more red chili flakes.

Recipes You May Like

  • Healthy Chicken Pot Pie Soup - Another creamy, comforting soup that's a bit lighter but still satisfying
  • Bacon Cheeseburger Soup Recipe - If you love this kielbasa soup, you'll adore this indulgent burger-inspired soup!
  • Slow Cooker Creamy Chicken and Dumplings - Another hearty, comforting meal that's perfect for chilly evenings

Final Thoughts On This Cozy Soup

This kielbasa potato soup has saved dinner at our house more times than I can count! It's the perfect balance of hearty and comforting without being too heavy. The smoky kielbasa adds such a wonderful depth that you just don't get with other potato soups.

What I love most is how versatile it is - you can add different vegetables depending on what you have in the fridge, adjust the spice level to your liking, or make it extra cheesy for those indulgent days.

Have you ever tried adding kielbasa to your potato soup? I'd love to hear how you customize this recipe in the comments below!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for later - your future self will thank you on a cold winter evening when you're craving something delicious and comforting!

Pinterest CTA
Kielbasa Potato Soup
Kielbasa Potato Soup recipe
Creamy kielbasa potato soup in a dark bowl with chopped parsley

Hearty Kielbasa Potato Soup

This hearty kielbasa potato soup combines smoky sausage with creamy potatoes for the ultimate comfort food! Ready in just 40 minutes with simple ingredients.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Main Course, Soup
Cuisine American, Polish
Servings 6 servings
Calories 491 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Pot or Dutch Oven
  • Slotted spoon
  • Measuring cups and spoons

Ingredients
  

Soup Base

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 300 g kielbasa sausage cut into bite-size pieces
  • 1 medium onion diced
  • 1 medium carrot diced
  • 2 celery ribs diced
  • 4 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon red chili flakes adjust to taste
  • 750 g potatoes peeled and cubed
  • 1.25 liters chicken stock

Creamy Additions

  • 300 ml full-fat milk
  • 100 g cheddar cheese grated, plus extra for serving
  • 30 g fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • salt and pepper to taste

Instructions
 

  • Heat the olive oil in a large pot or Dutch oven and fry the kielbasa for 4-5 minutes over medium heat until slightly crispy. Remove the sausage with a slotted spoon and set it aside.
  • Add the onion, carrot and celery to the same oil you cooked the kielbasa in and cook for 5 minutes until softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and red chili flakes and continue to cook for another minute until fragrant.
  • Add the potatoes and chicken stock to the pot and bring to a boil. Lower the heat and simmer for 10-12 minutes, covered with a lid, until the potatoes are fork-tender.
  • Take a ladle of soup and mix it with the milk in a measuring jug or bowl to temper it. Pour the mixture into the pot, then add the cooked kielbasa.
  • Add the cheddar cheese and stir until completely melted.
  • Simmer the soup for 2-3 more minutes until it thickens some more, then stir in the parsley. Season to taste, then divide into bowls and serve with extra grated cheddar on top if you like.

Notes

If you want to make the soup creamier, you can mash some of the potatoes with the back of your spoon or using a potato masher.
Feel free to add more kielbasa if you want.
This polish sausage potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
You can reheat it on the stovetop or in the microwave.
I don't recommend freezing this soup because the milk-based broth may have an odd texture once thawed.

Nutrition

Calories: 491kcalCarbohydrates: 43gProtein: 21gFat: 27gSaturated Fat: 10gCholesterol: 64mgSodium: 1049mgFiber: 4gSugar: 10g
Keyword Kielbasa, Kielbasa Potato Soup, Kielbasa Potato Soup recipe, Potato Soup, soup recipe
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

May 19, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Have you ever craved a cheeseburger but wanted something a little more fun to eat? These garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs are the answer to your prayers! They're cheesy, garlicky bundles of joy that will have everyone reaching for seconds.

I made these for Emily's birthday party last weekend, and let me tell you - they disappeared faster than I could put them on the table! The combination of melty cheese, savory beef, and buttery biscuit dough is absolutely irresistible.

For more crowd-pleasing party food that everyone will love, check out my cheesy ground beef quesadillas - they're another favorite at our house for gatherings!

Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

Let me show you how to make these delicious cheeseburger bombs that will have your family begging for more! These handheld treats pack all the flavor of a restaurant-quality burger into a convenient, portable package.

Plate of garlic cheeseburger bombs

Why You Will Like This Recipe

  • Perfectly portioned - each bomb is a complete bite of cheesy goodness
  • Ready in just 30 minutes from start to finish
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have
  • Kid-approved (Emily couldn't stop eating them!)
  • Great for parties, game days, or easy weeknight dinners
  • The garlic and parmesan add an amazing flavor boost to regular cheeseburgers

Why These Are Better Than Regular Burgers

These little bombs beat regular burgers hands down! All the flavor is wrapped in a neat package with no mess, making everyone happy.

The perfect golden outside with a gooey, cheesy inside creates pure comfort food that's easier to serve and enjoy than traditional burgers.

No more toppings falling out or buns getting soggy - everything stays perfectly contained in these bite-sized bombs!

Melted cheeseburger bomb split open

Ingredients for Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 2 cloves garlic, minced
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese, grated
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese, cubed
  • 1 can (16.3 oz) refrigerated biscuit dough
  • 2 tablespoons butter, melted
  • 1 tablespoon parsley, chopped
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning (optional, but adds nice flavor!)

Tools You'll Need

  • Skillet
  • Baking sheet
  • Parchment paper
  • Mixing bowl
  • Pastry brush

Instructions for Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

Preparing the Filling

  1. Preheat your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Heat a skillet over medium heat. Add the ground beef and cook until it's no longer pink, breaking it up with a wooden spoon as it cooks.
  3. When the beef is almost done, add the minced garlic and cook for another minute until fragrant. (This keeps the garlic from burning but still releases all that delicious flavor!)
  4. Remove the skillet from heat and drain any excess fat.
  5. Return the skillet to low heat and stir in the grated Parmesan cheese until melted and well combined with the beef mixture.
  6. Season with salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning if using. Stir well and set aside to cool slightly.

Assembling the Bombs

  1. Open the can of biscuit dough and separate into individual biscuits.
  2. Take one biscuit and flatten it with your hands or a rolling pin until it's about 4 inches in diameter. (Don't worry if it's not perfectly round - mine never are!)
  3. Place about 1 tablespoon of the beef mixture in the center of the flattened biscuit.
  4. Add a cube of cheddar cheese right in the middle of the beef mixture.
  5. Carefully bring the edges of the biscuit dough up and around the filling, pinching the edges together to seal completely. You want to make sure there are no openings where cheese could leak out during baking!
  6. Place the sealed bomb, seam side down, on the prepared baking sheet.
  7. Repeat with remaining biscuits and filling, spacing the bombs about 2 inches apart on the baking sheet.

Baking the Bombs

  1. In a small bowl, mix the melted butter with half of the chopped parsley.
  2. Brush the tops of each bomb with the butter mixture.
  3. Bake in the preheated oven for 12-15 minutes, or until the bombs are golden brown on top.
  4. Remove from the oven and let cool for 5 minutes (I know it's hard to wait, but the filling is super hot!)
  5. Sprinkle with remaining parsley and serve warm.
Close-up of cheeseburger bomb with crispy top

Make Them Right

  • Cook meat thoroughly for food safety - no pink meat for these bombs!
  • Seal edges completely to prevent cheese leakage - nobody wants a cheese explosion in their oven.
  • Give bombs space on the pan to help them puff up golden and good.
  • Don't overfill or the dough may tear during baking - about 1 tablespoon of filling is perfect.
  • Double-check seals before baking to avoid any cheese explosions!

Storage and Reheating

  • These bombs are best enjoyed fresh from the oven while the cheese is still gooey!
  • Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • To reheat, place in a 350°F oven for 5-7 minutes or microwave for 20-30 seconds until warmed through.
  • For best results when reheating, cover with foil if using the oven to prevent over-browning.
Cheeseburger bomb with golden top and melted cheese

Perfect Partners

These bombs pair perfectly with fresh green salad, potato wedges, or coleslaw for a complete meal.

The contrast of the warm, cheesy bombs with cool, crisp sides creates a balanced and satisfying dining experience everyone will love.

A simple marinara dipping sauce on the side adds that classic "burger with ketchup" feel in a more sophisticated way!

Tips and Variations for Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

I've made these bombs at least a dozen times now, and I've picked up some tricks along the way that I'm happy to share!

  • Want extra garlic flavor? Add ½ teaspoon of garlic powder to the beef mixture.
  • Try different cheese combinations - pepper jack adds a nice kick!
  • Add some finely chopped onions or bell peppers to the beef mixture for extra flavor and nutrients.
  • For a breakfast version, use breakfast sausage instead of beef and add scrambled eggs to the filling.
  • Need a shortcut? You can use pre-cooked ground beef if you have some leftover from another meal.
  • For a prettier presentation, sprinkle some extra Parmesan on top before baking.

Have you ever tried adding bacon bits to the filling? Oh my goodness, it takes these bombs to a whole new level of deliciousness!

Cheeseburger bomb with cheese oozing out

Social Proof

⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "These cheeseburger bombs are AMAZING! I served them at a party, and they disappeared within minutes. Definitely a new family favorite!" - Sarah K.

⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "My kids are super picky, but they DEVOURED these! The garlic parmesan flavor is perfect - not too strong but adds so much depth. Making them again this weekend!" - Mike T.

⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "These were easier to make than I expected and SO delicious! The perfect game day food that impressed everyone!" - Jamie L.

FAQs About Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

Can I make these cheeseburger bombs ahead of time?

Yes! Prepare them up to 24 hours ahead, store unbaked in the refrigerator, and add 2-3 minutes to baking time when cooking from cold.

What can I serve with Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs?

They pair perfectly with marinara dipping sauce, a fresh garden salad, sweet potato fries, or coleslaw for a complete meal.

Can I freeze these cheeseburger bombs?

Absolutely! Freeze unbaked bombs on a baking sheet, then transfer to a freezer bag for up to 3 months. Bake from frozen, adding 5-7 minutes to the baking time.

Can I substitute the ground beef with another protein?

Yes! Ground turkey, chicken, or plant-based meat alternatives work well. Just adjust seasoning as needed since these alternatives may be less flavorful than beef.

Nutrition Facts for Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

Nutrition Facts (Per Serving)

It is important to consider this information as approximate and not to use it as definitive health advice.

  • Calories: 380
  • Total Fat: 22g
  • Total Carbohydrate: 28g
  • Protein: 18g

Recipes You May Like

  • Spicy Meatloaf Recipe - Another great way to use ground beef with big flavor!
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - If you love these bombs, you'll go crazy for these sliders!
  • Oven Baked BBQ Meatballs Recipe - Another perfect party appetizer that always disappears quickly!

Conclusion

These garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs have become a staple in our house for good reason - they're fun to make, fun to eat, and absolutely delicious! The combination of savory beef, garlic, and two kinds of cheese wrapped in soft, golden biscuit dough is simply irresistible. Whether you're making them for a party, game day, or just a fun family dinner, I guarantee they'll be a hit!

Don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest for later! And if you make these bombs, I'd love to hear how they turned out in the comments below.

Pinterest CTA
garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs
garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs recipe
Gooey cheeseburger bomb on baking tray

Garlic Parmesan Cheeseburger Bombs

Sarah
These garlic parmesan cheeseburger bombs combine juicy beef, melty cheese, and buttery biscuit dough for an irresistible 30-minute appetizer that's perfect for parties, game days, or family dinners!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 15 minutes mins
Cook Time 15 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Tasty Bites
Cuisine American
Servings 8 bombs
Calories 380 kcal

Equipment

  • Skillet
  • Baking Sheet
  • Parchment Paper
  • Mixing Bowl
  • Pastry Brush

Ingredients
  

Cheeseburger Filling

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese cubed
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning optional

For Assembly

  • 1 can (16.3 oz) refrigerated biscuit dough
  • 2 tablespoon butter melted
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Heat a skillet over medium heat. Add the ground beef and cook until it's no longer pink, breaking it up with a wooden spoon as it cooks.
  • When the beef is almost done, add the minced garlic and cook for another minute until fragrant.
  • Remove the skillet from heat and drain any excess fat.
  • Return the skillet to low heat and stir in the grated Parmesan cheese until melted and well combined with the beef mixture.
  • Season with salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning if using. Stir well and set aside to cool slightly.
  • Open the can of biscuit dough and separate into individual biscuits.
  • Take one biscuit and flatten it with your hands or a rolling pin until it's about 4 inches in diameter.
  • Place about 1 tablespoon of the beef mixture in the center of the flattened biscuit.
  • Add a cube of cheddar cheese right in the middle of the beef mixture.
  • Carefully bring the edges of the biscuit dough up and around the filling, pinching the edges together to seal completely.
  • Place the sealed bomb, seam side down, on the prepared baking sheet.
  • Repeat with remaining biscuits and filling, spacing the bombs about 2 inches apart on the baking sheet.
  • In a small bowl, mix the melted butter with half of the chopped parsley.
  • Brush the tops of each bomb with the butter mixture.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-15 minutes, or until the bombs are golden brown on top.
  • Remove from the oven and let cool for 5 minutes.
  • Sprinkle with remaining parsley and serve warm.

Notes

For extra garlic flavor, add ½ teaspoon of garlic powder to the beef mixture.
Try different cheese combinations - pepper jack adds a nice kick!
Make ahead: Prepare up to 24 hours in advance and store unbaked in the refrigerator.
Freezer-friendly: Freeze unbaked bombs for up to 3 months. Bake from frozen, adding 5-7 minutes to the cooking time.
Serve with marinara dipping sauce for extra flavor.

Nutrition

Calories: 380kcalCarbohydrates: 28gProtein: 18gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 9gCholesterol: 55mgSodium: 750mgPotassium: 220mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 250IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 180mgIron: 2.5mg
Keyword cheeseburger bombs, garlic parmesan, Party Food
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Fluffy Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread Recipe

May 19, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Have you ever craved bread but wanted something lighter and more protein-packed? I've been experimenting with cottage cheese cloud bread for months now, and I can't believe how amazing it turns out every single time! This fluffy, airy creation has become a staple in my kitchen, especially on mornings when I want something quick but satisfying.

The first time I made this cloud bread, Emily (my daughter) thought I was working some kind of kitchen magic! She couldn't believe something so pillowy and bread-like could come from just a few simple ingredients. If you've enjoyed my Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake, this cloud bread is another fantastic way to use cottage cheese for a protein-rich breakfast option.

What makes this recipe special is how versatile it is. You can enjoy it plain, use it as a sandwich base, or even add sweet or savory toppings depending on your mood. And the best part? It takes just minutes to prepare!

Why You Will Like This Recipe

Cloud breads stacked on wooden plate with soft light

  • Super light and airy texture that melts in your mouth
  • High in protein thanks to the eggs and cottage cheese
  • Low-carb and keto-friendly (perfect if you're watching carbs!)
  • Requires just a handful of basic ingredients
  • Versatile base for both sweet and savory toppings
  • Ready in under 40 minutes from start to finish
  • Great alternative to regular bread for those with gluten sensitivity

Cloud Bread Comparison

Traditional Cloud BreadCottage Cheese Cloud Bread
Main ingredientsCream cheese & eggsCottage cheese & eggs
Protein contentLower (6-7g)Higher (9g)
TextureMore eggyMore bread-like
TasteSlightly tangyMilder, neutral flavor
Best forSweet applicationsBoth sweet and savory
StructureMore fragileMore stable for sandwiches

I've been playing around with different cottage cheese recipes lately (like my Cottage Cheese Chips that everyone goes crazy for), and this cloud bread might be my favorite yet!

Keto Macros Breakdown:

With just 1g of carbs per serving, this cottage cheese cloud bread is perfect for keto dieters! At a 3:1 fat-to-carb ratio and 9g of protein per serving, it helps maintain ketosis while supporting muscle maintenance. Use as a bread replacement for sandwiches, as a base for fat bombs, or enjoy with high-fat toppings like avocado or cream cheese for a perfectly keto-balanced snack.

Ingredients for Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

  • 3 large eggs, separated
  • ½ cup cottage cheese, blended until smooth
  • ¼ teaspoon cream of tartar
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch or arrowroot powder (optional, for structure)

I recommend using a 4% milkfat cottage cheese for the richest flavor, but really any type works! Just make sure to blend it until smooth – those curds need to disappear for the perfect texture.

Best Cottage Cheese Brands for Cloud Bread:

  • Green Valley Organic - Smoothest texture when blended
  • Good Culture - Higher protein content
  • Lactaid - Great option for those with lactose sensitivity
  • Nancy's - Probiotic benefits with clean ingredients

For best results, choose full-fat (4%) cottage cheese rather than fat-free versions, which can make the bread less stable and flavorful.

Instructions for Making Cloud Bread

Preparing Your Equipment

  1. Preheat your oven to a low 300°F (150°C) – this gentle heat is crucial for the perfect rise!
  2. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (don't skip this or you'll have a sticky situation on your hands).
Separated egg yolks and whipped whites in glass bowls
Whipped egg whites in glass bowl with electric mixer

Creating the Cloud Mixture

  1. In a clean, dry bowl, beat the egg whites and cream of tartar until stiff peaks form. This might take 3-4 minutes with an electric mixer. Patience here is key! When you lift your beater, the peaks should stand straight up without flopping over.
  2. In a separate bowl, mix the egg yolks, blended cottage cheese, salt, and cornstarch (if using) until well combined and smooth. I like to use a blender for the cottage cheese first to get it super smooth, then mix with the other ingredients.
  3. Here's where gentle handling is crucial: carefully fold the whipped egg whites into the yolk mixture in three batches. Use a light hand with a spatula, cutting down through the middle and folding over. You want to maintain all that wonderful air you whipped into those whites!
Cottage cheese mixture in glass bowl with wooden spoon
Four raw cloud bread rounds on parchment-lined tray

Baking to Perfection

  1. Using a large spoon or ice cream scoop, portion the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet, forming 6 even mounds about 3-4 inches across. Leave a little space between each one as they'll expand slightly.
  2. Bake for 25-30 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and the bread is firm to the touch. Keep an eye on them – you want them set but not dried out!
  3. Remove from the oven and allow to cool for a few minutes before transferring to a wire rack. They'll continue to set as they cool.

Cloud Bread Timeline:

Cloud Bread Timeline

I've found these are best enjoyed within an hour of baking when they're still fresh and cloud-like. But don't worry – I'll share some storage tips below if you want to make them ahead!

Tips for Perfect Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

Want to know my secrets for cloud bread that actually holds up? Here's what I've learned after many (many!) batches:

  • Room temperature ingredients are non-negotiable! Cold eggs won't whip up as nicely. Let everything sit out for about 15-20 minutes before starting.
  • Beat those egg whites properly. They should be so stiff that you could (theoretically) hold the bowl upside down without them falling out. Scary test, but effective!
  • Fold, don't stir. The gentler you are when combining the egg whites with the yolk mixture, the fluffier your cloud bread will be. Think of it like folding in clouds – gentle does it!
  • Low and slow baking is key. Rush the baking with higher heat and they'll rise dramatically then collapse. Patience pays off here!
  • Let them cool on a wire rack. This prevents the bottoms from getting soggy from steam.
Three golden cloud breads stacked on wooden tray

Important Notes :

  • Beating egg whites properly is CRITICAL - they must form stiff peaks that stand straight up.
  • Cold ingredients will NOT whip properly - room temperature is essential.
  • The cornstarch is optional but helps create better structure, especially if you plan to use for sandwiches.
  • This bread will NOT rise like traditional bread - how you shape it before baking is how it will stay.
  • Work quickly once egg whites are beaten as they can start to weep if left too long.

Expert Tip:

For the BEST texture and stability, let your cloud bread cool completely on a wire rack, then refrigerate for 1-2 hours before using for sandwiches. This setting time helps the bread firm up while maintaining its airy interior. I discovered this trick after countless batches!

Have you ever had a recipe that seemed so simple but took a few tries to master? This was definitely one of those for me! But trust me, once you get the technique down, you'll be making these weekly.

Variations of Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

One thing I absolutely love about this recipe is how easily you can customize it. We go through phases in our house – sometimes we're all about sweet breakfasts, other times savory wins. Here are some of my favorite variations:

Sweet Versions

  • Cinnamon Sugar: Add 1 tablespoon of honey or monk fruit sweetener and a dash of cinnamon to the base. After baking, brush with melted butter and sprinkle with more cinnamon sugar.
  • Vanilla Berry: Mix ½ teaspoon vanilla extract into the base and top cooled cloud bread with whipped cream and fresh berries.
  • Chocolate Chip: Gently fold mini chocolate chips into the final mixture before baking for a sweet treat.

Savory Twists

  • Everything Bagel: Sprinkle everything bagel seasoning on top before baking for a bagel-inspired version.
  • Garlic Herb: Add ¼ teaspoon garlic powder and 1 teaspoon of dried Italian herbs to the egg yolk mixture.
  • Three Cheese: Mix in ¼ cup total of shredded cheddar, parmesan, and mozzarella for an extra cheesy version.

Do you have a favorite bread flavor that you miss on a low-carb diet? Try adapting it here – these little clouds are so adaptable!

Storage and Reheating

Let's be honest – these are definitely best fresh out of the oven after they've cooled slightly. But I know meal prep is life, so here's how to store them:

  • Refrigerator: Store in an airtight container with parchment paper between layers for up to 3 days. They will lose some of their fluffiness but still taste great!
  • Freezer: Place layers of parchment paper between the breads and store in a freezer-safe bag for up to 2 months.
  • Reheating: For refrigerated cloud bread, a quick 10 seconds in the microwave works well. From frozen, thaw in the refrigerator overnight, then toast lightly in a toaster oven for the best texture recovery.

One thing I've noticed is that if you plan to use these as sandwich bread, they actually hold up better after being refrigerated for a few hours – they become a bit more stable while still remaining soft.

Troubleshooting Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

ProblemSolution
Bread is flat and denseEgg whites weren't beaten enough or were deflated during folding
Bread collapses after bakingOven temperature too high or door opened during baking
Bread sticks to parchmentLet cool completely before attempting to remove
Bread tastes too eggyAdd more seasonings or use in applications with toppings

How to Serve Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

These versatile little clouds can be used in so many ways! Here are some serving ideas we love in my house:

  • Toast them lightly and spread with avocado and a fried egg for breakfast
  • Use as sandwich bread for a light lunch option
  • Serve alongside soup instead of crackers
  • Top with smoked salmon and cream cheese for a lovely brunch
  • Use as a base for mini pizzas – just add sauce, cheese, and toppings!
  • Drizzle with honey and cinnamon for a sweet snack

If you're looking for more protein-packed breakfast ideas, you might also love my Egg Bites with Cottage Cheese – they make a perfect pairing with this cloud bread!

Frequently Asked Questions About Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

Is cottage cheese cloud bread good?

Yes! Cottage cheese cloud bread is delicious with a light, airy texture. The cottage cheese adds protein while keeping the bread moist and fluffy without adding many carbs.
I personally think it's tastier than versions made with cream cheese, as it has a more neutral flavor that works well with both sweet and savory toppings.

Do you need cream of tartar for cloud bread?

Yes, cream of tartar helps stabilize the egg whites when beaten, creating stiffer peaks that maintain their structure during baking, which is essential for cloud bread's signature fluffy texture.
If you don't have cream of tartar, you can substitute with a few drops of lemon juice or white vinegar in a pinch, though the results might not be quite as stable.

Why did my cloud bread deflate?

Cloud bread typically deflates if egg whites weren't beaten to stiff peaks, the mixture was overmixed when folding, or the oven temperature was too low. For best results, fold gently and ensure your oven is properly preheated to 300°F.
Also, avoid opening the oven door while baking as the temperature fluctuation can cause them to collapse.

Is cloud bread high in carbs?

No, cloud bread is very low in carbohydrates, making it perfect for low-carb and keto diets. This cottage cheese version has minimal carbs from the small amount of cornstarch (which is optional) and trace amounts in cottage cheese. Each piece typically contains only about 1-2g of carbs, compared to around 15g in a slice of regular bread.

Nutritional Information (Per Serving - 1 bread round)

NutrientAmount
Calories67kcal
Carbohydrates1g
Protein9g
Fat3g
Saturated Fat1g
Cholesterol95mg
Sodium120mg
Potassium80mg
Fiber0.003g
Sugar0.3g
Calcium49mg
Iron0.5mg

Recipes You May Like

  • Cottage Cheese Chips Recipe - Another great low-carb snack using cottage cheese!
  • Egg Bites with Cottage Cheese - Perfect protein-packed breakfast option
  • Simple Avocado Toast with Egg - Try using cloud bread as the base!

Conclusion

This cottage cheese cloud bread has become one of my go-to recipes when I want something that feels like bread but with more protein and fewer carbs. The light, airy texture and versatility make it perfect for breakfast, lunch, or as a snack any time of day.

What I love most about this recipe is that it uses simple ingredients that many of us already have on hand. It's also a great way to use up cottage cheese if you have some in the fridge that needs to be used.

Have you tried making cloud bread before? If this is your first time, don't worry if they don't turn out perfect – it took me a couple of attempts to get the technique just right. The key is whipping those egg whites until they're super stiff and folding everything gently.

I hope you enjoy this fluffy cottage cheese cloud bread as much as my family does! If you make this recipe, I'd love to hear how it turned out for you.

Pinterest CTA
Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread
cloud bread with cottage cheese
Stack of fluffy golden cloud breads on wooden plate

Fluffy Cottage Cheese Cloud Bread

This fluffy cottage cheese cloud bread is light, airy, and packed with protein! With just a handful of ingredients, you can create a delicious low-carb bread alternative that's perfect for sandwiches or enjoying on its own.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 30 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Breakfast, Snack
Cuisine Western
Servings 6 cloud breads
Calories 67 kcal

Equipment

  • Electric Mixer
  • Baking Sheet
  • Parchment Paper
  • Wire Rack

Ingredients
  

  • 3 large eggs separated
  • ½ cup cottage cheese blended until smooth
  • ¼ teaspoon cream of tartar
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch or arrowroot powder (optional, for structure)

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 300°F (150°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a clean, dry bowl, beat the egg whites and cream of tartar until stiff peaks form. This might take 3-4 minutes with an electric mixer.
  • In a separate bowl, mix the egg yolks, blended cottage cheese, salt, and cornstarch (if using) until well combined and smooth.
  • Gently fold the whipped egg whites into the yolk mixture in three batches, being careful not to deflate the mixture.
  • Using a large spoon or ice cream scoop, portion the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet, forming 6 even mounds about 3-4 inches across.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and the bread is firm to the touch.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to cool for a few minutes before transferring to a wire rack. They'll continue to set as they cool.

Notes

For the best texture and stability, let your cloud bread cool completely on a wire rack, then refrigerate for 1-2 hours before using for sandwiches. This setting time helps the bread firm up while maintaining its airy interior.
Cloud bread is best enjoyed within an hour of baking when they're still fresh and cloud-like, but can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
Room temperature ingredients are essential for properly beaten egg whites. Cold eggs won't whip up as nicely.

Nutrition

Calories: 67kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 9gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 95mgSodium: 120mgPotassium: 80mgFiber: 0.003gSugar: 0.3gCalcium: 49mgIron: 0.5mg
Keyword cloud bread recipe, cottage cheese bread, cottage cheese cloud bread, Keto, Low Carb
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

May 16, 2025 by Sarah 1 Comment

Have you ever found yourself craving something sweet for breakfast but wanting to stay healthy? This blueberry cottage cheese breakfast bake is the perfect solution! It's like eating dessert for breakfast – creamy, slightly sweet, and bursting with juicy blueberries – but it's actually packed with protein and completely guilt-free.

I discovered this recipe when Emily refused to eat regular cottage cheese (you know how kids can be!), but she absolutely devoured this baked version. It's become our Sunday morning tradition, and I meal prep it for busy weekday breakfasts too.

If you're also into creative cottage cheese recipes, you might love my cottage cheese chips recipe or these amazing egg bites with cottage cheese that are perfect for grab-and-go mornings.

Why You'll Love This Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

  • High In Protein – Made with cottage cheese and eggs, this bake keeps you full and satisfied for hours
  • Super Creamy & Delicious – The texture is smooth and custard-like, with bursts of juicy blueberries in every bite
  • Easy To Make – Just blend, mix, and bake—no complicated steps or fancy ingredients needed
  • Perfect For Meal Prep – Make it ahead of time and store it in the fridge for a quick, grab-and-go breakfast or snack
  • Naturally Sweet & Flavorful – The blueberries add a touch of natural sweetness, while vanilla and lemon zest enhance the flavor
  • Gluten-Free & Refined Sugar-Free – A healthier alternative to traditional baked goods, without sacrificing taste
  • Versatile & Customizable – Swap in different berries, add cinnamon or nuts, or top with honey or nut butter for extra flavor
  • Tastes Like Dessert For Breakfast – It's slightly sweet, ultra-creamy, and so satisfying that you won't believe it's healthy
Blueberry breakfast bake with golden edges in white dish

Essential Ingredients For Your Cottage Cheese Blueberry Breakfast Bake

Core Ingredients

  • 2 cups cottage cheese (preferably full-fat for creaminess)
  • 4 large eggs
  • 4 tablespoon sweetener (use allulose or erythritol)
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 2 tablespoon cornstarch or coconut flour
  • 1 ½ cups berries (divided)

Ingredient Notes

  • Cottage Cheese – The key to a creamy, protein-packed bake! You can use full-fat or light cottage cheese depending on your preference. Since this recipe is made in the blender, the curds completely disappear, giving you a smooth texture.
  • Eggs – Help bind everything together while adding extra protein and richness. Room-temperature eggs mix more evenly into the batter.
  • Sweetener – Works with any granulated sweetener! Allulose, erythritol, monk fruit, or coconut sugar all work well. Adjust the sweetness to taste.
  • Vanilla Extract – Enhances the overall flavor and gives a warm, sweet depth. Pure vanilla extract is best.
  • Coconut Flour – Helps absorb moisture and gives the bake structure. Almond flour won't work here, as it doesn't absorb liquid the same way. If you're not avoiding grains, regular flour or oat flour can be used instead.
  • Berries – Blueberries work best, but raspberries, blackberries, or chopped strawberries are great alternatives.If using frozen berries, add them directly without thawing to avoid excess moisture.
  • Lemon Zest – Adds a bright, fresh flavor that pairs beautifully with blueberries. Skip it if you prefer a more classic vanilla taste.

This cottage cheese blueberry bake is proof that healthy doesn't have to mean boring. My family requests it every weekend!

Protein-rich blueberry bake in ceramic pan

Step-By-Step Instructions For Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

Prep Work

  1. Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C).
  2. Lightly grease an 8×8-inch (20×20 cm) square baking dish.
  3. If making individual portions, grease muffin tins or ramekins instead.

Mixing The Batter

  1. In a blender or food processor, combine the cottage cheese (drain the liquids), eggs, sweetener, vanilla extract, and cornstarch.
  2. Blend until completely smooth and creamy - this usually takes about 30-45 seconds.
  3. Gently stir in 1 cup of berries and the lemon zest, if using.
  4. Reserve the remaining ½ cup of berries for topping.

Baking Process

  1. Pour the mixture into the prepared baking dish and spread evenly.
  2. Sprinkle the reserved berries on top for a beautiful presentation.
  3. Bake for 35–40 minutes, or until set and lightly golden.
  4. Let it cool for 10–15 minutes before slicing or serving.
  5. Top with extra berries and an extra sprinkle of sweetener if desired.

How To Check For Doneness

  • A toothpick inserted in the center should come out mostly clean with a few moist crumbs
  • The bake should have a slight wobble in the middle but will firm up as it cools

Pro Tip: If the top starts browning too quickly, loosely cover it with foil in the last 10 minutes.

Storage & Reheating Your Cottage Cheese Blueberry Bake

Refrigerator Storage

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

The flavors actually get better after sitting overnight (trust me on this one!).

Freezer Options

Slice into portions and freeze for up to 2 months.

Wrap individually and thaw overnight in the fridge before reheating.

Reheating Tips

  • Microwave: Warm for 20–30 seconds
  • Oven: Heat at 300°F (150°C) for a few minutes
Baked blueberry casserole with browned crust

Creative Variations For Your Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

Individual Portions

If you prefer individual portions, you can use:

  • Muffin tins (fill each about ¾ full and bake for around 20–25 minutes)
  • Ramekins (4 oz.) for personal-sized servings, which will need around 25–30 minutes

Flavor Variations

Want to mix things up? Try these delicious variations:

  • Mixed Berry Version – Use a combination of blueberries, raspberries, and blackberries
  • Cinnamon Spice – Add 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg
  • Chocolate Chip – Fold in ¼ cup mini dark chocolate chips
  • Orange Cranberry – Replace blueberries with dried cranberries and use orange zest instead of lemon
  • Nutty Crunch – Top with chopped almonds or walnuts before baking

Nutrition Information

Nutritional Facts (Per Serving) Value
Calories 108 kcal
Protein 9g
Total Carbs 7g
Net Carbs 6g
Fat 5g
Fiber 1g
Sugar 4g
Servings 8

Frequently Asked Questions About Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

Is cottage cheese and blueberries a good breakfast?

Yes! This combination provides high protein from cottage cheese (about 9g per serving) and natural sweetness plus antioxidants from blueberries, making it a filling and nutritious breakfast option.

What does cottage cheese do in baking?

Cottage cheese adds moisture, protein, and creates a creamy, custard-like texture when blended. It acts as a healthier substitute for cream cheese or ricotta in baked goods.

How many calories are in a blueberry cottage cheese bake?

Each serving contains only 108 calories, with 9g protein, 7g carbs, and 5g fat - making it a light yet satisfying breakfast.

Does cottage cheese melt when you bake it?

When blended smooth and baked, cottage cheese doesn't really "melt" but transforms into a creamy, set custard-like texture without visible curds.

Can you eat berries with cottage cheese?

Absolutely! Berries and cottage cheese pair perfectly - the berries add natural sweetness and antioxidants while cottage cheese provides protein and calcium for a balanced meal.

Cottage cheese bake topped with fresh blueberries

Recipes You May Like

  • Egg Bites With Cottage Cheese – Another protein-packed breakfast that's perfect for meal prep
  • Mini Blueberry Muffins – Sweet, bite-sized treats bursting with blueberry flavor
  • Healthy Chicken Pot Pie Soup – A lighter take on comfort food that's just as satisfying

Make This Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake Your New Morning Favorite

This blueberry cottage cheese breakfast bake has completely changed my morning routine. It's the perfect balance of healthy and indulgent – you get all that protein and nutrition without feeling like you're missing out on something delicious.

Plus, it's so easy to make ahead for busy mornings!

Whether you're looking for a healthy breakfast option, a post-workout snack, or just something that tastes like dessert but isn't terrible for you, this bake hits all the marks.

The creamy texture combined with those burst-in-your-mouth blueberries? Pure magic!

Give this recipe a try and let me know what you think! Save it to Pinterest so you can find it again later, and don't forget to tag me if you make it – I love seeing your creations.

Pinterest CTA
Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake
Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake recipe
Juicy blueberry custard bake fresh from oven

Blueberry Cottage Cheese Breakfast Bake

A healthy, protein-packed breakfast bake that tastes like dessert! This creamy, custard-like bake is made with cottage cheese, eggs, and fresh blueberries. Perfect for meal prep and only 108 calories per serving.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 35 minutes mins
Total Time 40 minutes mins
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Servings 8 servings
Calories 108 kcal

Equipment

  • 8x8 inch baking dish
  • Blender or food processor
  • Mixing Bowl

Ingredients
  

  • 2 cups cottage cheese preferably full-fat for creaminess
  • 4 large eggs
  • 4 tablespoon sweetener use allulose or erythritol
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 2 tablespoon cornstarch or coconut flour
  • 1 ½ cups blueberries divided

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease an 8×8-inch (20×20 cm) square baking dish. If making individual portions, grease muffin tins or ramekins instead.
  • In a blender or food processor, combine the cottage cheese (drain the liquids), eggs, sweetener, vanilla extract, and cornstarch. Blend until completely smooth and creamy - this usually takes about 30-45 seconds.
  • Gently stir in 1 cup of berries and the lemon zest, if using. Reserve the remaining ½ cup of berries for topping.
  • Pour the mixture into the prepared baking dish and spread evenly. Sprinkle the reserved berries on top for a beautiful presentation.
  • Bake for 35–40 minutes, or until set and lightly golden. A toothpick inserted in the center should come out mostly clean with a few moist crumbs.
  • Let it cool for 10–15 minutes before slicing or serving. Top with extra berries and an extra sprinkle of sweetener if desired.

Notes

If you prefer individual portions, you can use muffin tins (fill each about ¾ full and bake for around 20–25 minutes) or ramekins (4 oz.) for personal-sized servings, which will need around 25–30 minutes.
If using frozen berries, add them directly without thawing to avoid excess moisture.
Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to 5 days or freeze for up to 2 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 108kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 9gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 180mgPotassium: 150mgFiber: 1gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 120IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 80mgIron: 0.8mg
Keyword Blueberry Cottage Cheese, Cottage Cheese, cottage cheese breakfast, easy blueberry cottage cheese, Healthy, High Protein
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

The Best Chipotle Chicken Taco Recipe

May 14, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

I've been making tacos for years, but it wasn't until I discovered the magic of chipotle chicken taco recipe that my Tuesday nights completely changed! You know how some recipes just stick with you? This is definitely one of those for me.

Last month, my daughter Emily and I were craving something with a kick but still weeknight-friendly. I had some chipotle peppers sitting in my pantry (who doesn't, right?), and that's when this incredible honey chipotle combination was born. The combination of sweet honey and smoky chipotle creates the most incredible balance – it's like your taste buds are having a party!

The best part about this recipe? It's ready in just 35 minutes from start to finish, perfect for those "what's for dinner?" moments we all have. If you love this smoky-sweet flavor profile, you'll probably also enjoy my chipotle chicken burrito recipe or the simpler chipotle honey chicken version.

Why You'll Love This Chipotle Chicken Taco Recipe

  • Quick and easy - Just 35 minutes from start to finish, perfect for busy weeknights
  • Incredible sweet and smoky flavor - The honey chipotle combination is absolutely irresistible
  • Versatile protein - Use it for tacos, burrito bowls, nachos, or salads
  • Freezer-friendly - Make a double batch and freeze portions for later
  • Crowd-pleaser - Even picky eaters love the balanced flavors
  • Perfect for meal prep - Stays delicious in the fridge for up to 4 days
Chicken tacos in a row with chopped toppings

Ingredients For Chipotle Chicken Tacos

For The Chicken:

  • 2 tablespoons avocado oil or neutral high smoke point oil of choice
  • 1 ½ pounds boneless, skinless chicken thighs or breasts (if using breasts, pound to even thickness)
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • Kosher salt and ground black pepper, to season

For The Chipotle Honey Sauce:

  • 2 chipotle peppers (from a can, packed in adobo sauce), finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon adobo sauce (from the same can)
  • ¼ cup honey
  • ½ cup light beer of choice (such as Modelo Especial)
  • 1 lime, juiced
  • Optional: cornstarch slurry (1 teaspoon cornstarch whisked into ¼ cup water)

I always use chicken thighs for this recipe because they stay so much juicier than breasts. But honestly? Use whatever you have on hand – this sauce is so good it makes everything taste amazing!

Five tacos filled with shredded chicken and salsa

How To Make Chipotle Chicken Tacos

Brown The Chicken

  1. Preheat your oven to 375°F. Add the oil to a medium oven-safe skillet over medium heat.
  2. While it heats up, season the chicken generously with chili powder, cumin, smoked paprika, onion powder, 1½ teaspoons kosher salt, and ground black pepper. I literally coat every inch – this spice mix is what gives our chipotle chicken tacos that incredible depth of flavor.
  3. Once the oil is hot and shimmering, add the chicken. Cook 2-3 minutes per side until nicely browned. Don't worry that it's not fully cooked yet – that's exactly what we want!
Seasoned chicken thighs in a cast iron skillet
Bowl of spicy chipotle sauce with whisk

Make The Chipotle Honey Sauce

  1. While the chicken browns, whisk together the chopped chipotle peppers, adobo sauce, honey, and beer in a small bowl.

This sauce is seriously the star of the show! The first time I made it, Emily walked into the kitchen and said, "What smells so good?" That's when I knew I had a winner.

Roast The Chicken

  1. Remove the skillet from heat and pour that gorgeous chipotle honey sauce over the chicken, turning each piece to coat completely.
  2. Transfer the whole skillet to the oven and roast for 15-20 minutes, or until an instant-read thermometer reads 165°F in the thickest part. Let it cool slightly – trust me, you don't want to burn your fingers!
Shredded chicken in sauce with lime slices
Close-up of saucy shredded chicken with herbs

Shred And Finish

  1. Once cool enough to handle, shred the chicken into bite-sized pieces using two forks. Here's my secret trick: if you have a stand mixer, use the paddle attachment on low speed – it shreds the chicken perfectly in about 30 seconds!
  2. Return the shredded chipotle chicken to the skillet with all those amazing pan juices. Squeeze in the lime juice and toss everything together. If your sauce seems too thin, go ahead and stir in that cornstarch slurry.

The result? Tender, flavorful chicken that's perfect for stuffing into tortillas!

Storage And Reheating Tips

Overhead shot of seasoned shredded chicken

Refrigerator Storage: Your leftover honey chipotle chicken tacos will keep beautifully in the fridge for up to 4 days in an airtight container. I actually think it tastes even better the next day!

Freezing Instructions: This recipe is a freezer superstar! Cool the chicken completely, then transfer to freezer-safe containers. I like to portion it out so I can grab exactly what I need. It'll keep for up to 3 months frozen.

Reheating: From the fridge, just warm it up on the stovetop or in the microwave. From frozen, thaw overnight in the fridge or use the quick-thaw method in room temperature water for 20-25 minutes.

Variations And Serving Ideas For Your Chipotle Chicken Taco Recipe

Different Cooking Methods:

Slow Cooker Method: Add everything to your slow cooker and cook on high for 3-4 hours or low for 6-8 hours. So easy!

Instant Pot Version: Sear the chicken first, then pressure cook for 12 minutes with natural release. The creamy chipotle chicken recipe uses a similar technique.

Serving Suggestions:

These chipotle chicken tacos are incredibly versatile. Serve them with:

  • Warm flour or corn tortillas
  • Over rice for burrito bowls
  • On top of nachos for game day
  • In quesadillas (similar to my bacon breakfast burrito concept)
  • As a salad topping
Three tacos with lime wedges and salsa

Perfect Toppings:

  • Fresh pico de gallo
  • Creamy avocado or guacamole
  • Mexican crema or sour cream
  • Pickled red onions
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Queso fresco
  • A squeeze of lime

Want to try something different? This chicken also works wonderfully in my chipotle chicken pasta recipe – just add it to creamy pasta instead of tortillas!

FAQ About Chipotle Chicken Tacos

Can I use chicken breasts instead of chicken thighs for this recipe?

Yes! Pound breasts to even thickness or butterfly them into 1-inch pieces. Thighs stay juicier, but breasts work great too.

How long does this chipotle chicken keep in the refrigerator?

Leftover honey chipotle chicken stays fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days in an airtight container.

Can I make this recipe in a slow cooker or Instant Pot?

Absolutely! For slow cooker: cook 3-4 hours on high or 6-8 hours on low. For Instant Pot: sear first, then pressure cook 12 minutes with natural release.

Where can I find chipotle peppers in adobo sauce?

Look for canned chipotle peppers in adobo sauce in the international/Mexican aisle of most grocery stores, usually near the hot sauces and salsas.

Recipes You May Like

  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken - Another quick skillet chicken dinner with incredible sauce
  • Grilled Chili Cilantro Lime Chicken - Perfect for outdoor cooking with Mexican-inspired flavors
  • Homemade Enchilada Sauce - Use this chicken as filling for authentic enchiladas

Conclusion

This chipotle chicken taco recipe has become our go-to weeknight dinner, and I know it'll become yours too! The combination of smoky chipotle and sweet honey creates the most incredible flavor that keeps everyone coming back for seconds (and thirds, if I'm being honest).

The best part? You probably have most of these ingredients already. Give this recipe a try tonight – you'll be amazed at how something so simple can taste so restaurant-quality delicious!

Try it out and let me know how it goes. Save this recipe to Pinterest for easy access later, and don't forget to share photos of your beautiful chipotle chicken tacos with me!

Pinterest CTA
chipotle chicken taco recipe
chipotle chicken taco
Tacos with charred tortillas and salsa topping

Chipotle Chicken Taco Recipe

This chipotle chicken taco recipe combines sweet honey with smoky chipotle peppers for incredible flavor in just 35 minutes. Perfect for weeknight dinners and meal prep!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 25 minutes mins
Total Time 35 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Servings 4 servings
Calories 385 kcal

Equipment

  • Oven-safe skillet
  • Stand mixer (optional)
  • Instant-read thermometer

Ingredients
  

For The Chicken

  • 2 tablespoons avocado oil or neutral high smoke point oil
  • 1.5 pounds boneless, skinless chicken thighs or breasts if using breasts, pound to even thickness or butterfly into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 0.5 teaspoon onion powder
  • kosher salt and ground black pepper to season

For The Chipotle Honey Sauce

  • 2 chipotle peppers from a can, packed in adobo sauce, finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon adobo sauce from the same can
  • 0.25 cup honey
  • 0.5 cup light beer such as Modelo Especial
  • 1 lime juiced
  • cornstarch slurry optional: 1 teaspoon cornstarch whisked into ¼ cup water

Instructions
 

  • Preheat your oven to 375°F. Add the oil to a medium oven-safe skillet over medium heat.
  • While it heats up, season the chicken generously with chili powder, cumin, smoked paprika, onion powder, 1½ teaspoons kosher salt, and ground black pepper.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, add the chicken. Cook 2-3 minutes per side until nicely browned. Don't worry that it's not fully cooked yet – that's exactly what we want!
  • While the chicken browns, whisk together the chopped chipotle peppers, adobo sauce, honey, and beer in a small bowl.
  • Remove the skillet from heat and pour that gorgeous chipotle honey sauce over the chicken, turning each piece to coat completely.
  • Transfer the whole skillet to the oven and roast for 15-20 minutes, or until an instant-read thermometer reads 165°F in the thickest part. Let it cool slightly.
  • Once cool enough to handle, shred the chicken into bite-sized pieces using two forks. Here's my secret trick: if you have a stand mixer, use the paddle attachment on low speed – it shreds the chicken perfectly in about 30 seconds!
  • Return the shredded chipotle chicken to the skillet with all those amazing pan juices. Squeeze in the lime juice and toss everything together. If your sauce seems too thin, go ahead and stir in that cornstarch slurry.
  • Serve immediately in warm tortillas or over rice for burrito bowls. Finish with your favorite toppings: sour cream, pickled red onions, cilantro, avocado, queso fresco, salsa—whatever you love!

Notes

Ingredient Notes:
Chicken thighs vs chicken breasts: Boneless, skinless chicken thighs are my go-to here—they stay juicy and flavorful through roasting. Prefer chicken breasts? Go for it—just pound them out or slice in half lengthwise (butterfly-style) so they cook evenly.
Storage and Reheating:
Leftover honey chipotle chicken keeps well in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat on the stovetop or in the microwave until warmed through.
Freezer Instructions:
This is a great freezer staple for easy tacos, burrito bowls, nachos, and more. Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container. Freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost, thaw overnight in the fridge or submerge the sealed container in room-temp water for 20-25 minutes.
Alternate Cooking Methods:
Slow Cooker: If your slow cooker has a browning/sear function, follow step 2. If not, just add everything to the pot. Cook on high for 3-4 hours or low for 6-8 hours.
Instant Pot: Use the sauté function to sear the chicken first. Increase the beer to 1 cup. Pressure cook on high for 12 minutes with natural release for 5 minutes, then quick release.

Nutrition

Calories: 385kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 42gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 125mgSodium: 650mgPotassium: 420mgFiber: 1gSugar: 16gVitamin A: 850IUVitamin C: 12mgCalcium: 35mgIron: 2.2mg
Keyword Chipotle, chipotle honey chicken tacos, honey chicken tacos, honey chipotle chicken, sweet chicken tacos
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Copycat Panera Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt Recipe

May 14, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Remember that time I tried to recreate my favorite Panera sandwich at home? Yeah, it took me three attempts to get this chipotle chicken avocado melt just right! But let me tell you, when I finally nailed it, Emily and I devoured two of these bad boys in one sitting. (No judgment, please!)

This copycat panera chipotle chicken avocado melt brings all those smoky, creamy, melty flavors right to your kitchen. The combination of BBQ chicken, fresh avocado, melted Colby jack cheese, and that signature chipotle mayo creates the perfect comfort food sandwich. And the best part? You can make it in just 15 minutes!

The secret to this sandwich is the chipotle adobo sauce mixed with mayo - it's what gives that distinctive Panera flavor we all love. Plus, cooking it with steam helps create that perfectly melted, gooey cheese that makes each bite absolutely irresistible.

If you're a fan of chipotle flavors like I am, you'll also love my creamy chipotle chicken recipe and chipotle chicken pasta recipe for dinner inspiration.

Why You Will Love This Copycat Panera Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

Grilled sandwich stack with avocado and melted cheese

  • Ready in 15 minutes - Perfect for busy weekday lunches or quick dinners
  • Restaurant-quality taste at home without the restaurant prices
  • Simple ingredients you probably already have in your kitchen
  • Crispy exterior with melty, gooey interior just like the original
  • Fresh avocado adds the perfect creamy texture
  • Smoky chipotle flavor that's not too spicy but full of depth

Ingredients For Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

2 tablespoon butter (divided and softened) 2 slices of sourdough bread (or other sliced white bread) 2 tablespoon mayonnaise 3 teaspoon canned chipotle adobo sauce (divided) ½ cup shredded colby jack cheese 1 ½ Fresh California Avocados (ripe, thinly sliced) ½ cup cooked shredded chicken 2 tablespoon bbq sauce

Instructions For Making Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

Prep The Bread and Butter

  1. Spread 1 tablespoon of butter thinly on one side of each sourdough bread slice and set aside. Place the remaining 1 tablespoon of butter into a heavy bottom skillet and set aside.

Make The Chipotle Mayo

  1. In a small bowl, mix together mayonnaise and chipotle adobo sauce. Smear chipotle mayo evenly onto both sides of the unbuttered side of bread.
Bowl of chipotle mayo with spatula
Bowl of shredded BBQ chicken

Build The Sandwich

  1. On one bread slice, sprinkle the shredded Colby jack cheese evenly.
  2. Top cheese with ½ fresh California avocado, thinly sliced.
  3. In a small bowl, mix together shredded chicken and 2 tablespoon of BBQ sauce until well combined. Add the chicken onto the other slice of bread and put the slices together to form a sandwich.

Cook The Perfect Melt

Open sandwich with chicken and sliced avocado
Crispy grilled sandwich on white plate

  1. Heat heavy bottom skillet on medium heat until the butter is melted. Add the sandwich to the pan and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side on medium heat or until the bottom is golden brown.
  2. Add in 1 tablespoon of water to the bottom of the pan and place a lid over the sandwich. The steam from the water will help melt the cheese and make the sandwich cheesy and gooey. Remove from pan and serve with a pickle and/or tomato soup.

Storage & Reheating

This chipotle chicken avocado melt is best enjoyed fresh, but if you have leftovers (unlikely!), here's how to store them:

Store wrapped in foil in the refrigerator for up to 1 day. The avocado may brown slightly, but it's still delicious.

To reheat, place in a skillet over medium-low heat for 2-3 minutes per side, or use a panini press. Avoid the microwave as it will make the bread soggy.

Melty sandwich with avocado chicken and cheese

Variations For Your Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

Ready to mix things up? Here are some of my favorite ways to customize this sandwich:

Add Bacon: Honestly, always a solid choice! I love adding bacon to a sandwich for extra flavor and heartiness. It pairs perfectly with the chipotle flavors.

Cheese Swaps: Try any of your favorite melty cheeses. Cheddar, Fontina, and Gouda are all fantastic options that melt beautifully.

Different Bread: You can use any hearty white bread. If you don't love sourdough, try focaccia, ciabatta, or sliced French bread.

Spice Level: Want more heat? Add an extra teaspoon of chipotle adobo sauce to the mayo. For less spice, start with just 2 teaspoons.

Similar to my chipotle honey chicken, this recipe is all about balancing that smoky heat with creamy, cooling elements.

Frequently Asked Questions About Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

What Are The Ingredients In Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt?

The key ingredients include butter, sourdough bread, mayonnaise, canned chipotle adobo sauce, Colby jack cheese, fresh California avocados, shredded chicken, and BBQ sauce.

The chipotle adobo sauce is really the star here - it's what gives this sandwich its signature smoky flavor.

Is The Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt Healthy?

This sandwich is definitely indulgent at 1700 calories, but it does provide 54g of protein and 24g of fiber from the avocado. The avocado also adds healthy monounsaturated fats.

It's best enjoyed as an occasional treat rather than an everyday meal. For a healthier option, you could use less cheese or serve it as a half sandwich.

What Is On The Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt?

This melt features BBQ chicken mixed with sauce, fresh sliced avocado, melted Colby jack cheese, and chipotle mayo made with adobo sauce, all grilled between buttered sourdough bread. The combination creates the perfect balance of smoky, creamy, and savory flavors.

How To Make Panera Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt At Home?

Mix mayo with chipotle adobo sauce, combine chicken with BBQ sauce, layer with cheese and avocado on buttered sourdough, then grill in a skillet for 3-4 minutes per side until golden brown.

The key is using that steam method with a tablespoon of water and a lid to get perfectly melted cheese.

Tips For The Best Results

Want to make this copycat panera chipotle chicken avocado melt even better? Here are my tried-and-true tips:

  • Use rotisserie chicken - It's already seasoned and saves time. I always keep some on hand for quick meals like this and my chipotle chicken burrito recipe.
  • Choose ripe avocados - They should give slightly when pressed but not be mushy. Slice them just before assembling to prevent browning.
  • Don't skip the steam step - That tablespoon of water and lid trick is what makes the cheese perfectly melty and gooey.
  • Keep heat at medium - Too high and you'll burn the bread before the cheese melts. Too low and you won't get that crispy exterior.

Have you ever tried making your own chipotle mayo? Once you do, you'll want to put it on everything!

Recipes You May Like

  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - Another quick and delicious chicken sandwich option
  • Bacon Breakfast Burrito - Perfect for breakfast or brunch with similar hearty vibes
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - For when you want another melty, satisfying sandwich

Conclusion

This chipotle chicken avocado melt recipe brings all the flavors of Panera's beloved sandwich right to your kitchen. The smoky chipotle mayo, melted Colby jack cheese, fresh avocado, and BBQ chicken create the perfect harmony of flavors and textures. Plus, at just 15 minutes from start to finish, it's way faster than driving to Panera!

I love making these on lazy Sunday afternoons - they're comfort food at its finest. The combination reminds me of my creamy garlic parmesan chicken but in sandwich form. Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out! Save this to Pinterest so you can find it easily when that chipotle craving hits.

Pinterest CTA
Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt
Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt recipe
Cheesy chicken avocado melt on marble board

Chipotle Chicken Avocado Melt

This copycat Panera chipotle chicken avocado melt brings restaurant-quality flavors to your kitchen in just 15 minutes! Smoky chipotle mayo, BBQ chicken, fresh avocado, and melted Colby jack cheese grilled to perfection on buttery sourdough bread.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 15 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Lunch
Cuisine American
Servings 1 sandwich
Calories 1700 kcal

Equipment

  • Heavy bottom skillet
  • Small Bowl
  • Lid for skillet

Ingredients
  

  • 2 tablespoon butter divided and softened
  • 2 slices sourdough bread or other sliced white bread
  • 2 tablespoon mayonnaise
  • 3 teaspoon canned chipotle adobo sauce divided
  • ½ cup shredded colby jack cheese
  • 1.5 Fresh California Avocados ripe, thinly sliced
  • ½ cup cooked shredded chicken
  • 2 tablespoon bbq sauce

Instructions
 

  • Spread 1 tablespoon of butter thinly on one side of each sourdough bread slice and set aside. Place the remaining 1 tablespoon of butter into a heavy bottom skillet and set aside.
  • In a small bowl, mix together mayonnaise and chipotle adobo sauce. Smear chipotle mayo evenly onto both sides of the unbuttered side of bread.
  • On one bread slice, sprinkle the shredded Colby jack cheese evenly.
  • Top cheese with ½ fresh California avocado, thinly sliced.
  • In a small bowl, mix together shredded chicken and 2 tablespoon of BBQ sauce until well combined. Add the chicken onto the other slice of bread and put the slices together to form a sandwich.
  • Heat heavy bottom skillet on medium heat until the butter is melted. Add the sandwich to the pan and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side on medium heat or until the bottom is golden brown.
  • Add in 1 tablespoon of water to the bottom of the pan and place a lid over the sandwich. The steam from the water will help melt the cheese and make the sandwich cheesy and gooey. Remove from pan and serve with a pickle and/or tomato soup.

Notes

I love using rotisserie chicken for this recipe but feel free to sub in with your favorite chicken or leftover cooked chicken.
Add Bacon: Honestly always a solid choice. I love adding bacon to a sandwich for extra flavor and heartiness.
Cheese: Swap in any of your favorite melty cheeses. Cheddar, Fontina, and Gouda are all great cheeses to melt in a sandwich with.
Different Bread: You can use any hearty white bread. If you don't love sourdough try focaccia, ciabatta or sliced french bread.

Nutrition

Calories: 1700kcalCarbohydrates: 111gProtein: 54gFat: 120gSaturated Fat: 40gPolyunsaturated Fat: 22gMonounsaturated Fat: 51gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 187mgSodium: 4534mgPotassium: 1978mgFiber: 24gSugar: 20gVitamin A: 1954IUVitamin C: 31mgCalcium: 602mgIron: 9mg
Keyword Avocado Melt, chicken, Chipotle, Chipotle Chicken, Chipotle recipe
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe Quick and Tasty

May 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Tonight I'm sharing one of my absolute favorite chipotle chicken pasta recipe that consistently wows my family! This creamy, spicy delight combines tender chicken, fresh vegetables, and a smoky chipotle cream sauce that'll have everyone asking for seconds. Who doesn't love a pasta dish that's both simple and incredibly satisfying?

The first time I made this was on a busy Tuesday when I needed something quick but special. Emily was having friends over, and I wanted to impress them without spending hours in the kitchen.

Let me tell you - this recipe was an instant hit! The combination of smoky chipotle flavor with creamy goodness creates the perfect balance of heat and comfort.

What I love most about this dish is how it comes together in just 30 minutes. It's seriously one of those recipes that looks fancy but is surprisingly easy to execute. If you're craving something with a kick but still comforting, this creamy chipotle chicken recipe will become your new go-to dinner solution.

Why You Will Love This Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe

creamy chipotle chicken pasta with asparagus in a skillet stirred with wooden spoon

  • Quick and Easy: Ready in just 30 minutes - perfect for busy weeknights!
  • Perfect Balance: The smoky chipotle gives just the right amount of heat without being overwhelming
  • One-Pot Wonder: Most ingredients cook in the same pan, making cleanup a breeze
  • Customizable: Easily adjust the spice level by adding more or less chipotle
  • Kid-Friendly: My Emily loves this (and she's usually picky about spicy food!)
  • Restaurant Quality: Tastes like it came from your favorite Mexican restaurant

Ingredients For Chipotle Chicken Pasta

For the Chicken:

  • 8 oz. boneless, skinless chicken thighs (or chicken breasts)
  • Salt and cracked black pepper
  • ½ tsp. ground cumin
  • 1 tbsp. olive oil

Chipotle Cream Sauce:

  • ¾ cup half and half (or heavy cream)
  • 2 garlic cloves
  • 1 large chipotle pepper (or two small peppers)
  • 1 tsp. adobo sauce from the chipotle pepper can
  • 1 tsp. honey

For the Vegetables:

  • ⅓ cup finely chopped yellow onion
  • ½ cup finely chopped yellow bell pepper
  • ½ cup chopped asparagus spears

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. dried penne pasta
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan
  • 1 tbsp. fresh lemon juice
  • ½ cup reserved pasta water
  • Chopped green onion for garnish

I always keep these ingredients stocked because this recipe is a lifesaver when I need a quick dinner.

The chipotle peppers in adobo sauce are a game-changer - they're available in the Mexican section of most grocery stores!

How To Make Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe

Prepare The Chicken

  1. Season the chicken thighs (or breasts) generously with salt, pepper, and cumin.
  2. Let them sit for a few minutes while you prep the sauce - this helps the flavors penetrate the meat.
creamy chipotle sauce in a blender viewed from above
two seared chicken thighs cooking in a black skillet

Make The Spicy Chipotle Cream Sauce

  1. Combine half and half, garlic cloves, honey, chipotle pepper, adobo sauce, and a pinch of salt in a small blender or food processor.
  2. Blend until completely smooth. This sauce is the star of the show!

Cook The Chicken Perfectly

  1. Heat olive oil in a large nonstick pan over medium heat.
  2. Cook the chicken for 3-4 minutes per side (depending on thickness) until golden brown and cooked through. The internal temperature should reach 165°F.
  3. Transfer to a cutting board and cover with foil to keep warm. Don't skip this resting step - it keeps the chicken juicy and tender!

Sauté The Vegetables

  1. In the same pan (don't clean it!), add the chopped bell peppers and onions with a pinch of salt and pepper.
  2. Cook for 5-6 minutes, stirring occasionally.

The browned bits from the chicken will add incredible flavor to your veggies. This is where the magic happens!

creamy chipotle sauce with asparagus cooking in a black skillet
penne pasta added to creamy chipotle sauce in a skillet

Boil The Pasta Meanwhile

  1. Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil.
  2. Add the penne and cook according to package directions, minus one minute for al dente texture.
  3. Reserve ½ cup of pasta water before draining.

Add The Asparagus

  1. Once the peppers and onions are softened, add the chopped asparagus.
  2. Cook for 3-4 minutes until it begins to get tender. I love the color and crunch it adds to this dish!

Bring Everything Together

  1. Pour the chipotle cream sauce into the pan with the vegetables.
  2. Let it simmer for 5-6 minutes until thickened.
  3. Meanwhile, cut the rested chicken into bite-sized pieces.

Combine Pasta And Sauce

  1. Add the drained pasta to the pan with the cream sauce.
  2. Toss to coat every single noodle - this is where patience pays off!

Final Touches

creamy chipotle chicken pasta cooking with wooden spoon
creamy chipotle chicken pasta served in a white bowl with fork

  1. Add the chicken pieces, Parmesan cheese, lemon juice, and season with salt and pepper.
  2. Gradually add the reserved pasta water until you reach your desired consistency. The pasta water helps bind everything together beautifully.
  3. Garnish with chopped green onions and serve immediately!

Storage And Reheating Tips For Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe

This creamy chipotle chicken pasta keeps beautifully in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

Store in an airtight container to maintain freshness.

My favorite reheating method? Add the leftover pasta to a saucepan with a splash of chicken broth or milk.

Warm over medium-low heat, stirring frequently. This prevents the sauce from breaking and keeps it creamy and delicious.

You can also reheat individual portions in the microwave, adding a tablespoon of liquid and stirring halfway through.

Add a fresh grind of black pepper when serving - it really brightens the flavors!

I've experimented with freezing this dish, but I'll be honest - the texture isn't quite the same after thawing.

It's best enjoyed fresh or within a few days of making it.

creamy pasta topped with asparagus green onions and cracked pepper

Popular Variations For This Chipotle Pasta Recipe

Want to mix things up? Here are some variations I've tried and loved:

  • Add Different Proteins: Try this chipotle honey chicken variation or even shrimp for a seafood twist
  • Vegetable Swaps: Use zucchini, spinach, or cherry tomatoes instead of asparagus
  • Cheese Options: Substitute cream cheese or Mexican crema for different richness levels
  • Spice Levels: For less heat, use just the adobo sauce without the pepper
  • Pasta Shapes: Penne, rigatoni, or even shells work wonderfully

I once made this with leftover blackened salmon instead of chicken - absolutely delicious!

Sometimes the best recipes come from happy accidents.

For something different, try making it burrito-style with this chipotle chicken burrito recipe - it's another family favorite!

Frequently Asked Questions About Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe

What Seasoning Is Closest To Chipotle?

The closest substitute for chipotle is smoked paprika combined with cayenne pepper or chili powder. Use 1 teaspoon smoked paprika plus ¼ teaspoon cayenne to replace 1 chipotle pepper. I discovered this when I ran out of chipotles mid-recipe!

Can You Use Milk Instead Of Cream In Pasta?

Yes, absolutely! I've done this many times when I'm out of cream. Use whole milk mixed with 1 tablespoon of flour to prevent curdling. The sauce will be lighter but still delicious. Just whisk that flour in well!

What Are The Ingredients In Chipotle Seasoning?

Chipotle seasoning typically contains ground chipotle peppers, cumin, garlic powder, onion powder, smoked paprika, and sometimes oregano and black pepper. It's like a little smoky flavor party in a jar!

What To Put In Chicken Pasta?

Essential additions for chicken pasta include aromatics like garlic and onions, vegetables like bell peppers and asparagus, herbs like parsley or basil, cheese (Parmesan is my favorite), and a good sauce - whether creamy or tomato-based. The key is balancing flavors and textures.

Recipes You May Like

  • Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe - Another amazing way to use chipotle flavors!
  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken - If you love creamy chicken dishes
  • Homemade Enchilada Sauce - Perfect for more Mexican-inspired dinners

Conclusion

This chipotle chicken pasta recipe has become one of our family's most requested meals, and I think it'll become one of yours too! The combination of smoky chipotle, tender chicken, and fresh vegetables creates a dinner that's both satisfying and exciting.

I love how this recipe brings restaurant-quality flavors to your own kitchen without any fuss. Whether you're cooking for a crowd or just treating yourself to something special, this pasta delivers every single time.

Give this recipe a try tonight - I promise you won't regret it! Save it to Pinterest so you can find it again, and let me know in the comments how your family likes it.

Pinterest CTA
chipotle chicken pasta recipe
chipotle chicken pasta
creamy chipotle chicken pasta topped with parmesan and green onions

Chipotle Chicken Pasta Recipe

This creamy, spicy chipotle chicken pasta recipe combines tender chicken, fresh vegetables, and a smoky chipotle cream sauce that's ready in just 30 minutes. Perfect for busy weeknights!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 3 servings
Calories 407 kcal

Equipment

  • Large nonstick pan
  • Large pot for pasta
  • Small blender or food processor
  • Cutting Board

Ingredients
  

For the Chicken

  • 8 oz boneless, skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • salt
  • cracked black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil

For the Chipotle Cream Sauce

  • ¾ cup half and half or heavy cream
  • 2 garlic cloves
  • 1 large chipotle pepper or two small peppers
  • 1 teaspoon adobo sauce from the chipotle pepper can
  • 1 teaspoon honey

For the Vegetables

  • ⅓ cup finely chopped yellow onion or white onion
  • ½ cup finely chopped yellow bell pepper
  • ½ cup chopped asparagus spears

For the Pasta

  • 8 oz dried penne pasta
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • ½ cup reserved pasta water
  • chopped green onion for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Season the chicken thighs (or breasts) generously with salt, pepper, and cumin. Let them sit for a few minutes while you prep the sauce - this helps the flavors penetrate the meat.
  • Combine half and half, garlic cloves, honey, chipotle pepper, adobo sauce, and a pinch of salt in a small blender or food processor. Blend until completely smooth. This sauce is the star of the show!
  • Heat olive oil in a large nonstick pan over medium heat. Cook the chicken for 3-4 minutes per side (depending on thickness) until golden brown and cooked through. The internal temperature should reach 165°F.
  • Transfer to a cutting board and cover with foil to keep warm. Don't skip this resting step - it keeps the chicken juicy and tender!
  • In the same pan (don't clean it!), add the chopped bell peppers and onions with a pinch of salt and pepper. Cook for 5-6 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the penne and cook according to package directions, minus one minute for al dente texture. Reserve ½ cup of pasta water before draining.
  • Once the peppers and onions are softened, add the chopped asparagus. Cook for 3-4 minutes until it begins to get tender. I love the color and crunch it adds to this dish!
  • Pour the chipotle cream sauce into the pan with the vegetables. Let it simmer for 5-6 minutes until thickened. Meanwhile, cut the rested chicken into bite-sized pieces.
  • Add the drained pasta to the pan with the cream sauce. Toss to coat every single noodle - this is where patience pays off!
  • Add the chicken pieces, Parmesan cheese, lemon juice, and season with salt and pepper. Gradually add the reserved pasta water until you reach your desired consistency. The pasta water helps bind everything together beautifully.
  • Garnish with chopped green onions and serve immediately!

Notes

For Chicken: Usually two large chicken thighs or three smaller ones. For chicken breast, usually one large breast.
Garlic Substitute: No fresh garlic? Use ½ tsp. garlic powder instead!
Bell Pepper Options: Red, green, or orange bell pepper are all great substitutes for yellow bell pepper in this recipe.
Asparagus Note: The cooking times in this recipe are for thick asparagus stalks (just under ½″ thick). If you have skinny asparagus stalks, reduce the cooking time by two minutes.
Storage: This chipotle pasta can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Reheat with a splash of milk or broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 25gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 75mgSodium: 580mgPotassium: 450mgFiber: 3gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 25IUVitamin C: 45mgCalcium: 15mgIron: 2.5mg
Keyword chipotle chicken pasta, chipotle pasta, Creamy, pasta chipotle, spicy chicken chipotle pasta
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Creamy Chipotle Chicken Recipe {Only 30 Minutes}

May 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

You know those nights when you're scrolling through endless dinner options, wanting something exciting but not complicated? Let me tell you about my go-to creamy chipotle chicken recipe that's become our family's Friday night tradition!

I discovered this recipe during one of those "what's in my pantry" moments last year. Emily was having friends over, and I needed something that would impress but wouldn't keep me tied to the kitchen all evening.

After a few tweaks (and maybe a tiny kitchen disaster involving too much adobo sauce - yikes!), we landed on this perfect balance of smoky, creamy, and absolutely delicious.

The best part? This chipotle cream chicken comes together in just 30 minutes. No fancy techniques, no hard-to-find ingredients - just pure, restaurant-quality flavor in your own kitchen.

Plus, it pairs beautifully with my chipotle chicken burrito recipe and chipotle honey chicken for when you want to mix things up!

Whether you're cooking for date night or feeding the whole family, this chicken chipotle sauce recipe is about to become your new obsession. Trust me on this one!

Why You'll Love This Creamy Chipotle Chicken Recipe

chipotle chicken breast served over rice in white bowl

  • Quick and easy: Ready in just 30 minutes with minimal prep
  • One-pan wonder: Less cleanup means more time to enjoy your meal
  • Perfectly balanced heat: Smoky chipotle peppers without overwhelming spice
  • Restaurant-quality flavor: Tastes like it came from your favorite Mexican restaurant
  • Versatile serving options: Works with rice, pasta, quinoa, or even in tacos
  • Family-friendly: Adjustable spice level to suit everyone's taste

Creamy Chipotle Chicken Recipe Ingredients

For the Chicken:

  • 4 teaspoons extra-virgin olive oil, divided
  • 4 (5-6 oz.) boneless, skinless chicken breasts
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Chipotle Cream Sauce:

  • ½ cup onion, diced
  • 2 cloves garlic, minced
  • 3 chipotle peppers, minced
  • 1 tablespoon adobo sauce
  • ½ cup low-sodium chicken broth
  • 4 oz. ⅓ less fat cream cheese
  • 2-3 tablespoons plain non-fat Greek yogurt or sour cream

How to Make Creamy Chipotle Chicken

Sear the Chicken Breasts

  1. Heat 2 teaspoons of olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
  2. While the oil heats up, season your chicken breasts with salt and pepper on both sides.
  3. Add the chicken to the hot pan and sear for 4 minutes on each side until golden brown. This initial searing locks in the juices and creates that beautiful golden crust.
  4. Don't move the chicken around - let it develop that gorgeous color!
  5. Remove the chicken from the skillet and place on a plate. Cover with aluminum foil to keep warm. (Don't worry, they'll finish cooking in the chipotle cream sauce!)
creamy chipotle chicken with onion bits in orange sauce
creamy chipotle chicken close up with wooden spoon

Build the Flavor Base

  1. Reduce the heat to medium and add the remaining 2 teaspoons of olive oil to the same pan. Those browned bits from the chicken? That's pure flavor gold!
  2. Add the diced onion and cook for 4-5 minutes, stirring occasionally, until softened and slightly translucent.
  3. Then add the minced garlic and chipotle peppers. Sauté for just 30 seconds - you want that garlic fragrant but not burned.

Create the Chipotle Cream Sauce

  1. Here's where the magic happens! Add the adobo sauce, chicken broth, and cream cheese to the pan.
  2. Stir everything together until the cream cheese is completely melted and the sauce is smooth.
  3. The combination of chipotle peppers and adobo sauce creates that perfect smoky heat that makes this dish so special. It's like homemade enchilada sauce but even creamier!

Finish Cooking the Chicken in Chipotle Sauce

  1. Return the seared chicken breasts to the skillet, along with any accumulated juices.
  2. Turn the chicken to coat it completely in the chipotle cream sauce.
  3. Cover the pan, reduce heat to medium-low, and cook for 7-9 minutes until the chicken is cooked through. The exact time depends on how thick your chicken breasts are.
  4. I like to spoon some sauce over the chicken halfway through cooking - it keeps everything moist and flavorful.
creamy chipotle chicken close up with herbs on top
creamy chipotle chicken in skillet with wooden spoon

Final Touches

  1. Once the chicken is cooked through (internal temperature should reach 165°F), turn off the heat and stir in the Greek yogurt.
  2. This adds a lovely tang and extra creaminess to the sauce.
  3. Season with additional salt and pepper to taste. Serve immediately with extra sauce spooned over the top!

Tips and Techniques for Perfect Chipotle Sauce Chicken

Choose the Right Chicken Breasts

I always use chicken breasts for this recipe, but here's the thing - not all chicken breasts are created equal! Look for ones that are similar in size so they cook evenly.

If you have really thick breasts, you can pound them to an even thickness.

Controlling the Heat Level

The beauty of this creamy chipotle chicken is that you can adjust the spice level to your liking. Start with 1-2 chipotle peppers if you're sensitive to heat, or go up to 4-5 if you like it spicy.

The adobo sauce adds flavor more than heat, so feel free to use a bit extra!

Make It Your Own

This recipe reminds me of when I first tried making creamy garlic parmesan chicken - so many possibilities!

You can add sautéed mushrooms, bell peppers, or even black beans to make it heartier. Emily loves it when I add corn for a bit of sweetness.

creamy chicken breasts in skillet with thick sauce

Storage and Reheating Your Chicken Chipotle Sauce

Storing Leftovers

Once cooled, store the creamy chipotle chicken in a covered container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

I recommend storing the chicken with the sauce to keep it moist and flavorful.

Reheating Tips

Before reheating, slice the chicken for more even heating. Warm it gently in a skillet over medium-low heat, adding a splash of chicken broth if the sauce seems too thick.

You can also reheat it in the microwave, but be careful not to overcook the chicken.

The flavors actually develop even more overnight, making leftovers almost better than the original! We often enjoy it the next day, much like leftover grilled chili cilantro lime chicken.

Delicious Creamy Chipotle Chicken Recipe Variations

Different Protein Options

While this recipe is perfect with chicken breasts, you can easily substitute boneless chicken thighs for extra juiciness. They'll need an additional 2-3 minutes of cooking time.

You could even try it with firm fish or shrimp for a seafood twist!

chipotle chicken with sauce over rice in white plate

Sauce Modifications

Want to make the chipotle cream sauce lighter? Use light cream cheese or even cottage cheese blended until smooth.

For a richer version, try using heavy cream instead of Greek yogurt. Each variation brings its own character to the dish.

Serving Suggestions

The versatility of this chicken in chipotle cream sauce is amazing! We love it over:

  • Steamed brown rice (my personal favorite)
  • Quinoa for a protein boost
  • Pasta for a fusion twist
  • Mashed potatoes for comfort food vibes
  • Inside warm tortillas for quick tacos

Sometimes I serve it alongside bacon breakfast burrito components for a breakfast-for-dinner night that Emily absolutely loves!

Frequently Asked Questions About Creamy Chipotle Chicken

Can I use chicken thighs instead of chicken breasts for this recipe?

Absolutely! Boneless chicken thighs work wonderfully in this creamy chipotle chicken recipe. They're naturally more moist and forgiving. Just adjust the cooking time - thighs typically need an extra 2-3 minutes to cook through completely.

How spicy is this chipotle cream chicken?

This recipe has a mild to medium heat level using 3 chipotle peppers. The creaminess helps balance the spice. If you're new to chipotle peppers, start with 1-2 peppers and taste the sauce before adding more. Remember, you can always add more, but you can't take it away!

What can I use if I don't have Greek yogurt?

No problem! You can substitute sour cream, or even skip it entirely. The Greek yogurt adds creaminess and a slight tang, but the dish will still be delicious without it. If you want that tangy flavor, you could add a squeeze of lime juice at the end.

Can I make this creamy chipotle chicken recipe ahead of time?

Yes! You can prep the sauce ahead and even cook the chicken completely. Store everything together in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. When reheating, do it gently and stir in fresh Greek yogurt right before serving for the best texture.

Nutritional Information and Dietary Considerations

This creamy chipotle chicken packs a protein punch with each serving containing about 39g of protein. At 365 calories per serving, it's a satisfying yet reasonable dinner option.

For those watching their carb intake, this pairs beautifully with cauliflower rice or zucchini noodles.

The recipe is naturally gluten-free, making it suitable for various dietary needs.

More Delicious Chicken Recipes You'll Love

If you enjoyed this creamy chipotle chicken recipe, you'll also love these similar dishes from our kitchen:

  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken - Another one-pan wonder with incredible flavor
  • Chipotle Honey Chicken - Sweet meets spicy in the best way
  • Grilled Chili Cilantro Lime Chicken - Perfect for outdoor cooking season

Why This Chipotle Sauce Chicken is a Weeknight Winner

This creamy chipotle chicken recipe has honestly transformed our weeknight dinners. It's become one of those recipes I can make with my eyes closed (though I don't recommend that!), and Emily always knows when I'm making it because the whole house smells incredible.

The combination of smoky chipotle peppers, creamy sauce, and perfectly cooked chicken creates a restaurant-quality meal that's surprisingly simple to make.

Whether you're cooking for a special occasion or just Tuesday night dinner, this recipe delivers every single time.

Save this recipe for later on Pinterest, and don't forget to share your results in the comments below! I love seeing how you make this dish your own.

Pinterest CTA
chipotle cream chicken
chicken chipotle and chicken chipotle sauce
creamy chipotle chicken in black skillet on marble surface

Creamy Chipotle Chicken Recipe

This creamy chipotle chicken recipe is the perfect weeknight dinner! Ready in just 30 minutes with smoky chipotle peppers and a rich cream sauce that the whole family will love.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 5 minutes mins
Cook Time 25 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Mexican
Servings 4 servings
Calories 365 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Skillet
  • Aluminum Foil

Ingredients
  

For the Chicken

  • 4 teaspoons extra-virgin olive oil divided
  • 4 boneless, skinless chicken breasts 5-6 oz. each
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Chipotle Cream Sauce

  • ½ cup onion diced
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 3 chipotle peppers minced
  • 1 tablespoon adobo sauce
  • ½ cup low-sodium chicken broth
  • 4 oz less fat cream cheese ⅓ less fat
  • 2-3 tablespoons plain non-fat Greek yogurt or sour cream

Instructions
 

  • Heat 2 teaspoons of olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
  • Season chicken breasts with salt and pepper. Add to pan and sear for 4 minutes on each side, until golden brown.
  • Remove chicken breasts from the skillet to a plate and cover with aluminum foil to keep warm. (They will finish cooking later.)
  • Reduce heat to medium and add remaining two teaspoons olive oil to pan.
  • Add diced onion and cook, stirring occasionally, for 4-5 minutes, until softened. Add garlic and chipotle peppers and sauté for 30 more seconds.
  • Add adobo sauce, chicken broth and cream cheese and stir until melted.
  • Return the chicken breasts to the skillet, along with any accumulated juices, and turn to coat in the sauce.
  • Cover the pan, reduce the heat to medium-low and cook for 7-9 minutes, until chicken is cooked through. (It will depend on how thick your chicken breasts are.) I like to spoon some of the sauce over the chicken breasts halfway through the cooking time.
  • Once chicken is cooked through, turn off heat and stir in Greek yogurt. Season to taste with salt and pepper.
  • Serve chicken breasts with extra sauce spooned over the top, and enjoy!

Notes

Efficiency Tip: You can chop your onion, garlic and chipotle peppers while the chicken is searing.
Cream Cheese: I use ⅓ less fat cream cheese here. Full fat would work fine, too. You could substitute fat-free cream cheese if that's what you prefer, but it'll lose a little richness.
Chipotles: I use 3 chipotle peppers and 1 tablespoon of the adobo sauce in this recipe. You can increase or decrease that to your liking.
Serving Suggestions: We love serving this over steamed brown rice with plenty of extra sauce! You could also try it over quinoa, pasta or mashed potatoes.
Leftovers: Leftover chicken, once cooled, can be stored in a covered container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. Be sure to store and reheat the chicken with the sauce. Also, it helps to slice the chicken before reheating so it heats through more quickly and evenly.

Nutrition

Calories: 365kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 39gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 146mgSodium: 875mgFiber: 1gSugar: 6g
Keyword chicken chipotle sauce, Chipotle Chicken, chipotle cream chicken, Creamy, creamy chipotle chicken
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

The Best Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe

May 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Last week, I had a serious Chipotle craving but didn't want to drive 20 minutes just for a burrito (we've all been there, right?).That's when I decided to master my own chipotle chicken burrito recipe – and let me tell you, it turned out even better than I expected!

This homemade version captures all those smoky, spicy flavors without the wait. Plus, you can load it up with as much guac as you want without paying extra.

The secret is in the grilled chicken and that perfect chipotle ranch combo that makes every bite incredible.

If you're anything like me and love making versatile meal options at home, you might also enjoy these Mexican meal prep bowls or these healthy buffalo chicken wraps for easy weeknight dinners.

Why You Will Love This Recipe

hand holding burrito with chipotle drizzle easy recipe

  • Quick assembly time - Takes just 10 minutes to put together once ingredients are prepped
  • Restaurant-quality flavor at a fraction of the cost
  • Customizable filling options - add as much or as little of each ingredient as you prefer
  • Perfect for weekend meal prep - prep ingredients ahead for quick assembly during the week
  • Pan-fried crispy exterior gives it that perfect golden texture
  • Kid-friendly - my daughter Emily loves making her own mini versions

Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe Ingredients

For the Chipotle Ranch Grilled Chicken Burritos:

  • 8 large burrito flour or wheat tortillas
  • 4 cups iceberg lettuce, shredded
  • 1½ cups Roma, slicing, or vine tomatoes, diced
  • 1 pound grilled chicken (cubed) or shredded chicken
  • 2 cups Mexican/fiesta style or cheddar cheese, shredded
  • 1 large Hass avocado, diced

For serving (optional):

  • 3 ounces crunchy tortilla chips
  • Avocado ranch dressing
  • Chipotle ranch dressing
  • Side of cilantro lime or cantina rice
  • Side Mexican style black beans

I always keep pre-grilled chicken in my freezer for recipes like this. It's such a game-changer for quick dinners!

hand holding chicken burrito with chipotle sauce

How to Make a Perfect Chicken Burrito

Step 1: Prepare the Tortillas

Warm the tortillas for a few seconds in a dry skillet over medium-low heat to make them soft and easy to fold.

This step is SO important – cold tortillas crack when you try to roll them. Trust me, I learned this the hard way after ruining three burritos in a row!

Step 2: Assemble Your Burritos

Divide the burrito ingredients among the 8 tortillas:

  • Spoon about ½ cup of lettuce
  • Add ⅓ cup chicken
  • Sprinkle ¼ cup of cheese
  • Add 3 tablespoons of tomatoes
  • Include ⅛ of an avocado in the center of the tortilla

Sprinkle with a few crunchy tortilla chips, and 1 tablespoon each of chipotle ranch and avocado ranch dressing.

Pro tip: Don't overfill them! I used to stuff these so full they'd explode when I tried to roll them. Less is definitely more here.

jar of chipotle ranch sauce on wooden board
avocado ranch sauce in a glass jar

Step 3: Perfect Burrito Rolling Technique

Fold the sides of the tortilla inward and roll up tightly into a burrito.

Here's my secret technique: pull the filling back slightly from the edges before folding. This prevents everything from squeezing out the sides when you roll.

Step 4: Pan-Fry for Golden Perfection

Lightly mist a frying pan with cooking spray and warm over medium heat.

Add the burritos seam-side down to the pan (you may need to do in two batches) and cook for a few minutes on each side until golden and toasted.

The pan-frying step really makes these special! It creates this amazing crispy outer layer while keeping everything warm and melty inside.

hand holding burrito with avocado ranch drizzle
hand holding burrito with chipotle drizzle

Step 5: Serve and Enjoy

Remove the burritos from heat.

Drizzle with more avocado or chipotle ranch dressing, if desired. Enjoy!

I usually serve these with a side of Mexican street corn salad – it's the perfect complement to the smoky flavors.

Storage Tips for Chicken Burrito Recipe

How to Store Assembled Burritos

If you have leftover assembled burritos, wrap them tightly in plastic wrap and store them in a Ziploc baggie in the refrigerator.

We recommend eating assembled burritos within 1-2 days, as they tend to get soggy.

Store leftover ingredients in individual airtight containers for 3-4 days in the refrigerator.

Here's what I've learned from experience: these burritos are best enjoyed fresh. However, if you must store them, wrap each one individually in aluminum foil first, then plastic wrap. This double layer helps prevent sogginess.

Meal Prep Strategy

We highly recommend assembling the burritos only when you're ready to eat them, as they do not make a good meal prep dish.

However, you can prepare and store the ingredients ahead of time to cut down on preparation time.

On Sundays, I prep all the ingredients separately. Then during the week, assembling these takes less than 5 minutes!

Best Ways to Reheat

Microwave option: Reheat assembled burritos by microwaving for 30-60 seconds.

Air fryer option: You can also reheat assembled burritos in the air fryer at 400°F for 5-7 minutes for an extra crispy option.

Pan method: Heat a dry pan over medium heat and warm for 2-3 minutes per side.

For refrigerated leftover ingredients, assemble the burritos according to the recipe instructions.

chicken burrito with avocado ranch drizzle

Creative Burrito Recipe Variations

Want to switch things up? Here are some of my favorite variations:

Protein Alternatives

  • Try barbacoa beef instead of chicken
  • Use cilantro lime shrimp for a seafood twist
  • Make it vegetarian with black bean carnitas

Add Some Heat

  • Include sliced jalapeños for extra spice
  • Mix in some chipotle chili powder with the chicken
  • Add a drizzle of hot sauce

Different Cheese Options

  • Use pepper jack for more flavor
  • Try a Mexican cheese blend
  • Go dairy-free with your favorite vegan cheese

FAQ About Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe

Can I freeze chipotle ranch grilled chicken burritos?

We don't recommend freezing assembled burritos as they tend to get soggy. Instead, store individual ingredients separately in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.I tried freezing these once and they turned into a mushy mess when thawed. Learn from my mistake and stick to refrigerator storage!

Can I prepare chipotle ranch grilled chicken burritos ahead of time?

They're best assembled fresh. You can prep all ingredients ahead and store separately for up to 3-4 days, then assemble when ready to eat.This is honestly the best approach. I prep everything on Sunday and make fresh burritos throughout the week.

What ingredients are in chipotle burrito?

This recipe includes grilled chicken, shredded cheese, lettuce, diced tomatoes, avocado, chipotle ranch dressing, and optional tortilla chips wrapped in a large tortilla.The beauty of burritos is in their simplicity! Each ingredient plays its part in creating that perfect bite.

How to make a burrito chicken?

Use pre-grilled chicken (cubed or shredded), warm the tortilla, add about ⅓ cup chicken with other ingredients in the center, fold sides inward, and roll tightly.

Pan-fry seam-side down for 2-3 minutes until golden.The rolling technique took me a few tries to master, but now I can wrap these babies blindfolded!

Recipes You May Like

If you enjoyed this chipotle chicken burrito recipe, you might also love these Mexican-inspired dishes:

  • Healthy Buffalo Chicken Wraps - Another delicious wrap with bold flavors
  • Philly Cheesesteak Sliders - Perfect for game day gatherings
  • Creamy Tuscan Chicken Pasta with Sun Dried Tomatoes and Spinach - A comforting dinner option

Conclusion

This chipotle chicken burrito recipe has become a regular in our dinner rotation.

It's quick enough for busy weeknights but special enough for weekend gatherings. The combination of flavors and textures makes every bite satisfying, and you can customize it exactly how you like it.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it turns out! I'd love to hear about any variations you come up with.

Don't forget to save this recipe to your Pinterest boards for easy access later.

Pinterest CTA
chipotle chicken burrito
chipotle chicken burrito recipe
Homemade chicken burrito with chipotle drizzle in hand

Chipotle Chicken Burrito Recipe

This homemade chipotle chicken burrito recipe captures all those smoky, spicy flavors without the wait. Perfect for quick dinners and meal prep!
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 20 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine Mexican, Tex-Mex
Servings 8 burritos
Calories 520 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Burrito Tortillas
  • Dry Skillet
  • Frying Pan

Ingredients
  

Chipotle Ranch Grilled Chicken Burritos

  • 8 large burrito flour or wheat tortillas
  • 4 c iceberg lettuce shredded
  • 1.5 c Roma, slicing, or vine tomatoes diced
  • 1 lb grilled chicken cubed or shredded
  • 2 c Mexican/fiesta style or cheddar cheese shredded
  • 1 large Hass avocado diced

For Serving (Optional)

  • 3 oz crunchy tortilla chips
  • avocado ranch dressing
  • chipotle ranch dressing
  • cilantro lime or cantina rice side
  • Mexican style black beans side

Instructions
 

  • Warm the tortillas for a few seconds in a dry skillet over medium-low heat to make them soft and easy to fold.
  • Divide the burrito ingredients among the 8 tortillas: spoon about ½ cup of lettuce, ⅓ cup chicken, ¼ cup of cheese, 3 tablespoon of tomatoes, and ⅛ of an avocado in the center of the tortilla. Sprinkle with a few crunchy tortilla chips, and 1 tablespoon each of chipotle ranch and avocado ranch dressing.
  • Fold the sides of the tortilla inward and roll up tightly into a burrito.
  • Lightly mist a frying pan with cooking spray and warm over medium heat. Add the burritos seam-side down to the pan (you may need to do in two batches) and cook for a few minutes on each side until golden and toasted.
  • Remove the burritos from heat. Drizzle with more avocado or chipotle ranch dressing, if desired. Enjoy!

Notes

If you have leftover assembled burritos, wrap them tightly in plastic wrap and store them in a Ziploc baggie in the refrigerator. We recommend eating assembled burritos within 1-2 days, as they tend to get soggy. Store leftover ingredients in individual airtight containers for 3-4 days in the refrigerator.
We highly recommend assembling the burritos only when you're ready to eat them, as they do not make a good meal prep dish. However you can prepare and store the ingredients ahead of time to cut down on preparation time.
Reheat assembled burritos by microwaving for 30-60 seconds. You can also reheat assembled burritos in the air fryer at 400F for 5-7 minutes for an extra crispy option.

Nutrition

Calories: 520kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 28gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 70mgSodium: 1280mgPotassium: 480mgFiber: 6gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 850IUVitamin C: 15mgCalcium: 320mgIron: 3.2mg
Keyword burrito, chicken, Chicken Burrito, Chipotle Chicken, Chipotle recipe, Healthy
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Easy Healthy Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

May 12, 2025 by Sarah Leave a Comment

Hey there! I'm so excited to share this Mexican meal prep bowls recipe with you because it's been a total game-changer in my house (Who doesn't love a meal that takes basically no time to throw together?).

Emily and I have been making these every Sunday for the past month, and I honestly can't believe how simple they are while still being SO delicious!

Picture this: You're rushing out the door Monday morning, and your lunch is already packed and waiting for you - fresh, flavorful, and incredibly satisfying. That's exactly what these Mexican meal prep bowls offer!

These healthy buffalo chicken wraps might be another favorite, but these bowls have become our go-to for busy weeks when we need something healthy and quick.

Why You Will Like These Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

arugula chicken avocado mexican cauliflower rice meal prep image

I'm telling you, these bowls hit ALL the right notes:

  • Super quick to assemble - We're talking 10 minutes max when you have everything prepped
  • Only 353 calories per bowl - Perfect for staying on track with your health goals
  • 27 grams of protein - Keeps you satisfied for hours (no 3 PM hunger pangs!)
  • Low-carb friendly - Made with cauliflower rice instead of traditional rice
  • Meal prep perfection - These stay fresh for 4 days in the fridge
  • Customizable - Add your favorite Mexican toppings whenever you want
  • Authentic Mexican flavors - The spiced cauliflower rice tastes like it came from a Mexican restaurant

Ingredients For Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

For The Meal Prep Bowls:

  • 6 cups Mexican Cauliflower Rice (recipe below)
  • 1 cup shredded chicken (cooked)
  • 1 cup arugula or kale
  • 1 avocado

For The Mexican Cauliflower Rice:

  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 1 green pepper (chopped)
  • 10 grape tomatoes (chopped)
  • 1 head cauliflower (or 1 lb bag of cauliflower rice)
  • ½ cup tomato sauce
  • ½ teaspoon onion flakes
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne
  • ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper
  • Dried cilantro (to taste)
  • Salt (to taste)
  • Pepper (to taste)
arugula chicken avocado corn cauliflower rice meal prep

Instructions For Mexican Cauliflower Rice

Making The Mexican Cauliflower Rice:

  1. Wash, dry, and remove greens of the cauliflower.
  2. Cut the cauliflower into small pieces and place in food processor.
  3. Pulse the food processor to create the cauliflower rice. Don't over-process - you want rice-sized pieces, not cauliflower purée!
  4. Sauté the chopped green pepper and tomatoes in olive oil for about 3 minutes until slightly softened.
  5. Add the cauliflower rice and tomato sauce. Allow to simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  6. Add in the remaining spices - cumin, paprika, garlic powder, onion flakes, cayenne, crushed red pepper, dried cilantro, salt, and pepper.
  7. Mix well and continue cooking for another 5 minutes until the cauliflower is tender and the flavors are well combined.

Assembling Your Mexican Meal Prep Bowls:

  1. Cook your chicken in advance (I usually do this on Sunday). You can use my simple seasoned chicken breasts or rotisserie chicken for convenience.
  2. When you're ready to meal prep, divide the Mexican cauliflower rice evenly among your meal prep containers.
  3. Add the shredded chicken and arugula or kale to each container.
  4. Store in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  5. Before serving, add fresh avocado (about ¼ of a medium avocado per bowl).
arugula chicken avocado carrot rice meal prep
arugula chicken avocado mexican cauliflower rice meal prep

Storage And Reheating Tips For Meal Prep Bowls

Let me share what I've learned from making these weekly:

Storage: These bowls keep beautifully in the fridge for up to 4 days when stored in airtight meal prep containers.

I don't recommend freezing them because the texture of the avocado and greens changes.

Reheating: You can eat these cold (which I actually prefer on hot days!) or warm them up.

If heating, microwave for 1-2 minutes without the avocado, then add fresh avocado after heating.

Pro tip: I like to pack the avocado separately until I'm ready to eat - it prevents browning and keeps everything fresher!

side view chicken avocado carrot rice meal prep

Variations For Your Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

Here's where these bowls really shine - they're SO customizable!

After making them dozens of times, here are my favorite variations:

  • Add some beans - Black beans or pinto beans increase the protein and fiber
  • Switch up the protein - Try ground turkey, carnitas, or even shrimp
  • Different greens - Spinach, lettuce, or cabbage work great too
  • Extra toppings - Salsa, shredded cheese, Greek yogurt (instead of sour cream), hot sauce, lime juice
  • Make it spicier - Add jalapeños or increased cayenne to the rice
  • Cheese lovers - A sprinkle of Mexican cheese blend makes everything better

Have you tried my slow-cooker round steak and gravy? It's another fantastic meal prep option!

FAQ About Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

How long will taco bowl meal prep last in the fridge?

These low-carb Mexican meal prep bowls will last about 4 days in the refrigerator when stored properly in meal prep containers.

Can you meal prep taco bowls?

Yes! Simply combine the Mexican cauliflower rice, shredded chicken, and greens in meal prep containers. Add fresh avocado just before serving for best results.

What do you put in a Mexican bowl?

This recipe includes Mexican cauliflower rice, shredded chicken, arugula or kale, and fresh avocado. You can also add toppings like salsa, cheese, or hot sauce.

What kind of rice for taco bowl?

This low-carb version uses cauliflower rice seasoned with Mexican spices including cumin, paprika, garlic powder, and cilantro instead of traditional white or brown rice.

Recipes You May Like

If you're loving these Mexican meal prep bowls, you might also enjoy:

  • Creamy Cajun Shrimp Pasta with Sausage - Another quick weeknight favorite
  • Mediterranean Chickpea Salad - Perfect for meal prep
  • Asian Inspired Beef Lettuce Wraps - Light and fresh
  • Healthy Chicken Pot Pie Soup - Comfort food made healthy
  • Spicy Meatloaf Recipe - Great for Sunday meal prep
  • Buffalo Chicken Quesadillas - Quick and satisfying
side view chicken avocado arugula carrot rice meal prep

Conclusion

These Mexican meal prep bowls have honestly changed the way we approach weekday lunches in our house.

They're quick, healthy, delicious, AND they make the whole week run more smoothly (What more could you ask for?).

The combination of protein-packed chicken, nutrient-rich cauliflower rice, fresh greens, and creamy avocado creates the perfect balanced meal.

Plus, at only 353 calories and 27 grams of protein, they keep me satisfied without feeling heavy.

Give this recipe a try and let me know how it goes! I'd love to hear about your favorite variations or toppings.

Don't forget to save this recipe to your Pinterest board for easy meal prep inspiration!

Pinterest CTA
Healthy Low-Carb Mexican Meal Prep Bowls
Low-Carb Mexican Meal Prep Bowls
four containers of arugula chicken avocado carrot rice meal prep

Healthy Mexican Meal Prep Bowls

These healthy Mexican meal prep bowls with cauliflower rice are perfect for busy weeks! Only 353 calories, 27g protein, and ready in just 10 minutes. Make ahead for easy lunches all week long.
No ratings yet
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Total Time 10 minutes mins
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Lunch
Cuisine Mexican
Servings 4 bowls
Calories 353 kcal

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Large Skillet
  • Meal Prep Containers

Ingredients
  

For The Meal Prep Bowls

  • 6 cups Mexican Cauliflower Rice recipe below
  • 1 cup shredded chicken cooked
  • 1 cup arugula or kale
  • 1 avocado

For The Mexican Cauliflower Rice

  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 1 green pepper chopped
  • 10 grape tomatoes chopped
  • 1 head cauliflower or 1 lb bag of cauliflower rice
  • ½ cup tomato sauce
  • ½ teaspoon onion flakes
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne
  • ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper
  • dried cilantro to taste
  • salt to taste
  • pepper to taste

Instructions
 

  • Wash, dry, and remove greens of the cauliflower.
  • Cut the cauliflower into small pieces and place in food processor.
  • Pulse the food processor to create the cauliflower rice. Don't over-process - you want rice-sized pieces, not cauliflower purée!
  • Sauté the chopped green pepper and tomatoes in olive oil for about 3 minutes until slightly softened.
  • Add the cauliflower rice and tomato sauce. Allow to simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • Add in the remaining spices - cumin, paprika, garlic powder, onion flakes, cayenne, crushed red pepper, dried cilantro, salt, and pepper.
  • Mix well and continue cooking for another 5 minutes until the cauliflower is tender and the flavors are well combined.
  • Cook your chicken in advance (I usually do this on Sunday). You can use my simple seasoned chicken breasts or rotisserie chicken for convenience.
  • When you're ready to meal prep, divide the Mexican cauliflower rice evenly among your meal prep containers.
  • Add the shredded chicken and arugula or kale to each container.
  • Store in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Before serving, add fresh avocado (about ¼ of a medium avocado per bowl).

Notes

Macros - Carbs: 18 Fat: 15 Protein: 27
*These Low-Carb Mexican Meal Prep Bowls can last about 4 days in the refrigerator.
*Each bowl has about ¼ of a medium sized avocado, but feel free to add more!

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 27gFat: 15g
Keyword bowls, Gluten-Free, Healthy, Low Carb, Meal Prep, Mexican Meal Prep Bowls
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi Recipe

May 11, 2025 by Sarah 2 Comments

Have you ever tasted something so delicious you'd marry the person who made it? Well, this marry me chicken gnocchi might just be that dish! I created this recipe last month when Emily and I were craving something cozy but didn't want to spend hours in the kitchen. The creamy sauce with sun-dried tomatoes and pillowy gnocchi came together in just 30 minutes, and wow – the flavor is absolutely incredible!

If you've tried any of my other "marry me" recipes like my Marry Me Chicken Orzo or Marry Me Chicken Meatballs, you know these dishes are special.

This gnocchi version might be my favorite yet – it's got all that creamy, savory goodness but with the added bonus of those tender potato dumplings that soak up the sauce so perfectly.

Why You'll Love This Chicken and Gnocchi Combo

Creamy chicken gnocchi in white bowl with basil and parmesan

  • Ready in just 30 minutes from start to finish
  • Uses simple ingredients you probably already have
  • The creamy sauce is absolutely drool-worthy (seriously!)
  • Pillowy gnocchi cooks right in the sauce for maximum flavor
  • Everything cooks in one pan for minimal cleanup
  • Perfect for date night or a quick family dinner
  • Leftovers (if you have any!) reheat beautifully

Ingredients for Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

  • 1½ lb potato gnocchi
  • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken breast, cut into cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ½ tablespoon Herbs de Provence
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes (or to taste)
  • ½ tablespoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ cup onions, chopped
  • 3 garlic cloves, finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ⅓ cup sun-dried tomatoes, chopped
  • 10 g fresh basil, chopped (plus more for garnish)
  • ½ cup chicken stock
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 1 cup water (optional, use according to preference)
  • Salt and black pepper to taste
  • ½ cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese

How to Make This Incredible Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

Preparing the Chicken

  1. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat until hot.
  2. Add the cubed chicken breast and season with smoked paprika, garlic powder, salt, and black pepper. Stir to combine.
  3. Cook the chicken until it's white and no longer pink in the middle, about 5-6 minutes.
Raw chicken with spices in skillet
Cooked chicken with onions in skillet

Creating the Sauce Base

  1. Add the chopped onions, butter, and minced garlic to the chicken. Sauté until the onions are soft, the garlic is fragrant, and the butter has melted, about 2-3 minutes.
  2. Stir in the tomato paste and sun-dried tomatoes. Cook for another minute, allowing the tomato paste to caramelize slightly.
Cooked chicken with sundried tomatoes in skillet
Chicken gnocchi sauce with cream and spices

Adding Gnocchi to Your Chicken Dish

  1. Pour the chicken stock and heavy cream into the skillet. Season with Herbs de Provence and red pepper flakes, then stir to combine.
  2. Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer, then add the gnocchi directly to the sauce. (If the sauce seems too thick, add up to 1 cup of water according to your preference.)
  3. Cook the gnocchi in the sauce for 3-4 minutes, following package instructions, or until they're soft and tender.
Uncooked gnocchi in creamy sauce in skillet
Creamy chicken gnocchi in white bowl with basil

Finishing Your Marry Me Gnocchi

  1. Add the Parmesan cheese and chopped basil, stirring gently to combine everything. Taste for seasoning and adjust with salt and pepper as needed.
  2. Simmer for one more minute, then remove from heat.
  3. Serve immediately, garnished with additional Parmesan cheese and fresh basil if desired.

Storage Tips for Leftover Chicken Gnocchi

I definitely prefer serving gnocchi the day it's made—the texture is just perfect when it's fresh!

However, if you do have leftovers (which rarely happens in our house!), here's what to do:

  • Store in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • When reheating, add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen the sauce, as it will thicken when cold.
  • Reheat gently on the stovetop or in the microwave until just warmed through.
Chicken gnocchi in skillet with basil and parmesan easy recipe

Make Your Own Version of Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

Dietary Adaptations

  • Make it vegetarian: Skip the chicken and use vegetable stock instead of chicken stock. You might want to add mushrooms or spinach for extra texture and flavor. I tried this version for my vegetarian friend Lucy, and she couldn't stop raving about it!
  • Dairy-free option: Check out how I make my Dairy-Free Marry Me Chicken and apply the same principles here. Use coconut cream, soya heavy cream, or plain coconut milk in place of the heavy cream.
  • Gluten-free needs: Many store-bought gnocchi contain wheat, so look specifically for gluten-free gnocchi, or try my Keto Marry Me Chicken and serve it over cauliflower gnocchi!
top view of a Creamy chicken gnocchi in white bowl with basil and parmesan

Try These Flavor Twists with Chicken Gnocchi

  • Add a handful of fresh spinach during the last minute of cooking
  • Throw in some sautéed mushrooms for an earthy flavor
  • Include a splash of white wine before adding the stock
  • Try it with Italian sausage instead of chicken

Frequently Asked Questions About Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

What pairs with Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi?

Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi pairs beautifully with light sides like a fresh green salad, roasted vegetables, garlic bread, or a glass of white wine. Since the dish is rich and creamy, simple sides that balance the richness work best.

Can you make Marry Me Chicken ahead of time?

Yes, you can make the chicken and sauce ahead of time, but it's best to cook the gnocchi fresh when serving. Store the prepared chicken mixture separately in the refrigerator for up to 2 days, then cook the gnocchi and combine everything when ready to serve.

How to make store-bought gnocchi taste better?

Turn store-bought gnocchi into something extra special by cooking it straight in the sauce, just like this recipe suggests, so it soaks up all the goodness. For even more texture and taste, try lightly toasting the gnocchi in butter first, then finish with freshly grated Parmesan, a handful of fresh herbs, and a splash of good olive oil.

Recipes You May Like

  • Creamy Mushroom Garlic Chicken – Another quick, creamy chicken dish that's perfect for weeknights
  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken – If you love this marry me chicken, you'll adore this garlicky version
  • Crockpot Marry Me Chicken Pasta – For days when you want all the flavor with even less hands-on time

Final Thoughts on This Delicious Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

There's a reason dishes like this get the "marry me" name – they're the kind of food that makes people fall in love! The combo of tender chicken, pillowy gnocchi, and that creamy sun-dried tomato sauce is just magical.

I've made this recipe three times in the past month alone, and Emily now requests it weekly!

What I love most is how something so special can be so easy to make. You don't need fancy techniques or hard-to-find ingredients – just 30 minutes and one pan.

Whether you're cooking for a date, your family, or just treating yourself to something delicious, this marry me chicken gnocchi hits all the right notes.

If you try this recipe, please let me know in the comments! I'd love to hear if it earned its "marry me" status in your home too.

Pinterest CTA
Marry me chicken gnocchi
Marry me chicken gnocchi recipe
Chicken gnocchi in skillet with basil and parmesan

Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi

This creamy 30-minute Marry Me Chicken Gnocchi combines tender chicken, potato gnocchi, and a rich sun-dried tomato sauce that's so delicious, it might just inspire a marriage proposal!
5 from 2 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 20 minutes mins
Total Time 30 minutes mins
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, British
Servings 4 servings
Calories 692 kcal

Equipment

  • Large Skillet

Ingredients
  

  • 1.5 lb potato gnocchi
  • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken breast cut into cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 0.5 tablespoon Herbs de Provence
  • 0.5 teaspoon red pepper flakes or to taste
  • 0.5 tablespoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 0.5 cup onions chopped
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 0.33 cup sun-dried tomatoes chopped
  • 10 g fresh basil chopped, plus more for garnish
  • 0.5 cup chicken stock
  • 0.5 cup heavy cream
  • 1 cup water optional, use according to preference
  • 0.5 cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese plus more for garnish
  • salt and black pepper to taste

Instructions
 

  • Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat until hot.
  • Add the cubed chicken breast and season with smoked paprika, garlic powder, salt, and black pepper. Stir to combine. Cook the chicken until it's white and no longer pink in the middle, about 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the chopped onions, butter, and minced garlic to the chicken. Sauté until the onions are soft, the garlic is fragrant, and the butter has melted, about 2-3 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomato paste and sun-dried tomatoes. Cook for another minute, allowing the tomato paste to caramelize slightly.
  • Pour the chicken stock and heavy cream into the skillet. Season with Herbs de Provence and red pepper flakes, then stir to combine.
  • Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer, then add the gnocchi directly to the sauce. (If the sauce seems too thick, add up to 1 cup of water according to your preference.)
  • Cook the gnocchi in the sauce for 3-4 minutes, following package instructions, or until they're soft and tender.
  • Add the Parmesan cheese and chopped basil, stirring gently to combine everything. Taste for seasoning and adjust with salt and pepper as needed.
  • Simmer for one more minute, then remove from heat. Serve immediately, garnished with additional Parmesan cheese and fresh basil if desired.

Notes

I prefer serving gnocchi the day it's made for the best texture. Store leftovers in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 3 days. When reheating, add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen the sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 692kcalCarbohydrates: 73gProtein: 36gFat: 29gSaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 118mgSodium: 768mgPotassium: 965mgFiber: 6gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 1401IUVitamin C: 8mgCalcium: 104mgIron: 9mg
Keyword Creamy, marry me chicken gnocchi, One-pan, Quick Dinner
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

Crockpot Marry Me Chicken Recipe

May 10, 2025 by Sarah 2 Comments

Here we go again – another viral recipe that promises to change your life. But guess what? This crockpot marry me chicken might actually live up to the hype.

I've been making this creamy, flavor-packed chicken for years now, and honestly? It's become one of those recipes I turn to when I need a guaranteed crowd-pleaser (or when I want to impress someone special!).

The name always makes me laugh – apparently this dish is supposed to be so good it'll inspire a marriage proposal. While I can't promise diamonds and wedding bells, I can tell you that my family asks for this at least twice a month.

Emily literally said "Mom, THIS is the one" the first time she tried it. And you know what? She wasn't wrong.

What makes this slow cooker marry me chicken special? It's the combination of tender chicken breasts swimming in a rich cream sauce with sun-dried tomatoes, garlic, and herbs.

The best part? You can throw everything in your crockpot and basically forget about it until dinner time.

Need another creamy chicken option? Check out my crockpot marry me chicken pasta for a complete meal with noodles included!

Why You Will Love This Crockpot Marry Me Chicken Recipe

Slow cooker chicken in creamy sauce

  • Absolutely foolproof – I've tested this recipe dozens of times, and it works perfectly even if you're not a kitchen pro
  • Set-it-and-forget-it simplicity – About 10 minutes of prep, then your slow cooker does all the work
  • Restaurant-quality taste – That creamy sun-dried tomato sauce is pure luxury on a plate
  • Perfect for meal prep – Makes enough for 6 servings and the leftovers are even better the next day
  • Customizable to your taste – Works great with different proteins and you can adjust the creaminess level
  • Budget-friendly – Uses simple ingredients you probably already have (except maybe the sun-dried tomatoes)

Ingredients for Your Crockpot Marry Me Chicken

  • 6 Boneless Skinless Chicken Breasts – Look for pieces that are roughly the same size for even cooking
  • 2 Tablespoons Olive Oil – For browning the chicken (trust me, this step is worth it!)
  • 1 ½ cups Chicken Broth – Low-sodium works best so you can control the salt level
  • 3 Tablespoons All Purpose Flour – This helps thicken the sauce to perfection
  • 1 cup Heavy Whipping Cream – The secret to that luxurious sauce
  • 1 Tablespoon Minced Garlic – Fresh is best, but jarred works in a pinch
  • ½ teaspoon Salt – Adjust to taste
  • 1 teaspoon Black Pepper – Freshly ground if possible
  • 1 teaspoon Italian Seasoning – A blend of herbs that brings everything together
  • 1 teaspoon Paprika – Adds a subtle smokiness and beautiful color
  • ⅓ cup Sun Dried Tomatoes – Drained and roughly chopped
  • 2 Tablespoons Salted Butter – For extra richness
  • Fresh Basil – Optional for garnish, but highly recommended
  • Grated Parmesan Cheese – Also optional, but who doesn't love extra cheese?

How to Make Marry Me Chicken in Your Crockpot

Preparing the Chicken

  1. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. While it's heating, pat your chicken breasts dry with paper towels – this helps them brown better.
  2. Once the oil is shimmering (you'll see little ripples), carefully place the chicken in the skillet.
  3. Don't crowd the pan – work in batches if needed. Brown each side for 2-3 minutes. You're not cooking them through, just creating a nice golden crust that adds tons of flavor.
Sauce mixture in glass bowl with whisk
Chicken in creamy sauce with parsley

Creating the Sauce Base

  1. While the chicken is browning, grab a small mixing bowl and whisk together the chicken broth and flour. Make sure there are no lumps – nobody wants a chunky sauce!
  2. Pour this mixture into your crockpot.
  3. Add the minced garlic, salt, pepper, Italian seasoning, and paprika to the crockpot. Give everything a gentle stir to combine.
  4. This is your flavor foundation, and trust me, your kitchen will start smelling amazing already.
Stirring creamy chicken in slow cooker
Chicken in creamy sauce on spaghetti

Slow Cooking Magic

  1. Place your browned chicken breasts in the crockpot, nestling them into that flavorful broth mixture.
  2. Top the chicken with the sun-dried tomatoes and butter. I like to distribute the tomatoes evenly so every piece gets some of that tangy goodness.
  3. Cover and cook on low for 6-7 hours or on high for 3-3.5 hours.
  4. The chicken is done when it reaches 165°F internally and shreds easily with a fork.

The Cream Finale

Here's the crucial part – stir in the heavy whipping cream during the last 60 minutes if cooking on low, or the last 30 minutes if cooking on high.

This timing prevents the cream from curdling and ensures a silky smooth sauce.

Serve warm over pasta, rice, or even cauliflower rice if you're watching carbs.

Top with fresh basil and a generous sprinkle of Parmesan cheese. The aroma alone will have everyone gathering in the kitchen!

Chicken in creamy sauce with sun dried tomatoes

Storage and Reheating Your Crockpot Marry Me Chicken

Refrigerate any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

The flavors actually intensify overnight, making day-two marry me chicken almost better than fresh!

For longer storage, you can freeze portions in freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months.

When you're ready to enjoy it again, thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat gently in the microwave or on the stovetop with a splash of cream to refresh the sauce.

Variations to Try with Your Marry Me Chicken Crockpot Recipe

  • Protein Swap – Boneless, skinless chicken thighs work beautifully and stay even more tender
  • Spice It Up – Add a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for some heat
  • Lighter Version – Use half-and-half instead of heavy cream to reduce calories
  • Broth Options – Chicken stock works just as well as broth, or try vegetable broth for a different flavor profile
  • Serving Suggestions – Besides pasta, this is incredible over mashed potatoes, polenta, or spiralized zucchini noodles

Want more variations? My marry me chicken tortellini adds cheese-filled pasta right into the mix!

Creamy chicken served over pasta

Tips and Tricks for the Best Marry Me Chicken in Crockpot

Sauce Thickness

If your sauce seems too thin, leave the lid off for the last 15-20 minutes of cooking.

The liquid will reduce and thicken naturally.

Alternatively, you can reduce the chicken broth to 1 ¼ cups for a thicker sauce from the start.

Browning Matters

I know it's tempting to skip the browning step (more dishes, ugh!), but those few extra minutes create a depth of flavor you can't achieve any other way.

The caramelized bits on the chicken add so much to the final dish.

Dairy Tips

Always add dairy products like cream toward the end of slow cooking.

The prolonged heat can cause them to separate or curdle, resulting in a grainy texture nobody wants.

Chicken Selection

Choose chicken breasts that are similar in size and thickness.

If some are much larger, consider cutting them in half horizontally to ensure even cooking.

Frequently Asked Questions About Crockpot Marry Me Chicken

Can you cook marry me chicken in a slow cooker?

Yes! This recipe is specifically designed for a crockpot/slow cooker. Cook on low for 6-7 hours or high for 3-3.5 hours, adding cream during the last hour.

Is it OK to put raw chicken in slow cooker?

Yes, but for best results this recipe browns the chicken first in a skillet for 2-3 minutes per side before adding to the slow cooker for better flavor and texture.

Why do they call it marry me chicken?

The name comes from the idea that this creamy, flavorful dish is so delicious it might inspire a marriage proposal after tasting it.

Can you put frozen chicken straight into a slow cooker?

While possible, it's not recommended for this recipe. The chicken should be thawed first to ensure even cooking and proper browning in the skillet before slow cooking.

Recipes You May Like

  • Marry Me Chicken Orzo Recipe – The same amazing flavors with orzo pasta cooked right in
  • Keto Marry Me Chicken – A low-carb version that doesn't sacrifice any flavor
  • Creamy Garlic Parmesan Chicken – Another rich and creamy chicken dish you'll love

Make This Crockpot Marry Me Chicken Tonight

Creamy chicken pasta with basil

So there you have it – the crockpot marry me chicken that's earned a permanent spot in my recipe rotation.

It's one of those dishes that looks and tastes way more complicated than it actually is.

The combination of tender chicken, creamy sauce, and those tangy sun-dried tomatoes creates something truly special.

Whether you're cooking for a special someone or just want to treat your family to an incredible dinner, this recipe delivers every single time.

The slow cooker does all the heavy lifting while you go about your day – what's not to love about that?

Give it a try and let me know how it turns out! I'd love to hear if this chicken lives up to its romantic name in your house.

And don't forget to save this recipe to Pinterest so you can find it easily next time the craving strikes.

Until next time, happy cooking!

Pinterest CTA
Crockpot Marry Me Chicken
Crockpot Marry Me Chicken recipe
Creamy chicken in slow cooker

Crockpot Marry Me Chicken

This crockpot marry me chicken features tender chicken breasts swimming in a rich cream sauce with sun-dried tomatoes, garlic, and herbs. Set it and forget it for an incredibly flavorful dinner that's ready in 6 hours!
5 from 2 votes
Print Recipe Pin Recipe
Prep Time 10 minutes mins
Cook Time 6 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
Total Time 6 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine American, Italian
Servings 6 servings
Calories 376 kcal

Equipment

  • Crockpot/Slow Cooker
  • Large Skillet
  • Mixing Bowl

Ingredients
  

  • 6 Boneless Skinless Chicken Breasts
  • 2 Tablespoons Olive Oil
  • 1.5 cups Chicken Broth
  • 3 Tablespoons All Purpose Flour
  • 1 cup Heavy Whipping Cream
  • 1 Tablespoon Minced Garlic
  • 0.5 teaspoon Salt
  • 1 teaspoon Black Pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Italian Seasoning
  • 1 teaspoon Paprika
  • 0.33 cup Sun Dried Tomatoes drained
  • 2 Tablespoons Salted Butter
  • Fresh Basil optional for garnish
  • Grated Parmesan Cheese optional for garnish

Instructions
 

  • Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium high heat. Brown the chicken breasts in the oil for 2-3 minutes per side.
  • In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the chicken broth and flour. Add this mixture to a crock pot. Add in the minced garlic, salt, pepper, Italian seasoning and paprika. Gently mix to combine these ingredients.
  • Place the chicken breasts in the crock pot and top the chicken with the sun dried tomatoes and butter. Cover and cook on low for 6-7 hours or on high for 3-3.5 hours until the chicken is cooked through.
  • Stir the heavy whipping cream into the crock pot for the last 60 minutes if cooking on low or 30 minutes if cooking on higher.
  • Serve warm over pasta topped with the fresh basil and grated parmesan cheese. Enjoy!

Notes

Refrigerate the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
You can easily use boneless skinless chicken thighs in this recipe instead of chicken breasts if you prefer.

Nutrition

Calories: 376kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 27gFat: 26gSaturated Fat: 13gCholesterol: 128mgSodium: 591mgPotassium: 703mgFiber: 1gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 960IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 2mg
Keyword Creamy, crockpot chicken, marry me chicken, Slow Cooker, Sun-Dried Tomatoes
Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • Next Page »
my sidebar image

Hi! I'm Sarah!

Mom, food lover, photographer, and the creator behind EasyRecipesToTry. I share recipes that are simple to make but still full of flavor. I've been cooking since I was a teenager and now test all my recipes while raising my daughter Emily.

Nothing complicated here - just good food that fits into busy days. Follow me on Pinterest for more easy meal ideas!

More about me

Popular

  • Taco dip with scoop removed side view
    Seven Layer Taco Dip Recipe
  • baked ham cheese rolls
    Easy Ham And Cheese Pinwheels Recipe
  • close up stuffed mushroom with herbs
    Stuffed Mushrooms With Cream Cheese Recipe
  • bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers in white bowl
    Bacon Wrapped Air Fryer Jalapeno Poppers Recipe
  • hand lifting spinach dip from bread bowl
    Spinach Artichoke Dip In A Bread Bowl
  • Hot buffalo chicken dip with melted cheese and tortilla chip
    The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe
  • boule fromage avec crackers
    3 Ingredient Cheese Ball Recipe
  • Sliced cauliflower pizza with basil
    Low Carb Cauliflower Pizza Crust Recipe

Cookies Recipes

  • Frosted chocolate cookies with Oreo crumbs on white plate
    Chocolate Oreo Crumbl Cookie Recipe
  • sugar cookies with smooth pink frosting on tray
    The Best Crumbl Pink Sugar Cookie Recipe
  • soft cookie with gooey chocolate center
    Crumbl Oatmeal Cookie Recipe
  • classic peanut butter cookies with bite on top
    Copycat Crumbl Peanut Butter Cookie Recipe
  • Frosted cornbread cookies with honey drizzle and honey dipper
    The Best Crumbl Cornbread Cookie Recipe
  • Stack of bitten frosted cookies on stone surface
    Copycat Crumbl Chocolate Cupcake Cookies
  • Chocolate chip cookie dough in a glass jar
    Protein Cookie Dough Recipe
  • Blue cookie with Oreo and chocolate chips
    The Best Cookie Monster Cookies Recipe

Footer

↑ back to top

About

  • Privacy Policy
  • Accessibility Policy
  • Affiliate Disclaimer
  • Terms and conditions

Welcome

Explore

  • Recipe Index
  • About

As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Copyright © 2025 Easyrecipestotry

Rate This Recipe

Your vote:




A rating is required
A name is required
An email is required